Operator'S Manual: For Material Handling, Press Tending, Cutting, and Other Applications

DX100
OPERATOR’S MANUAL
FOR MATERIAL HANDLING, PRESS TENDING, CUTTING,
AND OTHER APPLICATIONS
Upon receipt of the product and prior to initial operation, read these instructions thoroughly, and retain
for future reference.
MOTOMAN INSTRUCTIONS
MOTOMAN- INSTRUCTIONS
DX100 INSTRUCTIONS
DX100 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
DX100 MAINTENANCE MANUAL
The DX100 operator’s manuals above correspond to specific usage.
Be sure to use the appropriate manual.
Part Number: 155507-1CD

Revision: 7
MANUAL NO. 1 of 554

RE-CSO-A037 7
155507-1CD
DX100
Copyright © 2018, 2015, 2013, 2012 Yaskawa America, Inc.
Terms of Use and Copyright Notice

All rights reserved. This manual is freely available as a service to Yaskawa
customers to assist in the operation of Motoman robots, related equipment
and software This manual is copyrighted property of Yaskawa and may
not be sold or redistributed in any way. You are welcome to copy this
document to your computer or mobile device for easy access but you may
not copy the PDF files to another website, blog, cloud storage site or any
other means of storing or distributing online content.
Printed in the United States of America
First Printing, 2012
Yaskawa America, Inc.

Motoman Robotics Division
100 Automation Way
Miamisburg, OH 45342
Phone: 937-847-6200
www.motoman.com
ii 2 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
DX100
MANDATORY
• This manual explains the various components of the DX100 system
and general operations. Read this manual carefully and be sure to
understand its contents before handling the DX100.
• General items related to safety are listed in Section 1: Safety of the
DX100 Instructions. To ensure correct and safe operation, carefully
read the DX100 Instruction before reading this manual.
CAUTION
• Some drawings in this manual are shown with the protective covers
or shields removed for clarity. Be sure all covers and shields are
replaced before operating this product.
• The drawings and photos in this manual are representative
examples and differences may exist between them and the
delivered product.
• YASKAWA may modify this model without notice when necessary
due to product improvements, modifications, or changes in
specifications. If such modification is made, the manual number will
also be revised.
• If your copy of the manual is damaged or lost, contact a YASKAWA
representative to order a new copy. The representatives are listed
on the back cover. Be sure to tell the representative the manual
number listed on the front cover.
• YASKAWA is not responsible for incidents arising from unauthorized
modification of its products. Unauthorized modification voids your
product’s warranty.
iii 3 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
DX100
We suggest that you obtain and review a copy of the ANSI/RIA National
Safety Standard for Industrial Robots and Robot Systems (ANSI/RIA
R15.06-2012). You can obtain this document from the Robotic Industries
Association (RIA) at the following address:
Robotic Industries Association
900 Victors Way
P.O. Box 3724
Ann Arbor, Michigan 48106
TEL: (734) 994-6088
FAX: (734) 994-3338
www.roboticsonline.com
Ultimately, well-trained personnel are the best safeguard against
accidents and damage that can result from improper operation of the
equipment. The customer is responsible for providing adequately trained
personnel to operate, program, and maintain the equipment. NEVER
ALLOW UNTRAINED PERSONNEL TO OPERATE, PROGRAM, OR
REPAIR THE EQUIPMENT!
We recommend approved Yaskawa training courses for all personnel
involved with the operation, programming, or repair of the equipment.
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a
Class A digital device, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC rules. These limits
are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful
interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial
environment. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio
frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the
instruction manual, may cause harmful interference to radio
communications.
iv 4 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
DX100 Notes for Safe Operation
Notes for Safe Operation

Read this manual carefully before installation, operation, maintenance, or
inspection of the DX100.
In this manual, the Notes for Safe Operation are classified as “DANGER”,
“WARNING,” “CAUTION,” “MANDATORY,” or “PROHIBITED.”
Indicates an imminent hazardous

DANGER situation which, if not avoided, could
result in death or serious injury to
personnel.
Indicates a potentially hazardous

WARNING situation which, if not avoided, could
result in death or serious injury to
personnel.
Indicates a potentially hazardous

CAUTION situation which, if not avoided, could
result in minor or moderate injury to
personnel and damage to equipment.
It may also be used to alert against
unsafe practices.
Always be sure to follow explicitly the

MANDATORY items listed under this heading.
Must never be performed.

PROHIBITED
Even items described as “CAUTION” may result in a serious accident in

some situations.
At any rate, be sure to follow these important items.
To ensure safe and efficient operation at all times, be sure

NOTE to follow all instructions, even if not designated as
“DANGER”, “CAUTION” and “WARNING.”
v 5 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
DX100 Notes for Safe Operation
WARNING
• Before operating the manipulator, check that servo power is
turned off when the emergency stop buttons on the front door
of the DX 100 and programing pendant are pressed. 
When the servo power is turned off, the SERVO ON LED on the
programing pendant is turned off.
Injury or damage to machinery may result if the emergency stop circuit
cannot stop the manipulator during an emergency. The manipulator
should not be used if the emergency stop buttons do not function.
Figure 1: Emergency Stop Button
• Once the emergency stop button is released, clear the cell of

all items which could interfere with the operation of the
manipulator. 
Then turn the servo power ON.
Injury may result from unintentional or unexpected manipulator
motion.
Figure 2: Release of EM
TURN
• Observe the following precautions when performing teaching

operations within the P-point maximum envelope of the
manipulator:
– Be sure to use a lockout device to the safeguarding when going
inside. Also, display the sign that the operation is being
performed inside the safeguarding and make sure no one closes
the safeguarding.
– View the manipulator from the front whenever possible.
– Always follow the predetermined operating procedure.
– Keep in mind the emergency response measures against the
manipulator’s unexpected motion toward you.
– Ensure that you have a safe place to retreat in case of
emergency.
Improper or unintended manipulator operation may result in injury.
• Confirm that no person is present in the P-point maximum envelope
of the manipulator and that you are in a safe location before:
– Turning on the power for the DX100.
– Moving the manipulator with the programming pendant.
– Running the system in the check mode.
– Performing automatic operations.
Injury may result if anyone enters the working envelope of the
manipulator during operation. Always press an emergency stop button
immediately if there are problems.
The emergency stop button is located on the right of the front door of
the DX100 and programing pendant.
vi 6 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
DX100 Definition of Terms Used In this Manual
CAUTION
• Perform the following inspection procedures prior to conducting
manipulator teaching. If problems are found, repair them
immediately, and be sure that all other necessary processing has
been performed.
– Check for problems in manipulator movement.
– Check for damage to insulation and sheathing of external wires.
• Always return the programming pendant to the hook on the cabinet
of the DX100 after use.
The programming pendant can be damaged if it is left in the
manipulator's work area, on the floor, or near fixtures.
• Read and understand the Explanation of Warning Labels in the
DX100 Instructions before operating the manipulator.
Definition of Terms Used In this Manual

The MOTOMAN is the YASKAWA industrial robot product.
The MOTOMAN usually consists of the manipulator, the controller, the
programming pendant, and supply cables.
In this manual, the equipment is designated as follows.
Equipment Manual Designation
DX100 controller DX100
DX100 programming pendant Programming pendant
Cable between the manipulator and the Manipulator cable
controller
vii 7 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
DX100 Description of the Operation Procedure
Descriptions of the programming pendant keys, buttons, and displays are

shown as follows:
Equipment Manual Designation
Programming  Character Keys The keys which have characters printed on
Pendant them are denoted with [ ].
ex. [ENTER]
Symbol Keys The keys which have a symbol printed on
them are not denoted with [ ] but depicted
with a small picture.
GO BACK
ex. page key PAGE
The cursor key is an exception, and a picture

is not shown.
Axis Keys  “Axis Keys” and “Numeric Keys” are generic
Numeric Keys names for the keys for axis operation and
number input.
Keys pressed When two keys are to be pressed
simultaneously simultaneously, the keys are shown with a
“+” sign between them,
ex. [SHIFT]+[COORD]
Displays The menu displayed in the programming
pendant is denoted with { }.
ex. {JOB}
Description of the Operation Procedure

In the explanation of the operation procedure, the expression "Select • • • "
means that the cursor is moved to the object item and the SELECT key is
pressed, or that the item is directly selected by touching the screen.
Registered Trademark
In this manual, names of companies, corporations, or products are
trademarks, registered trademarks, or brand names for each company or
corporation. The indications of (R) and TM are omitted.
viii 8 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
DX100 Safeguarding Tips
Safeguarding Tips
All operators, programmers, maintenance personnel, supervisors, and
anyone working near the system must become familiar with the operation
of this equipment. All personnel involved with the operation of the
equipment must understand potential dangers of operation. General
safeguarding tips are as follows:
• Improper operation can result in personal injury and/or damage to
the equipment. Only trained personnel familiar with the operation of
this equipment, the operator's manuals, the system equipment, and
options and accessories should be permitted to operate this
equipment.
• Improper connections can damage the equipment. All connections
must be made within the standard voltage and current ratings of the
equipment.
• The system must be placed in Emergency Stop (E-Stop) mode
whenever it is not in use.
• In accordance with ANSI/RIA R15.06-2012, section 4.2.5, Sources of
Energy, use lockout/tagout procedures during equipment
maintenance. Refer also to Section 1910.147 (29CFR, Part 1910),
Occupational Safety and Health Standards for General Industry
(OSHA).
Mechanical Safety Devices

The safe operation of this equipment is ultimately the users responsibility.
The conditions under which the equipment will be operated safely should
be reviewed by the user. The user must be aware of the various national
codes, ANSI/RIA R15.06-2012 safety standards, and other local codes
that may pertain to the installation and use of this equipment.
Additional safety measures for personnel and equipment may be required
depending on system installation, operation, and/or location. The following
safety equipment is provided as standard:
• Safety barriers
• Door interlocks
• Emergency stop palm buttons located on operator station
Check all safety equipment frequently for proper operation. Repair or
replace any non-functioning safety equipment immediately.
ix 9 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
DX100 Programming, Operation, and Maintenance Safety
Programming, Operation, and Maintenance Safety

All operators, programmers, maintenance personnel, supervisors, and
anyone working near the system must become familiar with the operation
of this equipment. Improper operation can result in personal injury and/or
damage to the equipment. Only trained personnel familiar with the
operation, manuals, electrical design, and equipment interconnections of
this equipment should be permitted to program, or maintain the system.
All personnel involved with the operation of the equipment must
understand potential dangers of operation.
• Inspect the equipment to be sure no potentially hazardous conditions
exist. Be sure the area is clean and free of water, oil, debris, etc.
• Be sure that all safeguards are in place. Check all safety equipment
for proper operation. Repair or replace any non-functioning safety
equipment immediately.
• Check the E-Stop button on the operator station for proper operation
before programming. The equipment must be placed in Emergency
Stop (E-Stop) mode whenever it is not in use.
• Back up all programs and jobs onto suitable media before program
changes are made. To avoid loss of information, programs, or jobs, a
backup must always be made before any service procedures are
done and before any changes are made to options, accessories, or
equipment.
• Any modifications to the controller unit can cause severe personal
injury or death, as well as damage to the robot! Do not make any
modifications to the controller unit. Making any changes without the
written permission from Yaskawa will void the warranty.
• Some operations require standard passwords and some require
special passwords.
• The equipment allows modifications of the software for maximum
performance. Care must be taken when making these modifications.
All modifications made to the software will change the way the
equipment operates and can cause severe personal injury or death,
as well as damage parts of the system. Double check all
modifications under every mode of operation to ensure that the
changes have not created hazards or dangerous situations.
• This equipment has multiple sources of electrical supply. Electrical
interconnections are made between the controller and other
equipment. Disconnect and lockout/tagout all electrical circuits
before making any modifications or connections.
• Do not perform any maintenance procedures before reading and
understanding the proper procedures in the appropriate manual.
• Use proper replacement parts.
• Improper connections can damage the equipment. All connections
must be made within the standard voltage and current ratings of the
equipment.
x 10 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
DX100 Maintenance Safety
Maintenance Safety
Turn the power OFF and disconnect and lockout/tagout all electrical
circuits before making any modifications or connections.
Perform only the maintenance described in this manual. Maintenance
other than specified in this manual should be performed only by Yaskawa-
trained, qualified personnel.
Summary of Warning Information

This manual is provided to help users establish safe conditions for
operating the equipment. Specific considerations and precautions are also
described in the manual, but appear in the form of Dangers, Warnings,
Cautions, and Notes.
It is important that users operate the equipment in accordance with this
instruction manual and any additional information which may be provided
by Yaskawa. Address any questions regarding the safe and proper
operation of the equipment to Yaskawa Customer Support.
xi 11 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
DX100 Customer Support Information
Customer Support Information

If you need assistance with any aspect of your DX100 system, please
contact YASKAWA Customer Support at the following 24-hour telephone
number:
(937) 847-3200
For routine technical inquiries, you can also contact YASKAWA Customer
Support at the following e-mail address:
[email protected]
When using e-mail to contact YASKAWA Customer Support, please

provide a detailed description of your issue, along with complete contact
information. Please allow approximately 24 to 36 hours for a response to
your inquiry.
Please use e-mail for routine inquiries only. If you have an

NOTE urgent or emergency need for service, replacement parts,
or information, you must contact YASKAWA Customer
Support at the telephone number shown above.
Please have the following information ready before you call Customer
Support:
• System DX100
• Robots ___________________________
• Primary Application ___________________________
• Controller DX100
• Software Version Access this information on the

Programming Pendant’s LCD
display screen by selecting {MAIN
MENU} - {SYSTEM INFO} -
{VERSION}
• Robot Serial Number Located on the robot data plate
• Robot Sales Order Number Located on the DX100 controller

data plate
xii 12 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
DX100 Table of Contents
Table of Contents
1 Introduction ..................................................................................................................................... 1-1
1.1 DX100 Overview................................................................................................................ 1-1
1.2 Programming Pendant....................................................................................................... 1-2
1.2.1 Programming Pendant Overview.......................................................................... 1-2
1.2.2 Key Description .................................................................................................... 1-3

1.2.2.1 Character Keys ....................................................................................... 1-3
1.2.2.2 Symbol Keys ........................................................................................... 1-3
1.2.2.3 Axis Keys and Numeric Keys .................................................................. 1-3
1.2.2.4 Keys Pressed Simultaneously................................................................. 1-3
1.2.3 Programming Pendant Keys................................................................................. 1-4
1.2.4 Programming Pendant Display........................................................................... 1-11

1.2.4.1 Five Display Areas ................................................................................ 1-11
1.2.4.2 General-purpose Display Area .............................................................. 1-12
1.2.4.3 Main Menu Area .................................................................................... 1-13
1.2.4.4 Status Display Area............................................................................... 1-13
1.2.4.5 Human Interface Display Area .............................................................. 1-16
1.2.4.6 Menu Area............................................................................................. 1-16
1.2.5 Screen Descriptions ........................................................................................... 1-17
1.2.6 Character Input Operation .................................................................................. 1-18

1.2.6.1 Character Input ..................................................................................... 1-18
1.2.6.2 Operation .............................................................................................. 1-18
1.2.6.3 Alphanumeric Input ............................................................................... 1-19
1.2.6.4 Symbol Input ......................................................................................... 1-20
1.2.6.5 Register Word Function......................................................................... 1-21
1.3 Mode................................................................................................................................ 1-29
1.3.1 Teach Mode ....................................................................................................... 1-29
1.3.2 Play Mode .......................................................................................................... 1-29
1.3.3 Remote Mode ..................................................................................................... 1-29
1.3.4 Teach Mode Priority ........................................................................................... 1-29
1.4 Security Mode.................................................................................................................. 1-30
1.4.1 Types of Security Modes .................................................................................... 1-30
1.4.2 Changing Security Modes .................................................................................. 1-35
2 Manipulator Coordinate Systems and Operations .......................................................................... 2-1
2.1 Control Groups and Coordinate Systems .......................................................................... 2-1
2.1.1 Control Group ....................................................................................................... 2-1
2.1.2 Types of Coordinate Systems .............................................................................. 2-2
xiii 13 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
2.2 General Operations............................................................................................................ 2-3

2.2.0.1 Check Safety ........................................................................................... 2-3
2.2.0.2 Select Teach Mode ................................................................................. 2-3
2.2.0.3 Select Control Group ............................................................................... 2-3
2.2.0.4 Select Coordinate System ....................................................................... 2-3
2.2.0.5 Select Manual Speed .............................................................................. 2-4
2.2.0.6 Servo ON................................................................................................. 2-4
2.2.0.7 Axis Operation ......................................................................................... 2-4
2.2.0.8 HIGH SPEED .......................................................................................... 2-4
2.3 Coordinate Systems and Axis Operation ........................................................................... 2-5
2.3.1 Joint Coordinates.................................................................................................. 2-5
2.3.2 Cartesian Coordinates .......................................................................................... 2-6
2.3.3 Cylindrical Coordinates......................................................................................... 2-7
2.3.4 Tool Coordinates .................................................................................................. 2-9

2.3.4.1 Selecting Tool........................................................................................ 2-11
2.3.5 User Coordinates................................................................................................ 2-12

2.3.5.1 Selecting User Coordinates................................................................... 2-13
2.3.5.2 Examples of User Coordinate Utilization ............................................... 2-14
2.3.6 External Axis....................................................................................................... 2-14
2.3.7 Control Point Operation ...................................................................................... 2-15

2.3.7.1 Control Point Change ............................................................................ 2-18
3 Teaching ......................................................................................................................................... 3-1
3.1 Preparation for Teaching ................................................................................................... 3-1
3.1.1 Checking Emergency Stop Buttons ...................................................................... 3-1
3.1.2 Setting the Teach Lock ......................................................................................... 3-1
3.1.3 Registering a Job.................................................................................................. 3-2

3.1.3.1 Registering Job Names ........................................................................... 3-2
3.1.3.2 Registering Jobs...................................................................................... 3-2
3.1.3.3 Registering Comments ............................................................................ 3-3
3.1.3.4 Registering Control Groups ..................................................................... 3-3
3.1.3.5 Switching to the Teaching Window.......................................................... 3-4
3.2 Teaching Operation ........................................................................................................... 3-5
3.2.1 Teaching Window ................................................................................................. 3-5
3.2.2 Interpolation Type and Play Speed....................................................................... 3-6

3.2.2.1 Joint Interpolation .................................................................................... 3-6
3.2.2.2 Linear Interpolation.................................................................................. 3-7
3.2.2.3 Circular Interpolation ............................................................................... 3-8
3.2.2.4 Spline Interpolation.................................................................................. 3-9
xiv 14 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
3.2.3 Teaching Steps .................................................................................................. 3-11

3.2.3.1 Registering Move Instructions ............................................................... 3-11
3.2.3.2 Registering Reference Point Instructions .............................................. 3-18
3.2.3.3 Registering Timer Instructions............................................................... 3-19
3.2.4 Overlapping the First and Last Steps ................................................................. 3-22
3.3 Checking Steps................................................................................................................ 3-23
3.3.1 FWD/BWD Key Operations ................................................................................ 3-23

3.3.1.1 Precautions When Using FWD / BWD Operations................................ 3-24
3.3.1.2 Selecting Manual Speed ....................................................................... 3-26
3.3.1.3 Moving to Reference Point .................................................................... 3-27
3.3.1.4 Test Operations..................................................................................... 3-27
3.3.1.5 Machine Lock Operation ....................................................................... 3-28
3.4 Modifying Steps ............................................................................................................... 3-29
3.4.1 Displaying the JOB CONTENT Window for Editing............................................ 3-33

3.4.1.1 Currently Called Up Job ........................................................................ 3-33
3.4.1.2 Calling Up Other Jobs ........................................................................... 3-33
3.4.2 Inserting Move Instructions................................................................................. 3-34
3.4.3 Deleting Move Instructions ................................................................................. 3-36
3.4.4 Modifying Move Instructions ............................................................................... 3-37

3.4.4.1 Modifying Position Data......................................................................... 3-37
3.4.4.2 Modifying Interpolation Type ................................................................. 3-37
3.4.5 Undo Operation .................................................................................................. 3-38
3.4.6 Modifying Reference Point Instructions .............................................................. 3-39

3.4.6.1 Deleting Reference Point Instructions ................................................... 3-39
3.4.6.2 Modifying Reference Point Instructions................................................. 3-39
3.4.7 Modifying Timer Instructions............................................................................... 3-40

3.4.7.1 Deleting Timer Instructions.................................................................... 3-40
3.4.7.2 Modifying Timer Instructions ................................................................. 3-40
3.5 Modifying Jobs................................................................................................................. 3-41
3.5.1 Calling Up a Job ................................................................................................. 3-41
3.5.2 Windows Related to Job..................................................................................... 3-41
3.5.3 JOB HEADER Window....................................................................................... 3-42
3.5.4 JOB CONTENT Window .................................................................................... 3-43

3.5.4.1 Switching the Address Area .................................................................. 3-44
3.5.5 COMMAND POSITION Window......................................................................... 3-48
3.5.6 JOB CAPACITY Window.................................................................................... 3-49
xv 15 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
3.6 Editing Instructions........................................................................................................... 3-50
3.6.1 Instruction Group ................................................................................................ 3-51
3.6.2 Inserting Instructions........................................................................................... 3-52
3.6.3 Deleting Instructions ........................................................................................... 3-55
3.6.4 Modifying Instructions ......................................................................................... 3-55
3.6.5 Modifying Additional Numeric Data..................................................................... 3-59
3.6.6 Modifying Additional Items.................................................................................. 3-60
3.6.7 Inserting Additional Items ................................................................................... 3-61
3.6.8 Deleting Additional Items .................................................................................... 3-63
3.7 Editing Jobs ..................................................................................................................... 3-64
3.7.1 Selecting the Range ........................................................................................... 3-66
3.7.2 Copying .............................................................................................................. 3-67
3.7.3 Cutting ................................................................................................................ 3-67
3.7.4 Pasting................................................................................................................ 3-68
3.7.5 Reverse Pasting ................................................................................................. 3-69
3.8 Test Operations ............................................................................................................... 3-70
3.8.1 Test Operation Procedures................................................................................. 3-70
3.9 Other Job-editing Functions............................................................................................. 3-71
3.9.1 Editing Play Speed ............................................................................................. 3-71

3.9.1.1 Modification of Speed Type ................................................................... 3-71
3.9.1.2 Relative Modification ............................................................................. 3-71
3.9.1.3 Modification by TRT (Traverse Time) .................................................... 3-73
3.9.2 Editing Interpolation Type ................................................................................... 3-75
3.9.3 Editing Condition Files ........................................................................................ 3-76
3.9.4 User Variables .................................................................................................... 3-77

3.9.4.1 Setting Byte, Integer, Double Precision Integer, 
and Real Type Variables ....................................................................... 3-78
3.9.4.2 Setting Character Type Variables.......................................................... 3-80
3.9.4.3 Registering Variable Name.................................................................... 3-82
3.9.4.4 Displaying Position Variables ................................................................ 3-83
3.9.4.5 Setting Position Variables...................................................................... 3-84
3.9.4.6 Setting Position Variables Using the Numeric Keys .............................. 3-85
3.9.4.7 Setting Position Variables Using the Axis Keys..................................... 3-87
3.9.4.8 Deleting Data Set of Position Variables................................................. 3-88
3.9.4.9 Checking Positions by Position Variables ............................................. 3-88
3.9.4.10 Manipulator Types ............................................................................... 3-89
3.9.5 Flip/No Flip.......................................................................................................... 3-90
3.9.6 R-axis Angle ....................................................................................................... 3-90
3.9.7 T-axis Angle........................................................................................................ 3-91
xvi 16 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
3.9.8 Front/Back .......................................................................................................... 3-91
3.9.9 Upper Arm/Lower Arm........................................................................................ 3-93
3.9.10 S-axis Angle ..................................................................................................... 3-93
3.9.11 Editing Local Variables ..................................................................................... 3-94

3.9.11.1 Setting the Number of Local Variables................................................ 3-96
3.9.12 Search .............................................................................................................. 3-98

3.9.12.1 Line Search ......................................................................................... 3-99
3.9.12.2 Step Search ...................................................................................... 3-100
3.9.12.3 Label Search ..................................................................................... 3-101
3.9.12.4 Instruction Search ............................................................................. 3-103
3.9.12.5 Tag Search........................................................................................ 3-105
4 Playback ......................................................................................................................................... 4-1
4.1 Preparation for Playback ................................................................................................... 4-1
4.1.1 Selecting a Job ..................................................................................................... 4-1

4.1.1.1 Calling a Job ........................................................................................... 4-1
4.1.1.2 Registering the Master Job ..................................................................... 4-2
4.1.1.3 Calling the Master Job............................................................................. 4-4
4.1.2 The PLAYBACK Window...................................................................................... 4-6

4.1.2.1 Display of Cycle Time.............................................................................. 4-6
4.1.2.2 Operation Cycle ...................................................................................... 4-7
4.2 Playback .......................................................................................................................... 4-10
4.2.1 Playback Operation ............................................................................................ 4-10

4.2.1.1 Selecting the Start Device ..................................................................... 4-10
4.2.1.2 Servo On ............................................................................................... 4-10
4.2.1.3 Start Operation ...................................................................................... 4-10
4.2.2 Special Playback Operations.............................................................................. 4-11

4.2.2.1 Low Speed Operation ........................................................................... 4-11
4.2.2.2 Limited Speed Operations..................................................................... 4-12
4.2.2.3 Dry-run Speed Operations .................................................................... 4-12
4.2.2.4 Machine Lock Operation ....................................................................... 4-13
4.2.2.5 Check Mode Operation ......................................................................... 4-13
4.2.2.6 Weaving Prohibit Setting during Check Mode Operation ...................... 4-13
4.2.2.7 Cancel All Special Operations............................................................... 4-14
4.3 Stop and Restart.............................................................................................................. 4-15
4.3.1 Hold .................................................................................................................... 4-15

4.3.1.1 Using the Programming Pendant .......................................................... 4-15
4.3.1.2 Using an External Input Signal (System Input)...................................... 4-15
4.3.2 Emergency Stop ................................................................................................. 4-16

4.3.2.1 Restart After Emergency Stop............................................................... 4-17
4.3.3 Stop by Alarm ..................................................................................................... 4-18
xvii 17 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
4.3.4 Others .................................................................................................................4-19

4.3.4.1 Temporary Stop by Mode Change ........................................................ 4-19
4.3.4.2 Temporary Stop by the PAUSE Instruction ........................................... 4-19
4.4 Modifying Play Speed ...................................................................................................... 4-20
4.4.1 Speed Override................................................................................................... 4-20

4.4.1.1 Setting Speed Overrides ....................................................................... 4-21
4.4.1.2 Modifying Play Speed............................................................................ 4-22
4.4.1.3 Canceling Speed Override Settings ...................................................... 4-22
4.5 Playback with Reserved Start .......................................................................................... 4-23
4.5.1 Preparation for Reserved Start ........................................................................... 4-23

4.5.1.1 Enabling Reserved Start........................................................................ 4-24
4.5.1.2 Registering Reserved Start I/O Signal................................................... 4-26
4.5.1.3 Registering Jobs to Stations.................................................................. 4-28
4.5.1.4 Deleting Registered Jobs from Stations ................................................ 4-30
4.5.2 Playback from Reserved Start ............................................................................ 4-31

4.5.2.1 Start Operation ...................................................................................... 4-31
4.5.2.2 Checking Job Reservation Status ......................................................... 4-32
4.5.2.3 Resetting Job Reservation .................................................................... 4-33
4.5.3 Hold Operation.................................................................................................... 4-34

4.5.3.1 [HOLD] on the Programming Pendant................................................... 4-34
4.5.3.2 Hold by External Input Signal (System Input)........................................ 4-34
4.5.3.3 Hold at the Station ................................................................................. 4-35
4.6 Displaying Job Stack........................................................................................................ 4-36
5 Editing Jobs..................................................................................................................................... 5-1
5.1 Copying Jobs ..................................................................................................................... 5-2

5.1.0.1 Copying Jobs on the JOB CONTENT Window........................................ 5-2
5.1.0.2 Copying Jobs on the JOB LIST Window ................................................. 5-3
5.2 Deleting Jobs ..................................................................................................................... 5-5

5.2.0.1 Deleting Jobs on the JOB CONTENT Window........................................ 5-5
5.2.0.2 Deleting Jobs on the JOB LIST Window ................................................. 5-6
5.3 Modifying Job Names ........................................................................................................ 5-7

5.3.0.1 Modifying Job Names on the JOB CONTENT Window........................... 5-7
5.3.0.2 Modifying Job Names on the JOB LIST Window..................................... 5-9
5.4 Editing Comments............................................................................................................ 5-11
5.5 Setting Edit Lock on Individual Job Units......................................................................... 5-13
5.6 Enabling the Modification of Position Data Only .............................................................. 5-14
xviii 18 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
6 Convenient Functions ..................................................................................................................... 6-1
6.1 One-touch Operation “Direct Open”................................................................................... 6-1
6.2 Job Edit Function During Playback.................................................................................... 6-3
6.2.1 Function................................................................................................................ 6-3
6.2.2 Job Edit During Playback ..................................................................................... 6-3

6.2.2.1 Basic Operation....................................................................................... 6-3
6.2.2.2 Editing ..................................................................................................... 6-6
6.2.2.3 Editing Multiple Jobs ............................................................................... 6-8
6.2.2.4 Canceling Write Request....................................................................... 6-11
6.3 Parallel Shift Function...................................................................................................... 6-13
6.3.1 Function Overview.............................................................................................. 6-13

6.3.1.1 Parallel Shift of Step.............................................................................. 6-14
6.3.1.2 Parallel Shift of Job ............................................................................... 6-14
6.3.2 Setting the Shift Value ........................................................................................ 6-15

6.3.2.1 Coordinate Systems .............................................................................. 6-15
6.3.2.2 Setting the Shift Value........................................................................... 6-15
6.3.3 Registering Shift Instructions.............................................................................. 6-17

6.3.3.1 SFTON Instruction................................................................................. 6-18
6.3.3.2 SFTOF Instruction ................................................................................. 6-20
6.3.3.3 MSHIFT Instruction ............................................................................... 6-21
6.3.4 Continuation of the Parallel Shift Function ......................................................... 6-23
6.3.5 Examples of Use ................................................................................................ 6-24

6.3.5.1 Example of Use of Shift Addition/Subtraction........................................ 6-24
6.3.5.2 Example of Use of MSHIFT Instruction ................................................. 6-25
6.4 Parallel Shift Job Conversion Function............................................................................ 6-26
6.4.1 Function Overview.............................................................................................. 6-26
6.4.2 Coordinate Systems for Conversion................................................................... 6-27
6.4.3 Executing the Parallel Shift Job Conversion....................................................... 6-31

6.4.3.1 Window Display..................................................................................... 6-31
6.4.3.2 Parallel Shift Job Conversion Operation ............................................... 6-33
6.4.4 Specifying the Shift Value by Position Variables ................................................ 6-39

6.4.4.1 Window Display..................................................................................... 6-39
6.4.4.2 Jobs Targeted for Conversion ............................................................... 6-41
6.4.4.3 Conversion of Coordinated Jobs ........................................................... 6-42
6.4.4.4 Operation Procedure ............................................................................. 6-45
xix 19 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
6.5 PAM Function .................................................................................................................. 6-47
6.5.1 Function Overview .............................................................................................. 6-47

6.5.1.1 Input Ranges for Adjustment Data ........................................................ 6-47
6.5.2 Operating Methods ............................................................................................. 6-49

6.5.2.1 Setting Adjustment Data........................................................................ 6-49
6.5.2.2 Executing the Adjustment...................................................................... 6-51
6.6 Mirror Shift Function......................................................................................................... 6-55
6.6.2 Pulse Mirror-shift Function.................................................................................. 6-56

6.6.2.1 Parameter Setting ................................................................................. 6-56
6.6.2.2 Object Job ............................................................................................. 6-56
6.6.2.3 Group Axes Specification ...................................................................... 6-56
6.6.2.4 Position Variables.................................................................................. 6-56
6.6.3 Robot-coordinates Mirror-shift Function ............................................................. 6-57

6.6.3.1 Object Job ............................................................................................. 6-57
6.6.4 User-coordinates Mirror-shift Function ............................................................... 6-58

6.6.4.1 Object Job ............................................................................................. 6-58
6.6.5 Notes on the Mirror Shift Function ...................................................................... 6-59
6.6.6 Operation Procedures......................................................................................... 6-60

6.6.6.1 Calling Up the JOB CONTENT Window................................................ 6-60
6.6.6.2 Mirror Shift Conversion.......................................................................... 6-60
6.6.6.3 Explanation of the Mirror Shift Window ................................................. 6-61
6.7 Multi Window Function..................................................................................................... 6-63
6.7.2 Setting the Dividing Pattern of the General-Purpose Display Area .................... 6-63
6.7.2.1 Calling Up and Operating Methods of the Display 
Dividing Pattern Setting Window ........................................................... 6-64
6.7.3 Displaying the Multi Window............................................................................... 6-68

6.7.3.1 Multi Window Mode and Single Window Mode ..................................... 6-68
6.7.3.2 Displaying the Status of Plural (more than two) Window 
Dividing Pattern Setting ......................................................................... 6-68
6.7.3.3 Displaying of Active Window and Non-Active Window .......................... 6-69
6.7.3.4 Limited Matters in Multi Window Mode.................................................. 6-69
6.7.4 Operation of Multi Window.................................................................................. 6-70

6.7.4.1 Switching of Multi Window Mode and Single Window Mode ................. 6-70
6.7.4.2 Switching of Active Window................................................................... 6-72
xx 20 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
6.7.5 Switching the Axis Operation Control Group ...................................................... 6-74

6.7.5.1 S2C540 “Choosing Method of Notifying the Change of Axis 
Operation Control Group when Switching the Active Window” ............. 6-74
6.8 Simple Menu Function .................................................................................................... 6-76
6.8.1 Simple Menu ...................................................................................................... 6-76
6.8.2 Registering the Layout Patters to User Definition Menu..................................... 6-77

6.8.2.1 Register with {REGIST} Button ............................................................. 6-77
6.8.2.2 Register by Key Operation .................................................................... 6-78
6.8.2.3 Conditions to Register the Layout ......................................................... 6-79
6.8.2.4 The Displayed Layout Name ................................................................. 6-79
6.8.3 Calling Up of the Registered Layout................................................................... 6-80

6.8.3.1 Calling up .............................................................................................. 6-80
6.8.3.2 Conditions when Calling Up the Layout ................................................ 6-81
6.8.4 Editing “USER DEFINITION” Menu.................................................................... 6-81

6.8.4.1 Displaying “UNSER DEFINITION” Window........................................... 6-81
6.8.4.2 Displaying “USER DEFINITION MENU” window Under Main Menu..... 6-82
6.8.4.3 Change the Name of Registered Layout Name .................................... 6-84
6.8.4.4 Deleting the Layout ............................................................................... 6-86
6.8.4.5 Delete All Layout ................................................................................... 6-88
6.8.5 Save/Load (to external memory devices) the User Definition Menu Data.......... 6-90
6.8.5.1 Saving the Data..................................................................................... 6-90
6.8.5.2 Loading the Data ................................................................................... 6-92
6.9 Parameter Setting Function ............................................................................................. 6-94
6.9.1 Parameter Setting Function................................................................................ 6-94
6.9.2 Teaching Condition Setting ................................................................................ 6-96
6.9.3 Operation Condition Setting ............................................................................... 6-99
6.9.4 Operate Enable Setting .................................................................................... 6-102
6.9.5 Function Enable Setting ................................................................................... 6-104
6.9.6 Jog Condition Setting ....................................................................................... 6-106
6.9.7 Playback Condition Setting............................................................................... 6-107
6.9.8 Functional Condition Setting............................................................................. 6-109
6.10 Jog Key Allocation ....................................................................................................... 6-110
6.10.1 Jog Key Allocation Function ........................................................................... 6-110
6.10.2 Jog Key Allocation Setting.............................................................................. 6-111

6.10.2.1 Allocation of the Jog Key................................................................... 6-111
6.10.2.2 Cancellation of Jog Key Allocation .................................................... 6-113
6.10.2.3 Operating Method of Allocated External Axis.................................... 6-114
xxi 21 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
6.11 Energy-Saving Function............................................................................................... 6-115
6.11.1 Energy-Saving Function ................................................................................. 6-115
6.11.2 Energy-Saving Setting Method ....................................................................... 6-116

6.11.2.1 Valid/Invalid of Energy-Saving Setting .............................................. 6-116
6.11.2.2 Accumulated Energy-Saving Time Clearance................................... 6-118
6.11.3 Energy-Saving Status Confirmation Method................................................... 6-120

6.11.3.1 Confirmation by the accumulated energy-saving time....................... 6-120
6.11.3.2 Confirmation by System Signal Output.............................................. 6-120
6.12 Instruction Displaying Color Setting Function .............................................................. 6-121
6.12.1 Setting the Instruction Displaying Color on the Job Window .......................... 6-121
6.13 Present Manipulator Position Output Function ............................................................ 6-123
6.13.1 Outline ............................................................................................................ 6-123
6.13.2 Parameters ..................................................................................................... 6-123
6.14 Softlimit Setting Function ............................................................................................. 6-127
6.14.1 About the Softlimit Setting Function................................................................ 6-127
6.14.2 The Softlimit Setting Screen ........................................................................... 6-127
6.14.3 Setting the Softlimit by Numerical Value Input................................................ 6-128
6.14.4 Set the Current Value to the Softlimit ............................................................. 6-129
6.14.5 Set the Softlimit (+)/ the Softlimit (-) to the Initial Maker Value ...................... 6-131
6.14.6 Change the Coordinate Display of the Softlimit (+)/ the Softlimit (-) ............... 6-132
6.15 Analog Output Function Corresponding to Speed ....................................................... 6-133
6.15.1 Overview......................................................................................................... 6-133
6.15.2 Instructions ..................................................................................................... 6-134

6.15.2.1 Instructions for Analog Output Function Corresponding to Speed .... 6-134
6.15.2.2 Registration of Instructions ................................................................ 6-136
6.15.2.3 Analog Output Display....................................................................... 6-139
6.15.3 Examples ........................................................................................................ 6-140

6.15.3.1 Examples of Output Characteristics .................................................. 6-140
6.15.3.2 Example of Variation of Operating Speed and Analog Output Value 6-141
6.15.4 Filter Process.................................................................................................. 6-142

6.15.4.1 When Parameter is Set to “0” ............................................................ 6-142
6.15.4.2 When Parameter is Set to Values Other Than “0”............................. 6-142
6.15.4.3 Parameter Setting ............................................................................. 6-142
6.15.5 Precautions..................................................................................................... 6-146

6.15.5.1 When Analog Output Corresponding to Speed is Interrupted ........... 6-146
6.15.5.2 When More than One Manipulator is Used ....................................... 6-146
xxii 22 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
7 External Memory Devices ............................................................................................................... 7-1
7.1 Memory Devices ................................................................................................................ 7-1
7.1.1 Compact Flash (CF Cards)................................................................................... 7-2

7.1.1.1 Recommended Compact Flash Cards .................................................... 7-2
7.1.1.2 Notes on handling Compact Flash .......................................................... 7-2
7.1.1.3 Inserting a Compact Flash ...................................................................... 7-3
7.1.2 USB Memory Stick ............................................................................................... 7-4

7.1.2.1 Recommended USB Memory Stick......................................................... 7-4
7.1.2.2 Notes on handling USB Memory Stick .................................................... 7-4
7.1.2.3 Inserting a USB Memory Stick ................................................................ 7-5
7.2 Handling Data .................................................................................................................... 7-6
7.2.1 Data Classification................................................................................................ 7-6
7.2.2 File Existence ....................................................................................................... 7-9

7.2.2.1 Saving by Overwriting ........................................................................... 7-10
7.3 Operation Flow ................................................................................................................ 7-11

7.3.0.1 Operating a Folder ................................................................................ 7-12
7.3.0.2 Saving Data........................................................................................... 7-16
7.3.0.3 Loading Data ......................................................................................... 7-28
7.3.0.4 Verifying Data........................................................................................ 7-38
7.3.0.5 Deleting Data ........................................................................................ 7-41
7.3.0.6 Job Selection Mode............................................................................... 7-43
8 Parameter ....................................................................................................................................... 8-1
8.1 Parameter Configuration.................................................................................................... 8-1
8.2 Motion Speed Setting Parameters..................................................................................... 8-2

8.2.0.1 S1CxG000: IN-GUARD SAFE OPERATION MAX. SPEED ................... 8-2
8.2.0.2 S1CxG001: DRY-RUN SPEED ............................................................... 8-2
8.2.0.3 S1CxG002 to S1CxG009: JOINT SPEED FOR REGISTRATION .......... 8-2
8.2.0.4 S1CxG010 to S1CxG017: LINEAR SPEED FOR REGISTRATION ....... 8-3
8.2.0.5 S1CxG018 to S1CxG025: POSITION ANGLE SPEED........................... 8-3
8.2.0.6 S1CxG026 to S1CxG029: JOG OPERATION ABSOLUTE 
VALUE SPEED ....................................................................................... 8-3
8.2.0.7 S1CxG030 to S1CxG032: INCHING MOVE AMOUNT........................... 8-4
8.2.0.8 S1CxG033 to S1CxG040: POSITIONING ZONE.................................... 8-4
8.2.0.9 S1CxG044: LOW-SPEED START .......................................................... 8-6
8.2.0.10 S1CxG045 to S1CxG048: JOG OPERATION LINK SPEED ................ 8-6
8.2.0.11 S1CxG056: WORK HOME POSITION RETURN SPEED .................... 8-6
8.2.0.12 S1CxG057: SEARCH MAX. SPEED..................................................... 8-6
8.2.0.13 S2C201: POSTURE CONTROL AT 
CARTESIAN OPERATION OF JOG ..................................................... 8-6
8.2.0.14 S2C202: OPERATION IN USER COORDINATE SYSTEM 
(WHEN EXTERNAL REFERENCE POINT CONTROL 
FUNCTION USED)................................................................................ 8-6
8.2.0.15 S2C320: CONTROLLED GROUP JOB TEACHING 
POSITION CHANGE............................................................................. 8-7
xxiii 23 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
8.2.0.16 S2C422: OPERATION AFTER RESET FROM PATH DEVIATION ...... 8-7
8.2.0.17 S2C423: OPERATION AFTER JOB...................................................... 8-7
8.2.0.18 S2C424: DEVIATED POSITION ........................................................... 8-8
8.2.0.19 S2C425: CIRCULAR INTERPOLATION TOOL POSITION CONTROL 8-9
8.2.0.20 S2C653: EMERGENCY STOP CURSOR ADVANCE 
CONTROL FUNCTION ......................................................................... 8-9
8.2.0.21 S2C654: EMERGENCY STOP CURSOR ADVANCE CONTROL 
FUNCTION CONT PROCESS COMPLETION POSITION ................. 8-10
8.2.0.22 S2C655: EMERGENCY STOP ADVANCE CONTROL FUNCTION 
WORK START INSTRUCTION STEP MOTION COMPLETION 
DELAY TIME ....................................................................................... 8-10
8.2.0.23 S2C698: BASE AXIS OPERATION KEY ALLOCATION SETTING .... 8-10
8.2.0.24 S3C1098 to S3C1102: POSITION CORRECTING FUNCTION 
DURING PLAYBACK .......................................................................... 8-11
8.3 Mode Operation Setting Parameters ............................................................................... 8-12

8.3.0.1 S2C195: SECURITY MODE WHEN CONTROL POWER SUPPLY 
IS TURNED ON..................................................................................... 8-12
8.3.0.2 S2C196: SELECTION OF CARTESIAN/CYLINDRICAL....................... 8-12
8.3.0.3 S2C197: COORDINATE SWITCHING PROHIBITED ........................... 8-12
8.3.0.4 S2C198: EXECUTION UNITS AT “FORWARD” OPERATION ............. 8-12
8.3.0.5 S2C199: INSTRUCTION (EXCEPT FOR MOVE) EXECUTION AT 
“FORWARD” OPERATION ................................................................... 8-13
8.3.0.6 S2C203: CHANGING STEP ONLY ....................................................... 8-13
8.3.0.7 S2C204: MANUAL SPEED STORING FOR EACH COORDINATE ..... 8-13
8.3.0.8 S2C206: ADDITIONAL STEP POSITION ............................................. 8-13
8.3.0.9 S2C207: MASTER JOB CHANGING OPERATION .............................. 8-14
8.3.0.10 S2C208: CHECK AND MACHINE-LOCK KEY OPERATION IN 
PLAY MODE........................................................................................ 8-14
8.3.0.11 S2C209: RESERVED WORK JOB CHANGING OPERATION ........... 8-14
8.3.0.12 S2C210: MASTER OR SUBMASTER CALL OPERATION IN 
PLAY MODE........................................................................................ 8-15
8.3.0.13 S2C211: LANGUAGE LEVEL ............................................................. 8-16
8.3.0.14 S2C214: INSTRUCTION INPUT LEARNING FUNCTION .................. 8-16
8.3.0.15 S2C215: ADDRESS SETTING WHEN CONTROL POWER IS 
TURNED ON ....................................................................................... 8-16
8.3.0.16 S2C216: JOB LIST DISPLAY METHOD AT JOB SELECTION .......... 8-16
8.3.0.17 S2C217: INITIAL OPERATION OF MANIPULATOR .......................... 8-17
8.3.0.18 S2C218: PLAYBACK EXECUTION AT CYCLE MODE “1- STEP” ..... 8-17
8.3.0.19 S2C219: EXTERNAL START.............................................................. 8-17
8.3.0.20 S2C220: PROGRAMMING PENDANT START................................... 8-17
8.3.0.21 S2C221: SPEED DATA INPUT FORM ............................................... 8-18
8.3.0.22 S2C222: RESERVED START ............................................................. 8-18
8.3.0.23 S2C224: JOB SELECTION AT REMOTE FUNCTION (PLAY MODE)8-18
8.3.0.24 S2C225: EXTERNAL MODE SWITCH................................................ 8-18
8.3.0.25 S2C227: EXTERNAL CYCLE SWITCHING ........................................ 8-18
8.3.0.26 S2C228: PROGRAMMING PENDANT CYCLE SWITCHING............. 8-19
8.3.0.27 S2C229: SERVO ON FROM EXTERNAL PP PROHIBITION............. 8-19
8.3.0.28 S2C230: PROGRAMMING PENDANT OPERATION WHEN “IO” 
IS SELECTED FOR REMOTE MODE ................................................ 8-19
8.3.0.29 S2C234: STEP REGISTRATION AT TOOL NO. CHANGE ................ 8-20
xxiv 24 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
8.3.0.30 S2C293: REMOTE FIRST CYCLE MODE.......................................... 8-20

8.3.0.31 S2C294: LOCAL FIRST CYCLE MODE ............................................. 8-20
8.3.0.32 S2C312: POWER ON FIRST CYCLE MODE ..................................... 8-20
8.3.0.33 S2C313: TEACH MODE FIRST CYCLE MODE ................................. 8-21
8.3.0.34 S2C314: PLAY MODE FIRST CYCLE MODE .................................... 8-21
8.3.0.35 S2C316: START CONDITION AFTER ALARM-4107 
(“OUT OF RANGE (ABSO DATA)”) .................................................... 8-21
8.3.0.36 S2C395: SIGNAL NAME ALIAS FUNCTION ...................................... 8-22
8.3.0.37 S2C396: VARIABLE NAME ALIAS FUNCTION.................................. 8-23
8.3.0.38 S2C397: I/O VARIABLE CUSTOMIZE FUNCTION ............................ 8-24
8.3.0.39 S2C410: WORD REGISTRATION FUNCTION / 
WORD EDITING FUNCTION SPECIFICATION ................................. 8-25
8.3.0.40 S2C413: JOB UNDELETE FUNCTION............................................... 8-25
8.3.0.41 S2C415 to S2C419: TIME RESET...................................................... 8-27
8.3.0.42 S2C431: TOOL NO. SWITCHING....................................................... 8-28
8.3.0.43 S2C433: POSITION TEACHING BUZZER ......................................... 8-28
8.3.0.44 S2C434: JOB LINKING DESIGNATION 
(When Twin Synchronous Function Used) .......................................... 8-28
8.3.0.45 S2C437: PLAYBACK OPERATION CONTINUATION FUNCTION .... 8-29
8.3.0.46 S2C544: I/O NAME DISPLAY FUNCTION FOR JOB......................... 8-30
8.3.0.47 S2C684:ALL AXES ANGLE DISPLAY FUNCTION ............................ 8-30
8.3.0.48 S2C713: CONTROL POINT OPERATION SETTING 
ON THE SERVO TRACK .................................................................... 8-31
8.4 Parameters According to Interference Area .................................................................... 8-32

8.4.0.1 S1CxG400 to S1CxG415: PULSE SOFT LIMIT.................................... 8-32
8.4.0.2 S2C001: CUBE SOFT LIMIT CHECK ................................................... 8-32
8.4.0.3 S2C002: S-AXIS INTERFERENCE CHECK ......................................... 8-34
8.4.0.4 S2C003 to S2C066: CUBE/AXIS INTERFERENCE CHECK................ 8-35
8.4.0.5 S2C067 to S2C194: CUBE USING METHOD ...................................... 8-37
8.4.0.6 S3C000 to S3C047: CUBE SOFT LIMIT............................................... 8-39
8.4.0.7 S3C048 to S3C063: S-AXIS INTERFERENCE AREA.......................... 8-39
8.4.0.8 S3C064 to S3C1087: CUBIC INTERFERENCE AREA ........................ 8-39
8.4.0.9 S3C1089 to S3C1096: ROBOT INTERFERENCE AREA..................... 8-39
8.4.0.10 S3C1097: A SIDE LENGTH OF WORK-HOME-POSITION CUBE .... 8-39
8.5 Parameters according to Status I/O................................................................................. 8-40

8.5.0.1 S2C235: USER OUTPUT RELAY WHEN CONTROL POWER IS ON. 8-40
8.5.0.2 S4C000 to S4C015: PARITY OF USER INPUT GROUPS ................... 8-40
8.5.0.3 S4C016 to S4C031: PARITY OF USER OUTPUT GROUPS ............... 8-41
8.5.0.4 S4C032 to S4C047: DATA OF USER INPUT GROUPS ...................... 8-42
8.5.0.5 S4C048 to S4C063: DATA OF USER OUTPUT GROUPS .................. 8-43
8.5.0.6 S4C064 to S4C079: USER OUTPUT GROUP TO BE INITIALIZED 
AT SWITCHING MODE ........................................................................ 8-44
8.5.0.7 S4C240: USER OUTPUT NO. WHEN MANIPULATOR DROP 
ALLOWABLE RANGE ERROR OCCURS ............................................ 8-44
8.6 Parameters according to Coordinated or Synchronized Operation ................................. 8-45

8.6.0.1 S2C212: +MOV or +SMOV INSTRUCTION SPEED INPUT................. 8-45
8.6.0.2 S2C213: +MOV INSTRUCTION INTERPOLATION INPUT.................. 8-45
xxv 25 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
8.6.0.3 S2C231: OPERATION METHOD AT FWD/BWD OPERATION 

OR TEST RUN BY INDEPENDENT CONTROL ................................... 8-45
8.6.0.4 S2C232: JOB AT CALLING MASTER OF SUBTASK 
BY INDEPENDENT CONTROL ............................................................ 8-46
8.6.0.5 S2C264: STATION AXIS CURRENT VALUE DISPLAY FUNCTION.... 8-46
8.6.0.6 S2C265 to S2C288: STATION AXIS DISPLAYED UNIT ...................... 8-46
8.6.0.7 S2C420: POSTURE CONTROL OF SYNCHRONIZED 
MANIPULATOR (When Twin Synchronous Function Used) ................. 8-47
8.6.0.8 S2C421: POSTURE CONTROL OF MANIPULATOR IN MULTI-JOB 
(When Twin Synchronous Function Used) ............................................ 8-47
8.6.0.9 S2C687: OPERATION OF JOB WITHOUT CONTROL GROUP 
SPECIFICATION ................................................................................... 8-48
8.6.0.10 S2C688: EXECUTION OF “BWD” OPERATION................................. 8-48
8.6.0.11 S3C1101: MAXIMUM DEVIATION ANGLE OF CURRENT 
STATION POSITION (When Twin Synchronous Function Used) ....... 8-48
8.7 Parameters for Other Functions or Applications .............................................................. 8-49

8.7.0.1 S1CxG049 to S1CxG051: SMALL CIRCLE CUTTING ......................... 8-49
8.7.0.2 S1CxG052 to S1CxG053: SMALL CIRCLE CUTTING 
DIRECTION LIMIT VALUE .................................................................... 8-49
8.7.0.3 S1CxG054 to S1CxG055: SMALL CIRCLE CUTTING 
OVERLAP VALUE................................................................................. 8-49
8.7.0.4 S1CxG063, S1CxG064: PATTERN CUTTING DIMENSION ................ 8-49
8.7.0.5 S1CxG065: MIRROR SHIFT SIGN INVERSION .................................. 8-49
8.7.0.6 S2C430: RELATIVE JOB OPERATION METHOD ............................... 8-49
8.7.0.7 S3C1111 to S3C1190: ANALOG OUTPUT FILTER CONSTANT 
(When analog output corresponding to speed function is used) ........... 8-50
8.7.0.8 S3C1191: CUT WIDTH CORRECTION VALUE (When form cutting 
function is used) .................................................................................... 8-50
8.8 Hardware Control Parameters ......................................................................................... 8-51

8.8.0.1 S2C646: ANTICIPATOR FUNCTION.................................................... 8-51
8.8.0.2 S4C327 to S4C390: SETTING OF OPERATING RELAY NO............... 8-52
8.8.0.3 S4C391 to S4C454: OPERATING METHOD OF RELAYS................... 8-52
8.8.0.4 S2C786 to S2C788: COOLING FAN ALARM DETECTION.................. 8-52
8.8.0.5 S2C789 to S2C792: COOLING FAN ALARM 1 OPERATION .............. 8-53
8.8.0.8 S2C801 to S2C804: FAN ALARM 1 POWER SOURCE STATUS........ 8-53
8.8.0.9 S2C805 to S2C808: FAN ALARM 2 POWER SOURCE STATUS........ 8-53
8.8.0.10 S2C809 to S2C812: FAN ALARM 3 POWER SOURCE STATUS...... 8-54
8.9 TRANSMISSION PARAMETERS.................................................................................... 8-55
8.10 Application Parameters.................................................................................................. 8-55
8.10.1 Arc Welding ...................................................................................................... 8-55

8.10.1.1 AxP000: APPLICATION ...................................................................... 8-55
8.10.1.2 AxP003: WELDING ASSIGNMENT OF WELDING START 
CONDITION FILE................................................................................ 8-55
8.10.1.3 AxP004: WELDING ASSIGNMENT OF WELDING END 
CONDITION FILES ............................................................................. 8-55
8.10.1.4 AxP005: WELDING SPEED PRIORITY .............................................. 8-55
8.10.1.5 AxP009: WORK CONTINUING ........................................................... 8-55
xxvi 26 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
8.10.1.6 AxP010: WELDING INSTRUCTION OUTPUT.................................... 8-56

8.10.1.7 AxP011, AxP012: MANUAL WIRE OPERATION SPEED .................. 8-56
8.10.1.8 AxP013, AxP014: WELDING CONTROL TIME .................................. 8-56
8.10.1.9 AxP015 to AxP017: NUMBER OF WELDING CONTROL .................. 8-56
8.10.1.10 AxP026 to AxP029: TOOL ON/OFF USER OUTPUT NO. 
(Jigless system).................................................................................. 8-56
8.10.2 Handling Application......................................................................................... 8-56

8.10.2.1 AxP002, AxP004: f1 KEY FUNCTION ................................................ 8-56
8.10.2.2 AxP003, AxP005: f2 KEY FUNCTION ................................................ 8-56
8.10.3 Spot Welding .................................................................................................... 8-56

8.10.3.1 AxP003: MAXIMUM NUMBER OF CONNECTED POWER 
SOURCES........................................................................................... 8-56
8.10.3.2 AxP004: GUN FULL OPEN STROKE ON/OFF SIGNAL .................... 8-57
8.10.3.3 AxP005: STROKE CHANGE ANSWER TIME LIMIT .......................... 8-57
8.10.3.4 AxP006: PARITY SPECIFICATION FOR WELDING CONDITIONS .. 8-57
8.10.3.5 AxP007: ANTICIPATE TIME ............................................................... 8-57
8.10.3.6 AxP015: WELDING ERROR RESET OUTPUT TIME......................... 8-57
8.10.3.7 AxP016, AxP017: ELECTRODE WEAR AMOUNT ALARM VALUE... 8-57
8.10.4 General-purpose Application ............................................................................ 8-58

8.10.4.1 AxP009: WORK CONTINUE PROHIBIT............................................. 8-58
9 General Purpose Application .......................................................................................................... 9-1
9.1 Simplified Teaching and Playback..................................................................................... 9-1
9.1.1 Teaching............................................................................................................... 9-1

9.1.1.1 Preparation for Teaching......................................................................... 9-1
9.1.1.2 Teaching Procedure ................................................................................ 9-4
9.1.1.3 Path Confirmation ................................................................................. 9-13
9.1.1.4 Correcting a Job .................................................................................... 9-14
9.1.1.5 Changing the Position Data .................................................................. 9-15
9.1.2 Playback ............................................................................................................. 9-19

9.1.2.1 Preparation Before Playback................................................................. 9-19
9.1.2.2 Playback Procedure .............................................................................. 9-19
9.1.3 Example for General Purpose Application.......................................................... 9-20

9.1.3.1 Example Job ......................................................................................... 9-20
9.1.3.2 Teaching Procedure .............................................................................. 9-21
9.1.3.3 Confirmation of Cutting Operation (Speed Limitation Drive) ................. 9-24
9.2 Operation for Tool Control .............................................................................................. 9-25
9.2.1 Function Keys..................................................................................................... 9-25
9.2.2 Tool Control Settings .......................................................................................... 9-26
9.2.3 Work Instructions................................................................................................ 9-27

9.2.3.1 TOOLON/TOOLOF Instructions ............................................................ 9-27
9.2.3.2 CALL Instruction.................................................................................... 9-28
9.2.3.3 WVON Instruction.................................................................................. 9-28
9.2.3.4 WVOF Instruction .................................................................................. 9-29
xxvii 27 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
9.3 Using Files ....................................................................................................................... 9-30
9.3.1 Weaving Basic Coordinate System .................................................................... 9-30
9.3.2 WEAVING CONDITION Window........................................................................ 9-31
9.3.3 Operation Method ............................................................................................... 9-34

9.3.3.1 Displaying a Weaving File ..................................................................... 9-34
9.3.3.2 Editing Condition Data........................................................................... 9-34
9.3.3.3 Cases that Require the Registration of Reference Points ..................... 9-34
9.3.3.4 Prohibiting Weaving............................................................................... 9-35
9.3.3.5 Method to Prohibit Weaving in the Check Mode ................................... 9-35
9.3.3.6 Method to Prohibit Weaving During a “TEST RUN” or FWD Operation 9-36
9.3.3.7 Prohibiting Weaving By Means of a System Input Signal...................... 9-36
9.4 Table of Work Instructions ............................................................................................... 9-37
10 Handling Application ................................................................................................................... 10-1
10.1 Outlines.......................................................................................................................... 10-1
10.1.1 Function Keys ................................................................................................... 10-1
10.1.2 HAND Instruction .............................................................................................. 10-2

10.1.2.1 Function............................................................................................... 10-2
10.1.2.2 Instruction and Additional Items .......................................................... 10-2
10.1.3 HSEN (Gripper Sensor) Instruction .................................................................. 10-3

10.1.3.1 Function............................................................................................... 10-3
10.1.3.2 Instruction and Additional Items .......................................................... 10-3
10.1.3.3 Examples............................................................................................. 10-4
10.1.4 Handling Window.............................................................................................. 10-4
10.1.5 Shock Sensor Function..................................................................................... 10-6
10.1.6 Shock Sensor Input Signal ............................................................................... 10-6
10.1.7 Shock Sensor Input Reset ................................................................................ 10-6
10.1.8 Low Air Pressure Input Signal .......................................................................... 10-6
10.2 Registering Instructions ................................................................................................. 10-7
10.2.1 HAND Instruction .............................................................................................. 10-7
10.2.2 HSEN Instruction .............................................................................................. 10-9
10.3 Table of Work Instructions ........................................................................................... 10-12
11 Table of Basic Instructions .......................................................................................................... 11-1
11.1 Move Instructions........................................................................................................... 11-1
11.2 I/O Instructions............................................................................................................... 11-4
11.3 Control Instructions ........................................................................................................ 11-6
11.4 Shift Instructions ............................................................................................................ 11-8
11.5 Operating Instructions.................................................................................................... 11-9
xxviii 28 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
DX100 1 Introduction
1.1 DX100 Overview
1 Introduction
1.1 DX100 Overview

The main power switch and the door lock are located on the front of the
DX100 controller. The emergency stop button is installed in the upper
right corner of the cabinet door and the programming pendant hangs from
a hook below the button.
For information on setup, installation, and connection of the DX100
system, refer to the “DX100 INSTRUCTIONS”.
Fig. 1-1: DX100 Front View
Main power switch
Door lock
Door lock
1-1 29 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
1.2 Programming Pendant
1.2.1 Programming Pendant Overview

The programming pendant is equipped with the keys and buttons used to
conduct manipulator teaching operations and to edit jobs.
Fig. 1-2: PP Overview
Start button Hold button
Emergency
Mode switch START HOLD stop button
REMOTE TEACH
PLAY
Menu area JOB EDIT DISPLAY UTILITY
JOB CONTENT
J:TEST01 S:0000
CONTROL GROUP:R1 TOOL:
0000 NOP
General-purpose
0001 SET B000 1
0002 SET B001 0 Insertion slot for
Compact Flash
0003 MOVJ VJ=80.00
display area 0004 MOVJ VJ=80.00

0005 DOUT OT#(10) ON
0006 TIMER T=3.00
0007 MOVJ VJ=80.00
0008 MOVJ VJ=100.00
0009 MOVJ VJ=100.00
0010 MOVJ VJ=100.00
0011 MOVJ VJ=100.00
MOVJ VJ=0.78
Main Menu Short Cut Turn on servo power Page key
LAYOUT TOOL SEL GO BACK

DIRECT
Cursor key COORD OPEN

Multi PAGE AREA
ENTRY
SERVO
SELECT
Select key
MAIN SIMPLE ON CANCEL
MENU MENU READY ASSIST
X- X+
SERVO ON
X- X+
S- S+ R- R+
HIGH
SPEED
Y- Y+ Y- Y+
L- L+ B- B+
FAST Manual speed keys
Z- Z+ MANUAL SPEED
Z- Z+
U- U+ T- T+
SLOW
E- E+ 8- 8+
Axis keys
INTER 7 8 9 TEST
SHIFT
SHIFT
LOCK START
Enable switch ROBOT INFORM

LIST
4 5 6 BWD FWD
Enable switch (option)
Located on the back of
the programming pendant. EX.AXIS
WELD
ON/OFF
1 2 3 DELETE INSERT
When you lightly squeeze it,

the power turns ON. MOTION 0 . -
AUX
Enter key
MODIFY ENTER
TYPE
When you firmly squeeze it,
the power turns OFF.
Motion Numeric keys / Function keys

Type key Press to input numbers.
These keys are also used as function keys
to input instructions, etc. Key’s function is
automatically switched when function keys
are available.
1-2 30 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
1.2.2 Key Description
1.2.2.1 Character Keys

The keys which have characters printed on them are denoted with [ ]. For
example, ENTER
is shown as [ENTER].
The Numeric keys have additional functions along with their number
values. Dual function keys are used in the context of the operation being
1
performed. For example: TIMER may be described in the text as [1] or
[TIMER].
1.2.2.2 Symbol Keys

The keys which have a symbol printed on them are not denoted with [ ] but
depicted with a small picture, with the exception of the cursor key, which is
not shown with a picture.
Cursor
Emergency Stop button
DIRECT
OPEN Direct Open key
GO BACK
PAGE
Page key
1.2.2.3 Axis Keys and Numeric Keys

The keys pictured in the following are referred to as the axis keys and
Numeric keys when described.
7 8 9
X- X+ X- X+ SYNCRO
SINGLE ARCON FEED
S- S+ R- R+
4 5 6
Y- Y+ Y- Y+ SMOV
GAS
ARCOFF RETRACT
L- L+ B- B+
Z- Z+ Z- Z+ 1 2 3
TOOL1 TOOL2
U- U+ T- T+ TIMER ON ON
0 . -
E- E+ 8- 8+ TOOL1 TOOL2
REFP OFF OFF
Axis Keys Numeric Keys
1.2.2.4 Keys Pressed Simultaneously

When two keys are to be pressed simultaneously, the keys are shown with
a “+” sign between them, such as [SHIFT]+[COORD].
1-3 31 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
1.2.3 Programming Pendant Keys
[START] Starts the manipulator motion in playback

operation.
• The lamp on this button is lit during the play
operation.
The lamp also lights when the playback operation is
started by the system input START signal.
The lamp turns OFF when the playback operation is
stopped by alarm occurrence, HOLD signal, or mode
change.
[HOLD] Holds the manipulator motion.
• This button is enabled in any mode.
• The lamp on this button is lit only while the
button is being pressed. Although the lamp
turns OFF when the button is released, the
manipulator stays stopped until a START
command is input.
• The HOLD lamp automatically lights in the
following cases to indicate that the system is in
HOLD status. The start and axis operations are
disabled while the lamp is lit.
1. The HOLD signal of system input is ON.
2. The HOLD request is being sent from an
external device in remote mode.
3. In the HOLD status caused by an error
occurred in working process such as wire
sticking at arc welding.
E.STOP Button Turns OFF the servo power.
• When the servo power is turned OFF, the
SERVO ON LED on the programing pendant will
extinguish.
• An emergency stop message is displayed on the
screen.
[MODE] Selects the Play mode, Teach mode, or Remote
mode.
PLAY: Play Mode
The playback of taught job is enabled.
The START signal from an external device is disabled.
REMOTE
PLAY
TEACH
TEACH: Teach Mode
The axis operation and edition from the programming
pendant are enabled.
The START signal from an external device is disabled.
REMOTE: Remote Mode
The operation by external signals is enabled.
[START] is invalid during the remote mode.
1-4 32 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
Enable Switch Turns ON the servo power.

When the Enable switch is lightly squeezed while the
SERVO ON LED is blinking and the Mode Switch is set
to “TEACH”, the power is turned ON.
And when this switch is released or firmly squeezed
while the power is turned ON, the power turns OFF.
[SELECT] Works as described below.

• Selects menu items in the main menu area and
the pull-down menu area.
SELECT • Makes the selected item ready to be set in the
general-purpose display area.
• Displays multiple messages in the message
area.
Cursor Moves the cursor in the direction of the arrow.
• The size of the cursor and the range/place
where the cursor can move will vary depending
on the window.
• If the UP cursor button is pressed when the
cursor is on the first line, the cursor will move to
the last line of the job. Conversely, if the cursor
is on the last line of the job and the DOWN
cursor button is pressed, the cursor will jump to
the first line of the job.
[SHIFT] + UP 
Scrolls the screen upward.
[SHIFT] + DOWN 
Scrolls the screen downward.
[SHIFT] + RIGHT 
Scrolls the screen to the right.
[SHIFT] + LEFT 
Scrolls the screen to the left.
[MAIN MENU] Displays the main menu.
If this button is pressed while the main menu is
displayed, the main menu disappears.
MAIN
MENU
[MAIN MENU] + UP 
Increases the brightness of the screen.
[MAIN MENU] + DOWN 
Decreases the brightness of the screen.
[SIMPLE MENU] Displays the simple menu.
If this button is pressed while the simple menu is
displayed, the simple menu disappears.
ENTRY
SIMPLE
MENU
1-5 33 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
[SERVO ON READY] Enables the servo power supply to be turned ON.

Press this button to enable the servo power supply to
be turned ON if the servo power supply is shut OFF by
SERVO the emergency stop or overrun signal.
ON When this button is pressed:
READY
• In the play mode, the servo power supply is
turned ON if the safeguarding is securely
closed.
• In the teach mode, the SERVO ON lamp flashes
and the servo power supply is turned ON when
the Enable switch is ON.
• The SERVO ON lamp is lit while the servo
power is ON.
[ASSIST] Displays the menu to assist the operation for the
currently displayed window.
Pressing this button with [SHIFT] or [INTERLOCK]
displays the help guidance for the operation.
ASSIST • [SHIFT] + [ASSIST] 

The function list of key combinations with
[SHIFT] appears.
• [INTERLOCK] + [ASSIST] 
The function list of key combinations with
[INTERLOCK] appears.
[CANCEL] Cancels the current status.
• Deletes the sub menu in the main menu area
and the pull-down menu area.
CANCEL • Cancels the input data or the input status in the
• Cancels the multiple views in the message area.
• Cancels the occurred error.
[MULTI] Works for the multi mode.
If this button is pressed when the multi mode is ON, the
active window switches.
Multi
[SHIFT] + [MULTI] 
LAYOUT Switches between the multi-window display and the
single-window display when the multi mode is ON.
[COORD] Select the operation coordinate system when the
manipulator is operated manually.
• Five coordinate systems (joint, cartesian,
TOOL
TOOL SEL
cylindrical, tool and user) can be used. Each
COORD
time this key is pressed, the coordinate system
is switched in the following order:
"JOINT""WLD/CYL""TOOL""USER"
• The selected coordinate system is displayed on
the status display area.
[SHIFT] + [COORD]
The coordinate number can be changed when the
"TOOL" or "USER" coordinate system is selected.
1-6 34 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
[DIRECT OPEN] Displays the content related to the current line.
• To display the content of a CALL job or condition

DIRECT file, move the cursor to the next line and press
OPEN
[DIRECT OPEN]. The file will be displayed for
the selected line. Display content will vary
depending on the type of instruction used in the
job.
Example:
For a CALL instruction, the content of the called job will
be displayed.
For a work instruction, the content of the condition file
will be displayed.
For Input/output instructions, the input/output condition
will be displayed.
• The lamp on this button is lit while the direct
open is ON. Press this button while the lamp is
lit to return to the previous window.
[PAGE] Displays the next page.
The page can be switched only when the lamp on this
button is lit.
GO BACK [SHIFT] + [PAGE] 
Switches to the previous page.
PAGE
[AREA] Moves the cursor in the following order : “Menu

Area””General-Purpose Display
Area””Message Area””Main Menu Area”. If no
item is displayed, the cursor does not move.
AREA [SHIFT] + [AREA] 

The language can be switched when the bilingual
function is valid. (Bilingual function is optional.)
[AREA] + DOWN 
Moves the cursor from the general-purpose display
area to the operation button when the operation button
is displayed.
[AREA] + UP 
Moves the cursor to the general-purpose display area
when the cursor is on the operation button.
[SHIFT] Changes the functions of other keys by pressing
together.
Can be used with [ASSIST], [COORD], [AREA],
[MOTION TYPE], [ROBOT], [EX. AXIS], cursor key or
SHIFT Numeric key to access alternate functions.
Refer to the description of each key for the alternate
[SHIFT] functions.
[INTERLOCK] Changes the functions of other keys by pressing
together.
Can be used with [ASSIST], [MULTI], [TEST START],
[FWD], or Numeric key (Numeric key customize
INTER
function), [ROBOT].
LOCK
Refer to the description of each key for the alternate
[INTERLOCK] functions.
1-7 35 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
[INFORM LIST] Displays instruction lists of commands available

for job editing.
INFORM
LIST
[ROBOT] Enables the robot axis operation.
[ROBOT] is active for the system where multiple

manipulators are controlled by one DX100 or the
ROBOT system with external axes.
[SHIFT] + [ROBOT]
The robot under axis operation can be switched to a
robot axis which is not registered to the currently
selected job.
[INTERLOCK] + [ROBOT]
Switches the application when several applications are
set to a robot.
[EX. AXIS] Enables the external axis (base axis or station axis)
operation.
[EX.AXIS] is active for the system with external axes.

EX.AXIS
[SHIFT] + [EX. AXIS]
The external axis under axis operation can be switched
to an external axis which is not registered to the
currently selected job.
[MOTION TYPE] Selects the interpolation type for playback
operation.
The selected interpolation type is shown in the status
display area on the screen.
MOTION
TYPE • Each time this key is pressed, the interpolation
type changes in the following order: 
"MOVJ"" MOVL""MOVC""MOVS"
[SHIFT] + [MOTION TYPE]

The interpolation mode changes in the following order:
"STANDARD"" EXTERNAL REFERENCE
POINT"*" CONVEYOR"*
Interpolation type can be changed in any mode.
*: These modes are purchased options.
1-8 36 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
[TEST START] Moves the manipulator through taught steps in a

continuous motion when [TEST START] and
[INTERLOCK] are simultaneously pressed.
The manipulator can be moved to check the path of
TEST taught steps. Operation stops immediately when this
START
key is released.
• The manipulator operates according to the
currently selected operation cycle: "AUTO",
"1CYCLE", or "STEP".
• The manipulator operates at the taught speed.
However, if the taught speed exceeds the
maximum teaching speed, the operation
proceeds at the maximum teaching speed.
[FWD] Moves the manipulator through the taught steps
while this key is pressed.
• Only move instructions are executed (one
instruction at a time, no welding instructions).
FWD
[INTERLOCK] + [FWD]
All instructions are executed.
[REFP] + [FWD]
Moves to the reference point of the cursor line. See
section 3.3.1.3 “Moving to Reference Point” on page 3-
27 .
The manipulator operates at the selected manual
speed. Make sure that the selected manual speed is
the desired one before starting operation.
[BWD] Moves the manipulator through the taught steps in
the reverse direction while this key is pressed.
• Only move instructions are executed (no weld
commands).
BWD
The manipulator operates at the selected manual
speed. Make sure that the selected manual speed is
the desired one before starting operation.
[DELETE] Deletes the registered instruction.
• Deletion completes when [ENTER] is pressed
while this key lamp is lit.
DELETE
[INSERT] Inserts a new instruction.

• Insertion completes when [ENTER] is pressed
while this key lamp is lit.
INSERT
[MODIFY] Modifies the taught position data or instruction.

• Modification completes when [ENTER] is
pressed while this key lamp is lit.
MODIFY
1-9 37 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
[ENTER] Registers instructions, data, current position of the

manipulator, etc.
• When [ENTER] is pressed, the instruction or
data displayed in the input buffer line moves to
ENTER
the cursor position to complete a registration,
insertion, or modification.
MANUAL SPEED Sets the speed for manual operation. This speed is
keys also valid for operations with [FWD] and [BWD].
• There are four speed levels (slow, medium, fast,
and inching). The speed changes as described
FAST below. The selected speed is displayed on the
MANUAL SPEED
status area.
Each time [FAST] is pressed, manual speed changes in
SLOW the following order: 
"INCH"" SLOW""MED""FST".
Each time [SLOW] is pressed, manual speed changes
in the following order: 
"FST""MED""SLOW""INCH"
[HIGH SPEED] Makes the manipulator move at high speed while
this button and one of the axis keys are pressed
simultaneously during manual operation. No need
to change the setting of speed.
HIGH
• The speed for [HIGH SPEED] is specified in
SPEED
advance.
Axis Keys Moves specified axes on manipulator.
• The manipulator axes only move while the key is
X- X+ X- X+
pressed.
S- S+ R- R+
• Multiple axes can be operated simultaneously by
Y- Y+ Y- Y+
L- L+ B- B+
pressing two or more keys at the same time.
Z- Z+ Z- Z+
U- U+ T- T+
The manipulator operates in the selected coordinate

E- E+ 8- 8+
system at the selected manual speed. Make sure that
the selected coordinate system and the manual speed
are the desired ones before starting the axis operation.
It is possible to allocate any external axes to [E-] + [E+],

[8-] + [8+] keys to operate them. Refer to section 6.10
“Jog Key Allocation” on page 6-110.
Numeric Keys Enters the number or symbol when the ">" prompt
appears on the input line.
• “.” is the decimal point. “-” is a minus sign or
7 8 9
SYNCRO
SINGLE ARCON FEED hyphen.
4
SMOV
5
GAS
ARCOFF
6
RETRACT
The Numeric keys are also used as function keys.
Refer to the explanation of each function for details.
1 2 3
TOOL1 TOOL2
TIMER ON ON
0 . -
TOOL1 TOOL2
REFP OFF OFF
1-10 38 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
1.2.4 Programming Pendant Display

The programming pendant display is a 5.7 inch color display.
Alphanumeric characters can be used.
1.2.4.1 Five Display Areas

The general-purpose display area, menu area, human interface display
area, and main menu area among the following five areas can be moved
by pressing [AREA], or can be selected by directly touching the screen.
Menu area Status display area
Main menu area

General-purpose display area
Human interface
display area
Each window displayed during operations is provided with its name on the
upper left of the general-purpose display area.
1-11 39 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
1.2.4.2 General-purpose Display Area

On the general-purpose display area, various settings and contents such
as jobs and characteristics files can be displayed and edited.
The operation buttons are also displayed at the bottom of the window
according to the window contents.
• To move the cursor to the operation button, press [AREA] + DOWN
cursor key.
• To move the cursor to the general-purpose display area, press
[AREA] + UP cursor key or press [CANCEL].
• To move the cursor between the operation buttons, use the RIGHT
or LEFT cursor key.
• To execute the operation button, move the cursor to the button and
press [SELECT].
EXECUTE : Continues operation with the displayed contents.

CANCEL : Cancels the displayed contents and returns to the previous window.
COMPLETE : Completes the setting operation displayed on the general-purpose display
area.
STOP : Stops operation when loading, saving, or verifying with an external memory
device.
RELEASE : Releases the overrun and shock sensor function.
RESET : Resets an alarm. (Cannot reset major alarms.)
PAGE : Jumps to the appropriate page if the page can be switched.
• When the page can be switched by specifying the page number, the
following input box appears when “DIRECT PAGE” is selected. Directly
type the desired page number and press [ENTER].
General-purpose
display area
Operation buttons
JUMP TO:
PAGE
• When the page can be switched by selecting an item, the following

selection list appears when “DIRECT PAGE” is selected. Select a desired
item using the UP and DOWN cursor key and press [ENTER].
PAGE
1-12 40 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
1.2.4.3 Main Menu Area

Each menu and submenu are displayed in the main menu area. Press
[MAIN MENU] or touch {Main Menu} on the left bottom of the window to
display the main menu.
1.2.4.4 Status Display Area

The Status Display area shows controller status. The displayed
information will vary depending on the controller mode (Play/Teach).
A. Group operation axis L. Saving Data

B. Operation coordinate system K. Weak battery
C. Manual speed J. Multi Mode
I. Page
H. Tool number
G. Mode
F. State under execution
E. Operation cycle
D. Security mode
A. Control Group
Displays the active control group for systems equipped with station axes
or several robot axes.
to : Robot Axes
to : Base Axes
to : Station Axes
1-13 41 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
B. Operation Coordinate System

Displays the selected coordinate system. Switched by pressing
[COORD].
: Joint Coordinates
: Cartesian Coordinates
: Cylindrical Coordinates
: Tool Coordinates
: User Coordinates
C. Manual Speed
Displays the selected speed. For details, refer to section 2.2.0.5 “Select
Manual Speed” on page 2-4.
: Inching
: Low Speed
: Medium Speed
: High Speed
D. Security Mode
: Operation Mode
: Edit Mode
: Management Mode
E. Operation Cycle
Displays the present operation cycle.
: Step
: Cycle
: Continuous
1-14 42 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
F. State Under Execution

Displays the present system status (STOP, HOLD, ESTOP, ALARM, or
RUN).
: Stop Status
: Hold Status
: Emergency Stop Status
: Alarm Status
: Operating Status
G. Mode
: Teach mode
T
P : Play mode
H. Tool Number
From to : Displayed the tool No. which is chosen by a robot 

when the tool No. switch function is valid. 
(S2C431=1).
I. Page
: Displayed when the page can be switched.

J. Multi Mode
: Displayed when the multi window mode is set.
K. Weak Battery of Memory
: Displayed when the battery of memory is weak.

L. Saving Data
: Displayed while saving the data.
1-15 43 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
1.2.4.5 Human Interface Display Area

An error(s) or a message(s) is displayed in the human interface display
area.
Turn on servo power
When an error is displayed, operations cannot be performed until the error

is canceled. Press [CANCEL] to allow for operations.
When two or more errors occur, appears in the message display area.
Activate the message display area and press [SELECT] to view the list of
current errors.
5/9
Cannot load macro job at current security mode
HELP
Cannot insert/modify/delete for group axis detachment
CLOSE
Cannot insert/modify/delete for axis detachment
To close the error list, select "CLOSE" or press [CANCEL].
1.2.4.6 Menu Area

The menu area is used to edit a job, manage jobs, and execute various
utilities.
1-16 44 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
1.2.5 Screen Descriptions

• The menu displayed in the programming pendant is denoted with { }. 
The above menu items are denoted with {DATA}, {EDIT}, {DISPLAY},
AND {UTILITY}.
• The window can be displayed according to the view desired.
Full Window View
Upper Window View
Middle Window View
Lower Window View
1-17 45 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
1.2.6 Character Input Operation

Move the cursor to the data for which characters are to be input, and press
[SELECT] to display the software keypad.
1.2.6.1 Character Input

To input characters, the software keypad is shown on the programming
pendant display.
There are three types of software keypads: the alphanumeric keypads
each for upper-case and lower-case characters and the symbol keypad.
To switch between the alphanumeric keypads and the symbol keypad,
touch the button tab on the screen or press [PAGE]. To switch the
alphanumeric keypads between upper-case and lower-case characters,
touch “CapsLock OFF” or “CapsLock ON”.
1.2.6.2 Operation
Keypad Button on the Explanation

Programming
Pendant
Cursor Moves the cursor (focus).
[SELECT] Selects a character.

SELECT
[CANCEL] Clears all the characters being

CANCEL
typed.
Pressing this second time cancels
the software keypad.
[ENTER] Enters the input characters.
ENTER
Button Tab Switches the keypads displayed on

GO BACK
the programming pendant.
PAGE
Closes the software keypad.

MAIN
MENU
Numeric Keys Enters numbers.

0
to
1-18 46 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
1.2.6.3 Alphanumeric Input

Number input is performed with the Numeric keys or on the following
alphanumeric input window. Numbers include 0 to 9, the decimal point (.),
and the minus sign/hyphen (-).
Note however, that the decimal point cannot be used in job names.
GO BACK
Press the page key PAGE to display the alphanumeric input window. Move
the cursor to the desired letter and press [SELECT] to enter the letter.
For Numbers and Upper-case Characters
For Numbers and Lower-case Characters
1-19 47 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
1.2.6.4 Symbol Input

GO BACK
Press the page key PAGE to display the symbol input window.
Move the cursor to the desired symbol and press [SELECT] to enter the
symbol.
Note that only some symbols are available for naming jobs.
For Symbols
SUPPLE-
When the focus is in a text field of [Result], it is able to move
MENT a cursor position by pressing [Shift]+[ → ] or [Shift]+[ ← ].
1-20 48 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
1.2.6.5 Register Word Function

This function enables to use the registered word when input a character
by registering the word (character string) in advance. 
To use this function simplifies to input the same character strings. 
It is able to register the 32 words of eight characters.
There is a limit to enter the character by input contents. If a

registered word includes a limited character, it is unable to
SUPPLE- use the word. 
MENT
e.g. Unable to use the lower case characters, a decimal
point and symbols to the job name.
Select {SET WORD} from {SETUP} in the main menu.

– Register word window is displayed
– The registered words are displayed in the word area.
– If there is not any registered word, unable to select [Name order],
[Delete] and [Delete All] in the button area.
Word area Button area
1-21 49 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
 Word Registration
It is able to register the 32 words of eight characters. 
Register a word by selecting [REGISTER WORD] button while the word
editing is valid (S2C410=1) during using the keyboard, or register the
word in the word register screen.
e.g. Register the word “TEST”. 
Select [KEYBORD].
Enter [TEST] by using the keyboard, and select [Regist].

– The dial box appears.
1-22 50 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
Select [REGISTER WORD].

– The word area appears.
– Confirm that [TEST] is in the word area.
 Back Space
Delete the last character of the input character string.
Select [Back space] in the word register screen.
– Delete the last character of the input character string.
 Cancel
Cancel the input character string.
Select [Cancel] in the word register screen.
– Cancel the character string if there is a character string is input.
– End the word register screen if there is not any character string.
1-23 51 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
 Use of Words
e.g. Use the registered word [TEST].
Select [REGISTER WORD].
– The word area is displayed.
There is a limit to enter the character by input contents. If a

registered word includes a limited character, it is unable to
SUPPLE- use the word. 
MENT
e.g. Unable to use the lower case characters, a decimal
point and symbols to the job name.
Select [TEST] in the word area.

– The registered word [TEST] appears in the input area.
1-24 52 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
Select [KEYBORD].
Move the focus to “1” by the programming pendant, and press [Select].
– The “1” is added after [TEST] in the [Result].
While [TEST1] is displayed in the [Result], select [Regist].

The dial box, which says {“TEST1” Word registration succeeded. }
appears, and the registration is completed.
1-25 53 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
 Change the Arrangement of the Words to Display

Able to change the arrangement of the words to display.
1. Name order display
Select [Name order] in the button area.
– Displayed by the name order of the words.
– [Name order] button changes to [Register order] button.
2. Register order display

Select [Register order] in the button area.
– Displayed by the register order of the words.
– [Register order] button changes to [Name order] button.
1-26 54 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
 Delete the Word

Able to delete the registered words.
Delete the words while the word editing is valid (S2C410=1) during using
the keyboard, or delete the word in the word register screen.
e.g. Delete registered word “TEST”. 
Select [REGISTER WORD]. 
The word area appears.
Select [TEST] in the word area, and select [Delete] in the button area.
– The dialog box, which asks {“TEST” Do you delete a word?},
appears.
Select [Yes].
[TEST] in the word area is deleted.
1-27 55 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
 Delete All Words

Able to delete all registered words.
Delete while the word editing is valid (S2C410=1) during using the
keyboard, or delete the word in the word register screen.
• Delete all registered words. 
Select [Delete All] in the button area.
– The dialog box, which asks {Do you delete all words?}, appears.
Select [Yes].
– The all words are deleted.
1-28 56 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
1.3 Mode
1.3 Mode
The following three modes are available for DX100.
• Teach Mode
• Play Mode
• Remote Mode
1.3.1 Teach Mode

In the teach mode, the following can be done.
• Preparation and teaching of a job
• Modification of a registered job
• Setting of various characteristic files and parameters
1.3.2 Play Mode

In the play mode, the following can be done.
• Playback of a taught job
• Setting, modification, or deletion of various condition files
1.3.3 Remote Mode

In the remote mode, the operations such as Servo ON Ready, Start, Cycle
Change, Call Master Job can be commanded by external input signals.
The operations by external input signals become enabled in the remote
mode, while [START] on the programming pendant becomes disabled.
The data transmission function (optional function) is also available in the
remote mode.
The following table shows how each operation is input in each mode.
Mode Teach Mode Play Mode Remote Mode
Operation
Servo ON Ready PP PP External input signal
Start Invalid PP External input signal
Cycle Change PP PP External input signal
Call Master Job PP PP External input signal
Note: “PP” indicates the programming pendant.
1.3.4 Teach Mode Priority

In the teach mode, following operations are disabled:
1. Playback using [START].
2. Playback from external input signals.
1-29 57 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
1.4 Security Mode
1.4 Security Mode
1.4.1 Types of Security Modes

The following three types of security modes are available for DX100.
Any operation in the edit mode and the management mode requires a
password. The password must contain between 4 and 8 letters, numbers,
or symbols.
• Operation Mode 
The operator can monitor the line operation and start and stop the
manipulator. Repairs, etc. can be performed if any abnormalities are
detected.
• Edit Mode 
Teaching, robot jog operations, and editing of jobs and various
condition files can be performed in addition to the operations
enabled in the operation mode.
• Management Mode 
The operator who performs setup and maintenance for the system
can set the machine control parameter, set the time, change the
password, etc. in addition to the operations enabled in the edit mode.
1-30 58 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
1.4 Security Mode
Table 1-1: Menu & Security Mode (Sheet 1 of 4)

Main Menu Sub Menu Allowed Security Mode
DISPLAY EDIT
JOB JOB Operation Edit
SELECT JOB Operation Operation
CREATE NEW JOB1) Edit Edit
MASTER JOB Operation Edit
JOB CAPACITY Operation -
RES. START (JOB)1) Edit Edit
2)
RES. STATUS Operation -
CYCLE Operation Operation
VARIABLE BYTE Operation Edit
INTEGER Operation Edit
DOUBLE Operation Edit
REAL Operation Edit
STRING Operation Edit
POSITION (ROBOT) Operation Edit
POSITION (BASE) Operation Edit
POSITION (ST) Operation Edit
LOCAL VARIABLE Operation -
IN/OUT EXTERNAL INPUT Operation Edit
EXTERNAL OUTPUT Operation Edit
UNIVERSAL INPUT Operation Operation
UNIVERSAL OUTPUT Operation Operation
SPECIFIC INPUT Operation -
SPECIFIC OUTPUT Operation -
RIN Operation -
CPRIN Operation -
REGISTER Operation Management
AUXILIARY RELAY Operation -
CONTROL INPUT Operation -
PSEUDO INPUT SIG Operation Management
NETWORK INPUT Operation -
NETWORK OUTPUT Operation -
ANALOG OUTPUT Operation -
SV POWER STATUS Operation -
LADDER PROGRAM Management Management
I/O ALARM Management Management
I/O MESSAGE Management Management
1-31 59 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
1.4 Security Mode

DISPLAY EDIT
ROBOT CURRENT POSITION Operation -
COMMAND POSITION Operation -
SERVO MONITOR Management -
WORK HOME POS Operation Edit
SECOND HOME POS Operation Edit
DROP AMOUNT Management Management
POWER ON/OFF POS Operation -
TOOL Edit Edit
INTERFERENCE Management Management
SHOCK SENS LEVEL Operation Edit
USER COORDINATE Edit Edit
HOME POSITION Management Management
MANIPULATOR TYPE Management -
ANALOG MONITOR Management Management
OVERRUN&S-SENSOR1) Edit Edit
1)
LIMIT RELEASE Edit Edit
1)
ARM CONTROL Management Management
SHIFT VALUE Operation -
SYSTEM INFO VERSION Operation -
MONITORING TIME Operation Management
ALARM HISTORY Operation Management
I/O MSG HISTORY Operation Management
SECURITY Operation Operation
FD/CF LOAD Edit -
SAVE Operation -
VERIFY Operation -
DELETE Operation -
DEVICE Operation Operation
FOLDER Edit Management
1) Operation -
INITIALIZE
1-32 60 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
1.4 Security Mode

DISPLAY EDIT
PARAMETER S1CxG Management Management
S2C Management Management
A1P Management Management
RS Management Management
S1E Management Management
SETUP TEACHING COND. Edit Edit
OPERATE COND. Management Management
OPERATE ENABLE Management Management
FUNCTION ENABLE Management Management
JOG COND. Management Management
PLAYBACK COND. Management Management
FUNCTION COND. Management Management
DATE/TIME Management Management
2) Management Management
GRP COMBINATION
RESERVE JOB NAME Edit Edit
USER ID Edit Edit
SET SPEED Management Management
KEY ALLOCATION Management Management
JOG KEY ALLOC. Edit Management
RES. START (CNCT) Management Management
AUTO BACK SET Management Management
WRONG DATA LOG Edit Management
ENERGY SAVING FUNCTION Edit Management
DISPLAY CHANGE FONT Operation Operation
SETUP CHANGE BUTTON Operation Operation
INITIALIZE LAYOUT Operation Operation
CHANGE WINDOW PATTERN Operation Operation
1-33 61 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
1.4 Security Mode

DISPLAY EDIT
ARC WELDING ARC START COND. Operation Edit
ARC END COND. Operation Edit
ARC AUX COND. Operation Edit
POWER SOURCE COND. Operation Edit
ARC WELD DIAG. Operation Edit
WEAVING Operation Edit
ARC MONITOR Operation Edit
ARC MONITOR (SAMPL) Operation -
HANDLING HANDLING DIAGNOSIS Operation Edit
SPOT WELD DIAGNOSIS Operation Edit
WELDING I/O ALLOCATION Management Management
GUN CONDITION Management Management
SPOT POWER SOURCE Management Management
COND.
APPLICATION CONDITION Management Management
SETTING
SPOT WELD DIAGNOSIS Operation Edit
WELDING GUN PRESSURE Edit Edit
(MOTOR GUN)
PRESSURE Edit Edit
I/O ALLOCATION Management Management
GUN CONDITION Management Management
CLEARANCE SETTING Operation Edit
SPOT POWER SOURCE Management Management
COND.
TIP INSTALLATION Operation Management
APPLICATION SETTING Management Management
GENERAL WEAVING Operation Edit
GENERAL DIAG. Operation Edit
COMMON TO I/O VARIABLE CUSTOMIZE Operation Operation
ALL
APPLICATIONS
1 Displayed in the teach mode only.
2 Displayed in the play mode only.
1-34 62 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
1.4 Security Mode
1.4.2 Changing Security Modes

The security mode can be changed only when the main menu is
displayed.
1. Select {SYSTEM INFO} under the main menu.
– The sub menu appears.
2. Select {SECURITY}.
– The security of the main menu is shown.
– The security mode can be selected from operation mode, edit mode,
or management mode.
1-35 63 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
1.4 Security Mode
3. Select the desired security mode.

– When the selected security mode is higher than the currently set
mode, the user ID input status window appears.
4. Input the user ID as required.
– At the factory, the user ID number is preset as follows: 
Edit Mode: [00000000] 
Management Mode: [99999999]
5. Press [ENTER].
– The selected security mode’s input ID is checked. If the correct user
ID is input, the security mode is changed.
1-36 64 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
DX100 2 Manipulator Coordinate Systems and Operations
2.1 Control Groups and Coordinate Systems
2 Manipulator Coordinate Systems and Operations
2.1.1 Control Group

For the DX100, a group of axes to be controlled at a time is called “Control
Group”, and the group is classified into three units: “ROBOT” as a
manipulator itself, “BASE” that moves the manipulator in parallel, and
“STATION” as jigs or tools other than “ROBOT” and “BASE”. BASE and
STATION are also called external axes.
Robot
This is the axis for the
manipulator itself.
Station
This is any axis other than the ro-
bot and base. It indicates the
Base
tilt or rotating axis of the fixture.
This is the axis that moves the entire manipulator.
It corresponds to the servo track.
It controls the path of traveling manipulators.
2-1 65 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
2.1.2 Types of Coordinate Systems

The following coordinate systems can be used to operate the manipulator:
• Joint Coordinates 
Each axis of the manipulator moves independently. 
• Cartesian Coordinates 
The tool tip of the manipulator moves parallel to any of the X-, Y-,
and Z-axes. 
• Cylindrical Coordinates 
The  axis moves around the S-axis. The R-axis moves parallel to
the L-axis arm. For vertical motion, the tool tip of the manipulator
moves parallel to the Z-axis. 
• Tool Coordinates 
The effective direction of the tool mounted in the wrist flange of the
manipulator is defined as the Z-axis. This axis controls the
coordinates of the end point of the tool. 
• User Coordinates 
The XYZ-cartesian coordinates are defined at any point and angle. 
The tool tip of the manipulator moves parallel to the axes of them.
U-axis
R-axis
B-axis
T-axis Z-axis Z-axis

E-axis
L-axis
S-axis Y-axis r-axis

-axis
X-axis r-axis
Joint Coordinates Cartesian Coordinates Cylindrical Coordinates
Z-axis Y-axis
X-axis
X-axis
Y-axis
Z-axis
Tool Coordinates User Coordinates
2-2 66 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
2.2 General Operations
2.2.0.1 Check Safety

Before any operation of the DX100, read Section 1 “Safety” of “DX100
INSTRUCTIONS” again and keep safe around the robot system or
peripherals.
2.2.0.2 Select Teach Mode

Set the mode switch on the programming pendant to “teach”.
2.2.0.3 Select Control Group

If the DX100 has several Control Groups or Coordinate Control Systems
(optional function), select control group first.
If two or more ROBOT, BASE, STATION are registered, switch control
group by pressing [SHIFT] + [ROBOT] or [SHIFT] + [EX. AXIS].
After selecting a job, the control group registered in the selected job is
enabled. The control group registered in the edit job can be switched by
pressing [ROBOT] or [EX. AXIS].
Check the selected control group at the status display area on the
programming pendant.
2.2.0.4 Select Coordinate System

Select a coordinate system by pressing [COORD] key.
Each time [COORD] key is pressed, the coordinate system switches in the
following order:
JointCartesian (Cylindrical)ToolUser.
Check the selected coordinate on the status display area on the
2-3 67 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
2.2.0.5 Select Manual Speed

Select manual speed of operation by pressing [FAST] or [SLOW]. The
selected speed is effective not only for axis operation but [FWD] or [BWD]
operation.
In operating the manipulator manually by the programming

NOTE pendant, the maximum speed of center point is limited at
250 mm/s.
• Each time [FAST] is pressed, the speed switches in the order of

“INCH””SLOW””MED””FAST”. 
FAST INCH SLW MED FST
• Each time [SLOW] is pressed, the speed switches in the order of

“FAST””MED””SLOW””INCH”. 
SLOW FST MED SLW INCH 
Check selected manual speed on the status area of Programming

Pendant.
2.2.0.6 Servo ON
Press [SERVO ON READY], then SERVO ON LED starts blinking.
Squeeze the Enable switch, then SERVO ON LED starts lighting.
2.2.0.7 Axis Operation

Make sure of safety around the manipulator. Press axis key, then axis
moves according to the selected control group, coordinates, and manual
speed. See section 2.3 “Coordinate Systems and Axis Operation” on
page 2-5.
2.2.0.8 HIGH SPEED

Press [HIGH SPEED] while pressing an axis key to make the manipulator
move faster than the usual speed.
SUPPLE-
The [HIGH SPEED] key is disabled when “INCH” is selected
MENT for the manual speed.
2-4 68 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
2.3 Coordinate Systems and Axis Operation
2.3.1 Joint Coordinates

When operating in joint coordinates mode, the S, L, U, R, B, and T-axes of
the manipulator move independently. The motion of each axis is
described in the table below.
Table 2-1: Axis Motion in Joint Coordinates
Axis Name Axis Operation Key Motion
Major S-axis Main unit rotates right and left.
Axes X- X+
S- S+
L-axis Lower arm moves forward and
Y- Y+ backward.
L- L+
U-axis Upper are moves up and down.
Z- Z+
U- U+
Wrist R-axis Wrist rolls right and left.
Axes X- X+
R- R+
B-axis Wrist moves up and down.

Y- Y+
B- B+
T-axis Wrist turns right and left.

Z- Z+
T- T+
E-axis Lower arm turns right and left.

E- E+
• When two or more axis keys are pressed at the same time,
the manipulator will perform a compound movement.
However, if two different directional keys (such as [S -] + [S
SUPPLE- +]) for the same axis are pressed at the same time, the
MENT
axis will not operate. 
(When [S -] + [S +] + [L +] are pressed, only the axis
corresponding to [L +] will operate.)
2-5 69 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
U-axis Z+
U+
R-axis
X+
R+ B-axis
Y+
B+
T-axis
Z+
X- T+
Z- R-
U- Y-
B-
E-axis E- Z-
T-
E+
L-axis Y-
L-
Y+
L+
S-axis X- X+
S- S+
2.3.2 Cartesian Coordinates

In the cartesian coordinates, the manipulator moves parallel to the X-, Y-,
or Z-axes. The motion of each axis is described in the table below.
Table 2-2: Axis Motion in Cartesian Coordinates
Basic X-axis Moves parallel to X-axis.
Axes X- X+
S- S+
Y-axis Moves parallel to Y-axis.
Y- Y+
L- L+
Z-axis Moves parallel to Z-axis.
Z- Z+
U- U+
Wrist Axes Motion about TCP is executed. See section 2.3.7 “Control
Point Operation” on page 2-15.
the manipulator will perform compound movement.
However, if two different directional keys (such as [X -] + [X
MENT
(When [X -] + [X +] + [Y +] are pressed, only the axis
corresponding to [Y +] will operate.)
2-6 70 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
Z-axis
Y-axis
X-axis
Fig. 2-1: Moves parallel to X- or Y-axis Fig. 2-2: Moves parallel to Z-axis
Y-axis Z-axis
X- X+ Z+
S- S+ U+
Y+
L+
X-axis Z-
U-
Y-
L-
2.3.3 Cylindrical Coordinates

In the cylindrical coordinates, the manipulator moves as follows. The
motion of each axis is described in the table below.
Table 2-3: Axis Motion in Cylindrical Coordinates
Basic -axis Main unit rolls around S-axis.
Axes X- X+
S- S+
r-axis Moves perpendicular to Z-

Y- Y+ axis.
L- L+

Z- Z+
U- U+
Wrist Axes Motion about TCP is executed. See section 2.3.7

“Control Point Operation” on page 2-15.
2-7 71 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
However, if two different directional keys (such as [Z -] + [Z
MENT
(When [Z -] + [Z +] + [Y +] are pressed, only the axis
Z-axis
r-axis
-axis
r-axis
Fig. 2-3: Rolls around q-axis Fig. 2-4: Moves perpendicular to r-axis
X+
S+
r-axis
Y+
L+
Y-
L-
r-axis
Y- Y+
X- L- L+
S-
2-8 72 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
2.3.4 Tool Coordinates

In the tool coordinates, the manipulator moves parallel to the X-, Y-, and Z-
axes, which are defined at the tip of the tool. The motion of each axis is
described in the table below.
Table 2-4: Axis Motion in Tool Coordinates
Axes X- X+
S- S+
Y- Y+
L- L+
Z- Z+
U- U+
MENT
X-axis
X-axis
Z-axis
Y-axis Y-axis
Y-axis
Z-axis X-axis
Z-axis
The tool coordinates are defined at the tip of the tool, assuming that the
effective direction of the tool mounted on the manipulator wrist flange is
the Z-axis. Therefore, the tool coordinates axis direction moves with the
wrist.
In the tool coordinates motion, the manipulator can be moved using the
effective tool direction as a reference regardless of the manipulator
position or orientation. These motions are best suited when the
manipulator is required to move parallel while maintaining the tool
orientation with the workpieces.
2-9 73 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
Z-
U-
Z+
U+
X+
S+
X-
S-
For tool coordinates, the tool file should be registered in

SUPPLE-
advance. For further details, refer to section 8.3 “Tool Data
MENT Setting” of coordinates “DX100 INSTRUCTIONS” 
(RE-CTO-A215).
2-10 74 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
2.3.4.1 Selecting Tool

Tool numbers are used to specify a tool when more than one tool is used
on the system.
You may select from the registered tool files when you switch tools on the
manipulator.
This operation can be performed only when the number of

tool is more than one.
To use several tool files with one manipulator, set the follow-
SUPPLE- ing parameter.
MENT
S2C431: Tool number switch specifying parameter 
1: Can be switched 
0: Cannot be switched
1. Press the [COORD] key and select the tool coordinates .
– Each time [COORD] key is pressed, the coordinate system switches

JointCartesian (Cylindrical)ToolUser. 
Check the change on the status display area.
2. Press [SHIFT] + [COORD].
– The TOOL NO. SELECT window appears.
3. Move the cursor to the tool to use.

– The TOOL NO. SELECT window above shows an example; “TOOL
NO. 0 TORCH MT-3501” is selected.
– The window goes back to the previous window.
2-11 75 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
2.3.5 User Coordinates

In the user coordinates, the manipulator moves parallel to each axis of the
coordinates which are set by the user. Up to 24 coordinate types can be
registered. Each coordinate has a user number and is called a user
coordinate file. 
The figure and the table below describe the motion of each axis when the
axis key is pressed.
Table 2-5: Axis Motion in User Coordinates
Axes X- X+
S- S+
Y- Y+
L- L+
Z- Z+
U- U+
MENT
Fig. 2-5: Moves parallel to X or Y-axis

Y-axis
X- X+
S- S+
Y+
L+
X-axis
Y-
L-
Z-axis
Z-axis
Y-axis
Fig. 2-6: Moves parallel to Z-axis
X-axis
Z-axis
X-axis
Z+ Y-axis
U+
Station, etc.
Z-
U-
Y-axis
2-12 76 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
2.3.5.1 Selecting User Coordinates

Follow these procedures to select the desired coordinate system from
among the registered user coordinates.
1. Press [COORD] to select the user coordinates .
– Each time [COORD] key is pressed, the coordinate system switches

JointCartesian (Cylindrical)ToolUser. 
Check the change on the status display area.
– The USER COORD SELECT window appears.
For more information on registration of the user coordinates,

SUPPLE- refer to section 8.8 “User Coordinate Setting” of “DX100
MENT
INSTRUCTIONS” (RE-CTO-A215).
3. Select the desired user number.
2-13 77 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
2.3.5.2 Examples of User Coordinate Utilization

The user coordinate settings allow easy teaching in various situations.
For example:
• When multiple positioners are used, 
manual operation can be simplified by setting the user coordinates
for each fixture.
User coordinates Fixture
Fixture Fixture
User coordinates
• When performing arranging or stacking operations, 

the incremental value for shift can be easily programmed by setting
user coordinates on a pallet.
• When performing conveyor tracking operations, 

the moving direction of the conveyor is specified.
Conveyor
2.3.6 External Axis

The external axis can be operated by selecting “BASE” or “STATION” for
the control group. The motion of each axis is described in the table below.

BASE or 1st axis The 1st axis moves.
STATION X- X+
S- S+
2nd axis The 2nd axis moves.
Y- Y+
L- L+
3rd axis The 3rd axis moves.
Z- Z+
U- U+
2-14 78 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
2.3.7 Control Point Operation

Motion about TCP (Tool Center Point) can only change the wrist
orientation at a fixed TCP position in all coordinate systems except the
joint coordinates. The motion of each axis is described in the table below.
Table 2-6: Axis Motion in Motion about TCP
Major Axes TCP moves. These movements
X- X+ differ depending on cartesian,
S- S+ cylindrical, tool and user
coordinates.
Y- Y+
L- L+
Z- Z+
U- U+
Wrist Axes Wrist axes move with the TCP
X- X+ fixed. These movements differ
R- R+
depending on cartesian,
cylindrical, tool and user
Y- Y+ coordinates.
B- B+
Z- Z+
T- T+
E-axis * Available only for the manipulator

E- E+ with seven axes 
The posture of arm changes while
the position and posture of the tool
remain fixed. (The Re degree
changes.)
MENT
axis will not operate.
2-15 79 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
Re is an element to indicate the posture of the manipulator

with seven axes and does not change by the specified
coordinates.
The definition of Re is shown below.
SUPPLE-
MENT
Fig. 2-7: Torch Welding Fig. 2-8: Gun Spot Welding
TCP
2-16 80 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
Turning of each wrist axis differs in each coordinate system.
• In cartesian or cylindrical coordinates, wrist axis rotations are based

on the X-, Y-, or Z-axis.
Z-axis
+
Y-axis
Z-axis X-axis
+
Y-axis
X-axis
• In tool coordinates, wrist axis rotations are based on X-, Y-, or Z-axis
of the tool coordinates.
X-axis
Z-axis
+
+
Y-axis
2-17 81 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
• In user coordinates, wrist axis rotations are based on X-, Y-, or Z-axis
of the user coordinates.
Z-axis
+
Y-axis
+ X-axis
Z-axis
Y-axis
X-axis
2.3.7.1 Control Point Change

The tool tip position (TCP) is the target point of axis operations and is set
as the distance from the flange face. The control point change operation
is an axis operation that involves selecting a tool from the list of registered
tools (Refer to section 2.3.4.1 “Selecting Tool” on page 2-11), and then
manipulating the axes while changing the TCP. This can be performed
with all coordinates except the joint coordinates. The axis operation is the
same as that of the motion about TCP.
<Example 1>TCP Change Operation with Multiple Tools

(1) Set the TCPs for Tool 1 and Tool 2 as P1 and P2, respectively.
(2) When Tool 1 is selected to perform an axis operation, P1 (Tool 1’s
TCP) is the target point of the operation. Tool 2 follows Tool 1 and
is not controlled by the axis operation.
(3) On the other hand, When Tool 2 is selected to perform an axis
operation, P2 (Tool 2’s TCP) is the target point of the axis opera-
tion. In this case, Tool 1 just follows Tool 2.
Fig. 2-9: Selection of Tool 1 and axis Fig. 2-10: Selection of Tool 2 and
operations with controlling P1 axis operations with controlling P2
Tool 1 Tool 2
P1 P2 P1 P2
Workpiece Workpiece
2-18 82 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
<Example 2>TCP Change Operation with a Single Tool

(1) Set the two corners of the workpiece that the tool is holding as
TCP P1 and P2 respectively.
(2) By selecting two TCPs alternately, the workpiece can be moved as
shown below:
Fig. 2-11: Motion about TCP with P1 Fig. 2-12: Motion about TCP with P2
selected selected
Workpiece
Workpiece
P1
P1 P2 P2
SUPPLE-
For registration of the tool file, refer to section 8.3 “Tool Data
MENT Setting” of “DX100 INSTRUCTIONS” (RE-CTO-A215).
2-19 83 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
DX100 3 Teaching
3.1 Preparation for Teaching
3 Teaching

To ensure safety, the following operations should always be performed
before teaching:
• Check the emergency stop buttons to be sure they function properly.
• Set the mode switch to “TEACH”.
Then,
• Register a job.
3.1.1 Checking Emergency Stop Buttons

The Servo ON button on the programming pendant should be lit while the
power is ON for the servo system. Perform the following operation to
ensure that the emergency stop buttons on both the DX100 and the
programming pendant are functioning correctly before operating the
manipulator.
1. Press E. STOP button.

– Press the emergency stop button on the DX100 or the programming
pendant.
2. Confirm the servo power is turned OFF.
– The SERVO ON button on the programming pendant lights while
servo supply is turned ON.
– When the emergency stop button is pressed and the servo power is
turned OFF, the SERVO ON lamp will turn OFF.
3. Press [SERVO ON READY] of the programming pendant.
– After confirming correct operation, press [SERVO ON READY]. The
servo power will be ready to turn ON.
– The servo power can be turned ON while the SERVO ON button
lamp blinks.
3.1.2 Setting the Teach Lock

For safety purposes, always set the mode switch to “TEACH” before
beginning to teach.
While the teach lock is set, the mode of operation is tied to the teach mode
and the machines cannot be played back using either [START] or external
input.
3-1 84 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
DX100 3 Teaching
3.1.3 Registering a Job

Specify the name, comments (as required), and control group to register a
job.
3.1.3.1 Registering Job Names

Job names can use up to 32 alphanumeric and symbol characters. These
different types of characters can coexist within the same job name.
The following rules apply to the designation of job names:
• A maximum of 32 characters can be used for a job name.
• If the job name is already used, an input error is caused.
<Example>
0 0 1 JO B - 1 WO R K - A
3.1.3.2 Registering Jobs

1. Select {JOB} under the main menu.
– The sub-menu appears.
3-2 85 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
DX100 3 Teaching
2. Select {CREATE NEW JOB}.

– The NEW JOB CREATE window appears.
3. Input job name.

– Move the cursor to JOB NAME, and press [SELECT]. Input job
names using the character input operation. For information on
character input operation, refer to section 1.2.6 “Character Input
Operation” on page 1-18.
4. Press [ENTER].
3.1.3.3 Registering Comments

Register a comment using up to 32 alphanumeric and symbol characters
as required.
1. Enter a comment.
– In the NEW JOB CREATE window, move the cursor to the comment
and press [SELECT]. For information on character input operation,
refer to section 1.2.6 “Character Input Operation” on page 1-18.
2. Press [ENTER].
3.1.3.4 Registering Control Groups

Select the control group that has been registered in advance. If external
axes (BASE or STATION) or multiple robot systems are not used, the
registration of control groups is not required.
3-3 86 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
DX100 3 Teaching
3.1.3.5 Switching to the Teaching Window

After the name, comments (can be omitted), and the control groups have
been registered, switch the window to the teaching window as follows.
1. In the NEW JOB CREATE window, press [ENTER] or select
“EXECUTE”.
– Job name, comments, and control groups are all registered. Then,
the JOB CONTENT window appears. NOP and END instructions
are automatically registered.
3-4 87 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
DX100 3 Teaching
3.2 Teaching Operation
3.2.1 Teaching Window

Teaching is conducted in the JOB CONTENT window. The JOB
CONTENT window contains the following items:
B. Cursor
C. Instruction, additional
items, comments, etc.
A. Line numbers
A. Line Numbers
The number of the job line is automatically displayed. Line numbers are
automatically updated if lines are inserted or deleted.
B. Cursor
The cursor for manipulator control. For the FWD, BWD, and test
operation, the manipulator motion starts from the line this cursor points.
C. Instructions, Additional Items, Comments, Etc.
MOVJ VJ = 50.00
Tag Numerical Data
Instruction Additional Item
Instructions : These are instructions needed to process or perform an

operation. In the case of MOVE instructions, the
instruction corresponding to the interpolation type is
automatically displayed at the time position is taught.
Additional items : Speed and time are set depending on the type of
instruction. When needed, numerical or character data
is added to the condition-setting tags.
3-5 88 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
DX100 3 Teaching
3.2.2 Interpolation Type and Play Speed

Interpolation type determines the path along which the manipulator moves
between playback steps. Play speed is the rate at which the manipulator
moves.
Normally, the position data, interpolation type, and play speed are
registered together for a robot axis step. If the interpolation type or play
speed settings are omitted during teaching, the data used from the
previously taught step is automatically used.
3.2.2.1 Joint Interpolation

The joint interpolation is used when the manipulator does not need to
move in a specific path toward the next step position. When the joint
interpolation is used for teaching a robot axis, the move instruction is
MOVJ. For safety purposes, use the joint interpolation to teach the first
step.
When [MOTION TYPE] is pressed, the move instruction on the input
buffer line changes.
<Play Speed Setting Window>
• Speeds are indicated as percentages of the maximum rate.
• Setting “0:Speed Omit” sets the same speed as the previous
determination.
1. Move the cursor to the play speed.
2. Set the play speed by pressing [SHIFT] + the cursor key.
– The joint speed value increases or decreases.
Fast 100.00
50.00
25.00
12.50
6.25
3.12
1.56
Slow 0.78 (%)
3-6 89 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
DX100 3 Teaching
3.2.2.2 Linear Interpolation

The manipulator moves in a linear path from one taught step to the next.
When the linear interpolation is used to teach a robot axis, the move
instruction is MOVL. Linear interpolation is used for work such as
welding. The manipulator moves automatically changing the wrist position
as shown in the figure below.
<Play Speed Setting Window (same for circular and spline interpolation)>
• There are two types of displays, and they can be switched
depending on the application.
1. Move the cursor to the play speed.
2. Set the play speed by pressing [SHIFT] + the cursor key.
– The play speed value increases or decreases.
Fast 1500.0 Fast 9000

750.0 4500
375.0 2250
187.0 1122
93.0 558
46.0 276
23.0 138
Slow 11 (mm/s) Slow 66 (cm/min)
3-7 90 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
DX100 3 Teaching
3.2.2.3 Circular Interpolation

The manipulator moves in an arc that passes through three points. When
circular interpolation is used for teaching a robot axis, the move instruction
is MOVC.
 Single Circular Arc

When a single circular movement is required, teach the circular
interpolation for three points, P1 to P3, as shown in the following figure. If
joint or linear interpolation is taught at P0, the point before starting the
circular operation, the manipulator moves from P0 to P1 in a straight line.
Table 3-1: Interpolation Type for Single Circular Arc
Point Interpolation Instruction
Type
P0 Joint or MOVJ
P2 Linear MOVL
Automatically becomes
a straight line. P1 Circular MOVC
P2
P3
P0 P1 P3 P4 P4 Joint or MOVJ
Linear MOVL
 Continuous Circular Arcs

As shown below, when two or more successive circular movements with
different curvatures are required, the movements must be separated from
each other by a joint or linear interpolation step. This step must be
inserted between the steps at an identical point. The step at the end point
of the preceding circular movement must coincide with the beginning point
of the following circular movement.
Table 3-2: Interpolation Type for Continuous Circular Arcs
Type
P0 Joint or MOVJ
Linear MOVL
Joint or linear P1 Circular MOVC
P2 motion type P2
P3
P3 P7 P8
P4 P4 Joint or MOVJ
P0 P1 P5 Linear MOVL
P5 Circular MOVC
P6 P6
P7
P8 Joint or MOVJ
Linear MOVL
3-8 91 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
DX100 3 Teaching
Alternatively, to continue movements without adding an extra joint or linear

interpolation step in between, add “FPT” tag to the step whose curvature
is needed to be changed.
Type
P0 Joint or MOVJ
Linear MOVL
P2
P1 Circular MOVC
P2
P5 P6
P3 P3 Circular MOVC
P0 P1 FPT
P4 Circular MOVC
P4 P5
P6 Joint or MOVJ
Linear MOVL
<Play Speed>
• The play speed set display is identical to that for the linear
interpolation.
• The speed taught at P2 is applied from P1 to P2. The speed taught
at P3 is applied from P2 to P3.
• If a circular operation is taught at high speed, the actual arc path has
a shorter radius than that taught.
3.2.2.4 Spline Interpolation

When performing operations such as welding, cutting, and applying
primer, using the spline interpolation makes teaching for workpieces with
irregular shapes easier. The path of motion is a parabola passing through
three points. When spline interpolation is used for teaching a robot axis,
the move instruction is MOVS.
 Single Spline Curve

When a single spline curve movement is required, teach the spline
interpolation for three points, P1 to P3, as shown in the figure below. If
joint or linear interpolation is taught at point P0, the point before starting
the spline interpolation, the manipulator moves from P0 to P1 in a straight
line.
Table 3-3: Interpolation Type for Single Spline Curve
Type
P0 Joint or MOVJ
P2 Linear MOVL
P1 Spline MOVS
Automatically becomes
P2
a straight line.
P3
P4 Joint or MOVJ
Linear MOVL
3-9 92 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
DX100 3 Teaching
 Continuous Spline Curves

The manipulator moves through a path created by combining parabolic
curves. This differs from the circular interpolation in that steps with
identical points are not required at the junction between two spline curves.
Table 3-4: Interpolation Type for Continuous Spline Curves
Type
P0 Joint or MOVJ
P2 Identical-point
Linear MOVL
step not required P1 Spline MOVS
to
P5 P6 P5
P3
P0 P1 P6 Joint or MOVJ
Linear MOVL
P4
When the parabolas overlap, a composite motion path is created.
Start path End path
<Play Speed>
• The play speed setting window is identical to that for the linear
interpolation.
• As with the circular interpolation, the speed taught at P2 is applied
from P1 to P2, and the speed taught at P3 is applied from P2 to P3.
Teach points so that the distances between the three points

are roughly equal. If there is any significant difference, an
error will occur on playback and the manipulator may
operate in an unexpected, dangerous manner. Ensure that
the ratio of distances between steps m:n is within the range
NOTE of 0.25 to 0.75.
P2
n
P1 P3
m
3-10 93 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
DX100 3 Teaching
3.2.3 Teaching Steps
3.2.3.1 Registering Move Instructions

Whenever one step is taught, one move instruction is registered. There
are two ways to teach a step. Steps can be taught in sequence as shown
in the following left figure Fig. 3-1 “Registering Move Instructions” or they
can be done by inserting steps between already registered steps, as
shown in the right figure Fig. 3-2 “Inserting Move Instructions”
This paragraph explains the teaching of Fig. 3-1 “Registering Move
Instructions”, the operations involved in registering new steps.
Fig. 3-1: Registering Move Instructions Fig. 3-2: Inserting Move Instructions
Step 2 Step Insertion Step 2
P1
Step 1 Step 3
Step 1 Step 3
Teaching of Fig. 3-2 “Inserting Move Instructions” is called “Inserting move

instruction”, to distinguish it from the method shown in Fig. 3-1
“Registering Move Instructions”. For more details on this operation, see
section 3.4.2 “Inserting Move Instructions” on page 3-34. The basic
operations for registration and insertion are the same. The only difference
is pressing [INSERT] in the case of insertion. For registration (Fig. 3-1
“Registering Move Instructions”), the instruction is always registered
before the END instruction. Therefore, it is not necessary to press
[INSERT]. For insertion (Fig. 3-2 “Inserting Move Instructions”), [INSERT]
must be pressed.
3-11 94 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
DX100 3 Teaching
 Setting the Position Data

– The sub-menu appears.
2. Select {JOB}.
– The contents of the currently-selected job is displayed.
3. Move the cursor on the line immediately before the position where a
move instruction to be registered.
4. Grip the Enable switch.
– Grip the Enable switch to turn the servo power ON.
5. Move the manipulator to the desired position using the axis key.
– Use the axis operation key to move the manipulator to the desired
position.
3-12 95 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
DX100 3 Teaching
 Selecting the Tool Number

– When selecting the “JOINT”, “XYZ/CYLINDRICAL”, or “TOOL”
coordinates, press [SHIFT] + [COORD] and the TOOL NO. SELECT
window will be shown.
2. Move the cursor to the desired tool number.

– The currently-selected tool number by the cursor is displayed.
– The JOB CONTENT window appears.
Using Multiple Tools with One Manipulator

• When multiple tools are to be used with one manipulator,
SUPPLE- set parameter S2C431 to 1.
MENT
• See section 2.3.4 “Tool Coordinates” on page 2-9 for

details on this operation.
 Setting the Interpolation Type

1. Press [MOTION TYPE].
2. Select the desired interpolation type.
– When [MOTION TYPE] is pressed, MOVJ  MOVL  MOVC 
MOVS are displayed in order in the input buffer line.
3-13 96 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
DX100 3 Teaching
 Setting the Play Speed

1. Move the cursor to the instruction.
2. Press [SELECT].
– The cursor moves to the input buffer line.
3. Move the cursor to the play speed to be set.
4. Press [SHIFT] + the cursor key [] or [] simultaneously.

– The joint speed moves up and down.
5. Press [ENTER].
– The MOV instruction is registered.
Move instruction
is registered.
Follow the above instructions when conducting teaching. (Tool number,

interpolation type, or play speed does not need to be set if it is same as
the previous step.)
To make the setting so that the play speed tag is not

SUPPLE- displayed as a default, select {EDIT} from the menu and
MENT
then select “ENABLE SPEED TAG” to delete “”.
• The position level can be set at the same time that the
move instruction is registered.
SUPPLE-
MENT • To display the position level tag as a default, select {EDIT}
from the menu and then select “ENABLE POS LEVEL
TAG”.
Position Level: The position level is the degree of approximation of the

manipulator to a taught position. 
The position level can be added to move instructions MOVJ (joint
interpolation) and MOVL (linear interpolation). 
If the position level is not set, the precision depends on the operation
speed. Setting an appropriate level moves the manipulator in a path
suitable to circumferential conditions and the workpiece.
3-14 97 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
DX100 3 Teaching
The relationship between path and accuracy for position levels is as

follows.
Position Levels Accuracy
Position level 0
P2 P3 0 Teaching position
1 Fine
Position level 1 to |
Position level 2 8 Rough
Position level 3
Position level 4
Positioning level 8
P1
 Setting the Position Level
1. Select move instruction.

– The DETAIL EDIT window appears.
2. Select the position level “UNUSED”.

– The selection dialog box appears.
3-15 98 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
DX100 3 Teaching
3. Select “PL”.
– The position level is displayed. The position initial value is 1.
4. Press [ENTER].
– To change the position level, select the level in the input buffer line,
type the value using the Numeric keys, and press [ENTER]. The
position level’s move instruction is registered.
5. Press [ENTER].
3-16 99 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
DX100 3 Teaching
For example, to perform the movement steps shown below, set as follows:
P1 P2 P4 P5
P3 P6
Steps P2, P4, and P5 are simple passing points, and do not require
accurate positioning. Adding PL=1 to 8 to the move instructions of these
steps moves the manipulator around the inner corners, thereby reducing
the cycle time.
If complete positioning is necessary as P3 or P6, add PL=0.
<EXAMPLE>
Passing points P2, P4, and P5:
MOVL V=138 PL=3
Positioning point P3 and P6:
MOVL V=138 PL=0
3-17 100 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
DX100 3 Teaching
3.2.3.2 Registering Reference Point Instructions

Reference point instructions (REFP) set an auxiliary point such as a wall
point for weaving. Reference point Nos. 1 to 8 are assigned for each
application. Follow these procedures to register reference point
instructions.
2. Select {JOB}.
3. Move the cursor.
– Move the cursor to the line immediately before the position where
the reference point to be registered.
Place immediately
before where
reference point is
to be registered.
4. Grip the Enable switch.

– The servo power is turned ON.
5. Press the axis operation key.
– Move the manipulator to the position to be registered as the
reference point.
6. Press [REFP] or select “REFP” from the inform list.
– The reference point instruction is displayed in the input buffer line.
7. Change the reference point number in one of the following ways.

– Move the cursor to the reference point number, and press [SHIFT] +
the cursor key to change the reference point number; or
– Press [SELECT] when the cursor is on the reference point number.

Then, the data input buffer line appears. Input the number and
press [ENTER].
8. Press [INSERT].
– The [INSERT] key lamp lights. 
When registering before the END instruction, pressing [INSERT] is
not needed.
9. Press [ENTER].
– The REFP instruction is registered.
Reference point
is registered.
The programming pendant does not have the [REFP] key for
SUPPLE- the application of spot welding, motor gun, and of material
MENT
handling, assembling, and cutting.
3-18 101 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
DX100 3 Teaching
3.2.3.3 Registering Timer Instructions

The timer instruction stops the manipulator for a specified time. Follow
these procedures to register timer instructions.

2. Select {JOB}.
3. Move the cursor.
– Move the cursor to one line before the position where the timer
instruction is to be registered.
One line before
where timer
instruction is
to be registered.
4. Press [TIMER].
– The TIMER instruction is displayed on the input buffer line.
5. Change the timer value.

– Move the cursor to the timer value and change it by pressing
[SHIFT] + the cursor key. The timer unit of adjustment is 0.01
seconds.
– If you use the Numeric keys to input the timer value, press
[SELECT] when the cursor is on the timer value. The data input line
appears. Input the value and press [ENTER].
6. Press [INSERT].
– The [INSERT] key lamp lights.
– When registering before the END instruction, pressing [INSERT] is
not needed.
7. Press [ENTER].
– The TIMER instruction is registered.
3-19 102 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
DX100 3 Teaching
 Changing Timer Value

1. Press [TIMER].
2. Press [SELECT].
– The DETAIL EDIT window for the TIMER instruction appears.
3. Input the timer value on the instruction DETAIL EDIT window.
(1) When is selected, the items available to be changed are dis-

played in the dialog box.
(2) Select the particular item to be changed.

– When a number is to be changed, move the cursor to the number
and press [SELECT]. Input the desired value using the Numeric
keys, and press [ENTER].
4. Press [ENTER].
– The DETAIL EDIT window is closed and the JOB CONTENT window
appears again. Modified content is displayed in the input buffer line.
3-20 103 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
DX100 3 Teaching
5. Press [INSERT].
– The [INSERT] key lamp lights.
– When registering before the END instruction, pressing [INSERT] is
not needed.
6. Press [ENTER].
– The TIMER instruction is registered.
3-21 104 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
DX100 3 Teaching
3.2.4 Overlapping the First and Last Steps
Why is overlapping the first and last step necessary?


Assume that the job shown below is to be repeated. The
manipulator moves from the last step (Step 6) to the first
step (Step 1). If Step 6 and Step 1 are the same position, the
manipulator moves directly Step 5 to Step 1, thereby
improving work efficiency.
Step 6
SUPPLE-
MENT Step 6 after
change
Step 5
Step 1
The position of step 6 is
changed to overlap with
step 1.
Step 2 Step 4
Step 3
1. Move the cursor to the first step line.

2. Press [FWD].
– The manipulator moves to the first step position.
3. Move the cursor to the last step line.
– The cursor starts blinking.
– When the cursor line position and the manipulator position are
different in the JOB CONTENT window, the cursor blinks.
4. Press [MODIFY].
– The key lamp lights.
5. Press [ENTER].
– The position data for the first step is registered on the line of the last
step.
– At this time, only the position data can be changed in the last step.
Interpolation type and play speed do not change.
3-22 105 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
DX100 3 Teaching
3.3 Checking Steps
3.3 Checking Steps
3.3.1 FWD/BWD Key Operations

Check whether the position of the taught steps is appropriate using [FWD]
or [BWD] on the programming pendant. Each time [FWD] or [BWD] is
pressed, the manipulator moves by a single step.
[FWD]: Moves the manipulator ahead in step number sequence. 
Only the move instruction is executed when [FWD] is pressed.
[INTERLOCK] + [FWD]: All instructions are executed alternately.
[BWD]: Moves the manipulator backward a step at a time in reverse step 
number sequence. Only the move instruction is executed.
NOTE For safety, set manual speed at or below.
1. Move the cursor to the step to be checked.

2. Press [FWD] or [BWD].
– The manipulator reaches the following / previous step and stops.
3-23 106 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
DX100 3 Teaching
3.3 Checking Steps
3.3.1.1 Precautions When Using FWD / BWD Operations
 FWD Movements
• The manipulator moves in step number sequence. Only move
instructions are executed when [FWD] is pressed. To execute all
instructions, press [INTERLOCK] + [FWD].
• The manipulator stops after playing a single cycle. It does not move
after the END instruction is reached, even if [FWD] is pressed.
However, at the end of a called job, the manipulator moves the
instruction next to the CALL instruction.
Called Jobs
Step 4
Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 (RET instruction)
(END instruction)
Manipulator stops.
Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Step 6 Step 7

(CALL instruction) (END instruction)
 BWD Movements
• The manipulator moves in reverse step number sequence. Only
move instructions are executed.
• The manipulator does not move after the first step is reached, even if
[BWD] is pressed. However, at the beginning of a called job, the
manipulator moves to the instruction immediately before the CALL
instruction.
Called Jobs
Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5
Manipulator stops.
Step 1 Step 2 Step 3

(CALL instruction)
 Circular Movements with FWD/BWD Key Operations

• The manipulator moves in a straight line to the first step of the
circular interpolation.
• There must be three circular interpolation steps in a row to move the
manipulator in an arc.
• If [FWD] or [BWD] operation is restarted after being stopped to move
the cursor or to perform search, the manipulator moves in a straight
line to the next step.
• If [FWD] or [BWD] operation is restarted after being stopped to move
the axis as shown below, the manipulator moves in a straight line to
P2, the next circular interpolation. Circular motion is restored from
P2 to P3.
Moves with linear interpolation.
: Motion path for FWD/BWD key operation

P2 : Motion using axis keys
: Motion path during playback
P1 P3
3-24 107 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
DX100 3 Teaching
3.3 Checking Steps
 Spline Curve Movements with FWD/BWD Operations

• The manipulator moves in a straight line to the first step of spline
interpolation.
• There must be three spline curve motion steps in a row to perform a
spline curve operation.
• Depending on the position where the [FWD] / [BWD] operation is
performed, the alarm “IRREGULAR DISTANCES BETWEEN
TEACHING POINTS” may occur.
• Note that FWD/BWD inching operations change the path of the
manipulator and caution is therefore required. Performing
these operations also increases the likelihood that the “IRREGULAR
DISTANCES BETWEEN TEACHING POINTS” will occur.
• If the [FWD] or [BWD] operation is restarted after being stopped to
move the cursor or perform a search, the manipulator moves in a
straight line to the next step.
• If the [FWD] or [BWD] operation is restarted after being stopped to
move the axis as shown below, the manipulator moves in a straight
line to P2, the next spline curve motion step. Spline curve motion is
restored from P2 onward. However, the path followed between P2
and P3 is somewhat different from the path followed at playback.
Linear motion
P2 : Motion path for FWD/BWD key operation

: Motion using axis keys
: Motion path during playback
P1
P3
• If the manipulator is moved to P3 with [FWD], stopped, and then

returned to P2 with [BWD], the path followed between P2 and P3 is
different for each of the following: the first FWD operation, the BWD
operation, and the consequent FWD operation.
P2
P4
P1
P3
3-25 108 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
DX100 3 Teaching
3.3 Checking Steps
3.3.1.2 Selecting Manual Speed

When [FWD] or [BWD] is pressed, the manipulator moves at the
manual speed selected at that time. Selected manual speed can
be checked by the manual speed indication on the programming
pendant.
Manual speed is set with [FAST] and [SLOW]. FWD operation can be
performed at a high speed by pressing [HIGH SPEED]. Follow these
procedures to select a manual speed.
• Each time [FAST] is pressed, the speed switches in the order of
“INCH””SLOW””MED””FAST”. 
FAST INCH SLW MED FST
• Each time [SLOW] is pressed, the speed switches in the order of

“FAST”“MED”“SLOW”“INCH”. 
SLOW FST MED SLW INCH 
• FWD/BWD operation is performed with SLW speed even if

NOTE INCH is selected.
• [HIGH SPEED] is available only for the FWD operation but
not for BWD operation.
3-26 109 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
DX100 3 Teaching
3.3 Checking Steps
3.3.1.3 Moving to Reference Point

To check the position of a taught reference point, follow these procedures
to move the manipulator to the reference point.
1. Move the cursor to the reference point instruction line to be checked.
2. Press [REFP] + [FWD].
– The manipulator moves to the reference point of the cursor line.
The programming pendant does not have the [REFP] key for
SUPPLE- the application of spot welding, general purposes (= material
MENT
handling, assembling, cutting) or motor gun.
3.3.1.4 Test Operations

Playback operations can be simulated in the teach mode with test
operations. This function is convenient for checking continuous paths and
operation instructions.
Test operation differs in the following ways from actual playback in the
play mode.
• Operation speeds greater than the maximum teaching

NOTE speed are reduced to the maximum teaching speed.
• Work instruction output, such as arc output, is not exe-
cuted.
Note that the motion path for the playback operation is replayed during the
test operation. Therefore, make sure that there is no obstacle around the
manipulator and great caution should be exercised when the test
operation is performed.
Motion Path for Test Operation
C
B
Motion Path for Playback Operation
Motion Path for Test Operation
Job Example
NOP
MOVJ VJ=50.0 A
A MOVL V=1500.0 B
MOVL V=1500.0 C
:
There may be a slight difference between the motion path

NOTE for the test operation and the motion path for the playback
operation due to a mechanical error or control delay, etc.
3-27 110 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
DX100 3 Teaching
3.3 Checking Steps
Test operation is performed by pressing [INTERLOCK] and [TEST

START]. For safety purposes, these keys will only function while the keys
are held down.
2. Press {JOB}.
– The test operation JOB CONTENT window appears.
3. Press [INTERLOCK] + [TEST START].
– The manipulator starts the test cycle operation.
– However, after the operation starts, the motion continues even if
[INTERLOCK] is released.
– The manipulator moves only while these keys are held down.
– The manipulator stops immediately when [TEST START] is
released.
Always check safety conditions before pressing

NOTE [INTERLOCK] + [TEST START] to start the manipulator in
motion.
3.3.1.5 Machine Lock Operation

When “MACHINE LOCK” is enabled, the [FWD] / [BWD] operation or the
test operation can be performed to check the status of input and output
without moving the manipulator.
1. Press [AREA].
2. Select {UTILITY}.
3. Select {SETUP SPECIAL RUN}.
– The SPECIAL TEACH window appears.
4. Select “MACHINE LOCK”.
– Press [SELECT] to switch “VALID” and “INVALID”.
• The setting of “MACHINE LOCK” is maintained even after

the mode is switched: If the machine lock is set to “VALID”
in the teach mode, it is still “VALID” after switching to the
play mode. 
The same applies when the mode is switched from the
play mode to the teach mode.
NOTE
• Note that the machine lock becomes “INVALID” if the
following operation is performed.
• Execution of “CANCEL ALL SELECT” in the SPECIAL
PLAY window.
• Turning off the main power.
3-28 111 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
DX100 3 Teaching
3.4 Modifying Steps
3.4 Modifying Steps
Begin move instruction Begin move instruction

insertion. deletion.
Move step cursor to Move cursor to location

location where you want of instruction to be
to insert the instruction. deleted.
Perform axis operations. Press [DELETE].
Set interpolation type. Press [ENTER].
Set play speed. Deletion completed.
Set position level when

necessary.
Press [INSERT].
Press [ENTER].
Insertion completed.
3-29 112 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
DX100 3 Teaching
3.4 Modifying Steps
Move step cursor to

step to be modified.
Modifying position data Modifying interpolation type
Move to position to be Perform axis

modified using the operations to position
axis operation keys. to be modified.
Press [MODIFY]. Delete MOV

instruction.
Press [ENTER]. Press [MOTION TYPE]

and select motion
type.
Modification
completed. Insert MOV
instruction.
Modification
completed.
NOTE It is not possible to change a move instruction to a

reference point instruction and vice versa.
3-30 113 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
DX100 3 Teaching
3.4 Modifying Steps
Begin REFP instruction

modification.
Deletions Modifications
Move step cursor to the Move step cursor to the

REFP instruction to be REFP instruction to be
deleted, and move the modified.
manipulator to the
position.
Perform axis operations.

Press [DELETE].
Press [REFP].
Press [ENTER].
Press [MODIFY].
Deletion completed.
Press [ENTER].
Modification completed.
3-31 114 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
DX100 3 Teaching
3.4 Modifying Steps
Begin TIMER Instruction

Modification.
Deletions Modifications
Move edit cursor to the Move edit cursor to the

TIMER instruction to be TIMER instruction to be
deleted. modified.
Press [DELETE]. Press [TIMER].
Press [ENTER]. Enter timer value.
Deletion completed. Press [MODIFY].
Press [ENTER].
Modification completed.
3-32 115 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
DX100 3 Teaching
3.4 Modifying Steps
3.4.1 Displaying the JOB CONTENT Window for Editing
3.4.1.1 Currently Called Up Job

2. Select {JOB}.
3.4.1.2 Calling Up Other Jobs
NOTE In any other than the teach mode, set the mode switch to
“TEACH”.

2. Select {SELECT JOB}.
– The JOB LIST window appears.
3. Select the job name to be called.
3-33 116 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
DX100 3 Teaching
3.4 Modifying Steps
3.4.2 Inserting Move Instructions
NOTE Move instructions cannot be inserted when the servo power

is OFF.
Step where move instruction is to be inserted
Path after insertion
Path before insertion
1. Move the cursor to the line immediately before the insert position.
The line immediately 0006 MOVL V=276
before where the 0007 TIMER T=1.00
move instruction 0008 DOUT OT#(1) ON
is to be added. 0009 MOVJ VJ=100.0

– Turn ON the servo power and press the axis operation key to move
the manipulator to the position to be inserted.
NOTE Confirm the move instruction on the input buffer line and set
desired interpolation type and play speed.
3. Press [INSERT].
– The key lamp will light.
NOTE When the inserting position is immediately before the END

instruction, pressing [INSERT] is not needed.
4. Press [ENTER].
– The move instruction is inserted after the cursor line.
0006 MOVL V=276
0007 TIMER T=1.00
0008 DOUT OT#(1) ON
The move instruction 0009 MOVL V=558
is added. 0010 MOVJ VJ=100.0
5. Press [ENTER].
– <Examples of Inserting a Move Instruction>
• When a move instruction is inserted in the following job, it is
placed on different lines according to the setting in the
3-34 117 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
DX100 3 Teaching
3.4 Modifying Steps
TEACHING CONDITION window.

Before inserting the move instruction
Cursor line 0006 MOVL V=276
0007 TIMER T=1.00
0008 DOUT OT#(1) ON
0009 MOVJ VJ=100.0
After the insertion: when inserting before the next step After the insertion: when inserting after the cursor line
0006 MOVL V=276 0006 MOVL V=276
0007 TIMER T=1.00 Added 0007 MOVL V=558
0008 DOUT OT#(1) ON instruction 0008 TIMER T=1.00
Added 0009 MOVL V=558 0009 DOUT OT#(1) ON
instruction 0010 MOVJ VJ=100.0 0010 MOVJ VJ=100.0
Positions where the move instructions are inserted.

The default location for insertions is “before the next step”,
NOTE but it is also possible to insert “after the cursor line”. This
setting is made in the “Move Instruction Register Method” in
the TEACHING CONDITION window.
3-35 118 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
DX100 3 Teaching
3.4 Modifying Steps
3.4.3 Deleting Move Instructions
Step where move instruction is to be deleted
Path before deletion
Path after deletion
1. Move the cursor to the move instruction to be deleted.

0003 MOVL V=138
Move instruction 0004 MOVL V=558
to be deleted 0005 MOVJ VJ=50.00
If the manipulator position differs from the cursor position on

the window, the cursor blinks. Stop the blinking by either of
the following procedures.
NOTE 1. Press [FWD] and move the manipulator to the position

where the move instruction is to be deleted.
2. Press [MODIFY] [ENTER] to change the position data
of the blinking cursor position to the current manipulator
position.
2. Press [DELETE].
– The key lamp will blink.
3. Press [ENTER].
– The step indicated by cursor line is deleted.
0003 MOVL V=138
0004 MOVJ VJ=50.00
3-36 119 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
DX100 3 Teaching
3.4 Modifying Steps
3.4.4 Modifying Move Instructions
3.4.4.1 Modifying Position Data

1. Move the cursor to the MOV instruction to be modified.
– Display the JOB CONTENT window and move the cursor to the
move instruction to be changed.
– Turn ON the servo power and press the axis operation key to move
the manipulator to the desired position.
3. Press [MODIFY].
4. Press [ENTER].
– The position data in the present position is registered.
SUPPLE-
For MOV instructions for which position variables have been
MENT set, the position variables will not be changed.
3.4.4.2 Modifying Interpolation Type
Modifying only interpolation type is impossible. The

NOTE interpolation type can be modified as a choice for modifying
the position data.
1. Move the cursor to the move instruction to be modified.

– Display the JOB CONTENT window, and move the cursor to the
move instruction for which interpolation type is to be changed.
2. Press [FWD].
– Turn ON the servo power and press [FWD] to move the manipulator
to the position of the move instruction.
3. Press [DELETE].
4. Press [ENTER].
– The cursor line step is deleted.
5. Press [MOTION TYPE].
– Press [MOTION TYPE] to change the interpolation type.
– Each time [MOTION TYPE] is pressed, the input buffer line
instruction alternates.
6. Press [INSERT].
7. Press [ENTER].
– The interpolation type and position data are changed at the same
time.
3-37 120 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
DX100 3 Teaching
3.4 Modifying Steps
3.4.5 Undo Operation

After inserting, deleting, or modifying an instruction, the operation can be
undone.
The UNDO operation becomes enabled by selecting {EDIT}{ENABLE
UNDO}, and becomes disabled by selecting {EDIT}{ENABLE UNDO}
while editing a job.
• The undo operation can be performed even after the

manipulator is moved by the FWD or BWD operation or
test operation after inserting, deleting, or modifying a
move instruction. However, the undo operation cannot be
NOTE performed if other instructions are edited or a job is
executed in the play mode after editing the move
instruction.
• The undo operation works only for the last five edited
instructions only.
1. Press [ASSIST].
– The assist menu appears.
UNDO
REDO
2. Select {UNDO}.
– The last operation is undone.
3. Select {REDO}.
– The last UNDO operation is undone.
3-38 121 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
DX100 3 Teaching
3.4 Modifying Steps
3.4.6 Modifying Reference Point Instructions
3.4.6.1 Deleting Reference Point Instructions
If the manipulator position differs from the cursor position,

an error message is displayed. If this occurs, follow either
of the procedures below.
NOTE • Press [REFP] + [FWD] to move the manipulator to the

position to be deleted.
• Press [MODIFY] then [ENTER] to change the reference
point position data to the current position of the
manipulator.
1. Move the cursor to the reference point instruction to be deleted.

2. Press [DELETE].
3. Press [ENTER].
– The reference point instruction at the cursor line is deleted.
3.4.6.2 Modifying Reference Point Instructions

1. Move the cursor to the reference point instruction to be modified.
2. Move the manipulator with the axis operation keys.
– Turn ON the servo power and use the axis operation keys to move
the manipulator to the desired position.
3. Press [REFP].
4. Press [MODIFY].
5. Press [ENTER].
– The reference point instruction at the cursor line is changed.
3-39 122 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
DX100 3 Teaching
3.4 Modifying Steps
3.4.7 Modifying Timer Instructions
3.4.7.1 Deleting Timer Instructions

1. Move the cursor to the timer instruction to be deleted.
0003 MOVJ VJ=50.00
Timer instruction 0004 TIMER T=1.00
to be deleted 0005 MOVL V=138
2. Press [DELETE].
3. Press [ENTER].
– The timer instruction at the cursor line is deleted.
0003 MOVJ VJ=50.00
0004 MOVL V=138
3.4.7.2 Modifying Timer Instructions

1. Move the cursor to the timer instruction to be modified.
0003 MOVJ VJ=50.00
0004 TIMER T=1.00
0005 MOVL VJ=138
2. Press [SELECT].
3. Move the cursor to the input buffer line timer value.
– Move the cursor to the input buffer line timer value and press
[SHIFT] + the cursor key to set the data.
– To use the Numeric keys to input data, move the cursor to the input
buffer line timer value and press [SELECT].
TIMER T=1.00
4. Change the timer value.

5. Press [MODIFY].
6. Press [ENTER].
– This key lamp will light.
3-40 123 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
DX100 3 Teaching
3.5 Modifying Jobs
3.5 Modifying Jobs
3.5.1 Calling Up a Job

3. Select the desired job.
3.5.2 Windows Related to Job

There are five types of job windows. Jobs can be checked and edited in
these windows.
• JOB HEADER Window

Comments, data and time of registration, edit prohibit status, and so
on are displayed and edited.
• JOB CONTENT Window
The content of the registered job can be displayed and edited.
• COMMAND POSITION Window
The taught data is displayed.
• JOB LIST Window
The registered job is sorted alphabetically, then displayed, and the
job is selected.
• JOB CAPACITY Window
The number of registered jobs, amount of memory, number of steps
used, etc. is shown.
3-41 124 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
DX100 3 Teaching
3.5 Modifying Jobs
3.5.3 JOB HEADER Window

2. Select {JOB}.
3. Select {DISPLAY} under the menu.
4. Select {JOB HEADER}.
– The JOB HEADER window appears. Scroll the window using the
cursor.
A
B
C
D
E, F
G
H
I
J
A. JOB NAME
Displays the name of the current job.
B. COMMENT
Displays the comments attached to the current job. This can be edited
in this window.
C. DATE
Displays the date and time of the last editing of the job.
D. CAPACITY
Displays the amount of memory that is being used to register this job.
E. LINES
Displays the total number of instructions registered in this job.
F. STEPS
Displays the total number of move instructions registered in this job.
G. EDIT LOCK
Displays whether the edit prohibit setting for this job is ON or OFF. This
can be changed in this window.
H. TO SAVE TO FD
Displays “DONE” if the contents of the job have already been saved to
an external memory after the date and time of the last editing operation,
and displays “NOT DONE” if they have not been saved. The job is
marked as “DONE” only if it is saved as an independent job or as a
related job. If it is saved in a CMOS batch operation, it is not marked as
“DONE”.
I. GROUP SET
Displays the control group that this job controls. If the master axis is
specified, the master axis is highlighted.
J. JOB KIND
Displays the kind of this job.
To return to the JOB CONTENT window from the JOB

SUPPLE- HEADER window, select {DISPLAY} from the menu and
MENT
then select {JOB CONTENT}.
3-42 125 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
DX100 3 Teaching
3.5 Modifying Jobs
3.5.4 JOB CONTENT Window

2. Select {JOB}.
–  (Left) : The cursor is moved to the address area.
–  (Right): The cursor is moved to the instruction area.
A B
A. Address Area
Displays the line numbers, the step numbers and the tool numbers
which are registered in the each step.
B. Instruction Area
Displays instructions, additional items, and comments. Line editing is
possible.
3-43 126 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
DX100 3 Teaching
3.5 Modifying Jobs
3.5.4.1 Switching the Address Area

Able to switch a state of the display (to hide or show) of the following
numbers in the address area.
• Step numbers
• Tool numbers in the each step
1. Select the {JOB} under the main menu.
2. Select {JOB CONTENT}.
– Job content appears.
3. Select {DISPLAY} in the menu area.
– A pull down menu appears.
4. Select {ENABLE STEP NO}.

– Step numbers appear in the address area.
– In the pull down menu, {ENABLE STEP NO} changes to 
{ ✻ ENABLE STEP NO}.
STEP NO.
3-44 127 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
DX100 3 Teaching
3.5 Modifying Jobs
5. Select { ✻ ENABLE STEP NO}.

– Step numbers in the address area disappear.
– In the pull down menu, { ✻ ENABLE STEP NO} changes to
{ENABLE STEP NO}.
6. Select {ENABLE TOOL NO}.

– Tool numbers appear in the address area.
– In the pull down menu, {ENABLE TOOL NO} changes to
{ ✻ ENABLE TOOL NO}.
Tool numbers only appear in the line during the move instruction and
also appear under the teach mode.
TOOL NO.
3-45 128 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
DX100 3 Teaching
3.5 Modifying Jobs
7. Select { ✻ ENABLE TOOL NO}.

– Step numbers in the address area disappear.
– In the pull down menu, { ✻ ENABLE TOOL NO} changes to 
{ENABLE TOOL NO}.
8. Select both {ENABLE STEP NO} and {ENABLE TOOL NO}.

– The both step numbers and tool numbers appear in the address
area.
– In the pull down menu, {ENABLE STEP NO} changes to 
{ ✻ ENABLE STEP NO}.
– In the pull down menu, {ENABLE TOOL NO} changes to 
{ ✻ ENABLE TOOL NO}.
Tool numbers only appear in the line during the move instruction and
also appear under the teach mode.
STEP NO.
TOOL NO.
3-46 129 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
DX100 3 Teaching
3.5 Modifying Jobs
9. Select both { ✻ ENABLE STEP NO} and { ✻ ENABLE TOOL NO}.

– The both step numbers and tool numbers disappear in the address
area.
– In the pull down menu, { ✻ ENABLE STEP NO} changes to 
{ENABLE STEP NO}.
– In the pull down menu, { ✻ ENABLE TOOL NO} changes to 
{ENABLE TOOL NO}.
3-47 130 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
DX100 3 Teaching
3.5 Modifying Jobs
3.5.5 COMMAND POSITION Window

1. Select {ROBOT} under the main menu.
2. Select {COMMAND POSITION}.
– Edit operations cannot be conducted on this window, but the taught
play speed and position data can be viewed on this window.
A B
C D
A. Interpolation
Displays the interpolation type.
B. Speed
Displays the play speed.
C. Command Position
Displays the tool file number and position data that has been taught for
this job. Steps which have no position data, such as move instructions
which use position variables, are marked with an asterisk (*).
D. Current Data
Displays the current tool file number and position of the manipulator.
3-48 131 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
DX100 3 Teaching
3.5 Modifying Jobs
3.5.6 JOB CAPACITY Window

2. Select {JOB CAPACITY}.
A
B
A. NUMBER OF JOBS
Displays the total number of jobs currently registered in the memory of
DX100.
B. USED MEMORY
Displays the total amount of memory used in the DX100.
C. STEPS
Displays the total number of used steps.
D. EDITING BUFFER
Displays editing buffer use.
3-49 132 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
DX100 3 Teaching
3.6 Editing Instructions

The editable content differs depending on whether the cursor is in the
address area or instruction area.
A
B
A. When the cursor is in the address area

Instructions can be inserted, deleted, or modified.
B. When the cursor is in the instruction area
The data of additional items of already-registered instructions can be
modified, inserted, or deleted.
Editing only additional items is called “line editing”.
When inserting or modifying instructions, input the instruction with the

function keys such as [TIMER], etc. or by using the instruction list dialog
box.
The selected instruction is displayed on the input buffer line with the same
additional items as registered previously.
If the addition, deletion or modification of additional item is needed, edit on
the instruction DETAIL EDIT window. If it is not needed, continue the
registration process.
3-50 133 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
DX100 3 Teaching
3.6.1 Instruction Group

The instructions are divided into eight groups by processing or each work.
Display Instruction Group Content Example

IN/OUT I/O Instruction Controls input and output DOUT, WAIT
CONTROL Control Instruction Controls processing and each work JUMP, TIMER
MOTION Move Instructions Moves the manipulator MOVJ, REFP
DEVICE Work Instructions Operates arc welding, spot welding, handling, ARCON, WVON,
painting, etc. SVSPOT, SPYON
ARITH Operating Performs arithmetic calculation ADD, SET
Instructions
SHIFT Shift Instructions Shifts the teaching point SFTON, SFTOF
SENS (Option) Sensor Instructions Instructions related to the sensor COMARCON
(Option)
OTHER Other Instructions Instructions for functions other than above SHCKSET
SAME - Specifies the instruction where the cursor is.
PRIOR - Specifies the previously-registered instruction.
 Instruction List
INFORM
By pressing [INFORM LIST] LIST , the instruction group list dialog box
appears.
By selecting a group, the instruction list dialog box of the selected group
appears.
3-51 134 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
DX100 3 Teaching
3.6.2 Inserting Instructions

1. Move the cursor to the address area in the JOB CONTENT window.
– Move the cursor to the line immediately before where the instruction
is to be inserted, in the teach mode.
Line before
where instruction
is to be added.
2. Press [INFORM LIST].

– The INFORM command list appears, and an underline is displayed
beneath the line number in the address area.
3. Select the instruction group.

– The instruction list dialog box appears. The selected instruction is
displayed on the input buffer line with the same additional items as
registered previously.
4. Select the instruction.

5. Change the data of additional items or variables as required.
– <When Nothing is to be Changed>
(1) Proceed to Step 6.
3-52 135 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
DX100 3 Teaching
– <When Additional Items are to be edited>

1. Changing numeric data
(1) Move the cursor to the desired item and press [SHIFT] + the cur-
sor key to increase or decrease the value.
(2) To directly input the value using Numeric keys, press [SELECT] to
display the input buffer line.
(3) Type the value and press [ENTER]. The value on the input buffer
line is changed.
2. Adding, modifying, or deleting an additional item
(1) To add, modify, or delete an additional item, move the cursor to the
instruction on the input buffer line and press [SELECT]. The
DETAIL EDIT window appears.
– To add an item, move the cursor to “UNUSED” and press [SELECT].

The selection dialog box appears.
(2) Move the cursor to the desired item and press [SELECT]. 
To delete an item, move the cursor to the item to be deleted and
select “UNUSED”.
3-53 136 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
DX100 3 Teaching
3. Changing the data type

(1) To change the data type of an additional item, move the cursor to
of the item and press [SELECT]. The data type list appears.
Select the desired data type.
(2) After additional items have been added, modified or deleted as

required, press [ENTER]. The DETAIL EDIT window closes and
the JOB CONTENT window appears.
6. Press [INSERT] and [ENTER].
– The instruction displayed in the input buffer line is inserted.
3-54 137 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
DX100 3 Teaching
3.6.3 Deleting Instructions

– Move the cursor to the instruction line to be deleted, in the teach
mode.
The line to be
deleted
2. Move the cursor to the deleting line in the address area.

3. Press [DELETE] and [ENTER].
– The instruction is deleted and the following lines move up.
The following
lines move up.
3.6.4 Modifying Instructions

– Move the cursor to the instruction line to be modified, in the teach
mode.
Instruction line
to be changed

– The INFORM command list appears and the cursor moves to the
INFORM command list.
3. Select the instruction group.

– The instruction list dialog box appears. The selected instruction is
displayed on the input buffer line with the same additional items as
registered previously.
3-55 138 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
DX100 3 Teaching
4. Move the cursor key to the instruction to be modified and press

[SELECT].
5. Change the data of additional items or variables as required.
– <Editing Additional Items>
1. Changing numeric data
(1) Move the cursor to the desired item and press [SHIFT] + the 
cursor key to increase or decrease the value.
– To directly input the value using Numeric keys, press [SELECT] to

display the input buffer line for the numeric values.
(2) Type the value and press [ENTER]. The value on the input buffer
line is changed.
2. Adding, modifying, or deleting an item
(1) To add, modify or delete an additional item, move the cursor to the
instruction on the input buffer line and press [SELECT]. The
(2) To add an item, move the cursor to “UNUSED” and press

[SELECT]. The selection dialog box appears.
3-56 139 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
DX100 3 Teaching
(3) Move the cursor to the desired item and press [SELECT]. 
To delete an item, move the cursor to the item to be deleted and
select “UNUSED”.
3. Changing the data type

(1) To change the data type of an additional item, move the cursor to
of the item and press [SELECT]. The data type list appears.
Select the desired data type.
(2) After additional items have been added, modified or deleted as

required, press [ENTER]. The DETAIL EDIT window closes and
the JOB CONTENT window appears.
6. Press [MODIFY] and [ENTER].
3-57 140 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
DX100 3 Teaching
– The instruction is modified to the instruction displayed in the input

buffer line.
3-58 141 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
DX100 3 Teaching
3.6.5 Modifying Additional Numeric Data

1. Move the cursor to the instruction area in the JOB CONTENT window.
– Move the cursor to the instruction area if it is in the address area.
– Press [SELECT] to change the mode to line editing mode.
2. Select the line where the number data is to be modified.
– The selected line can now be edited.
Number data
to be modified
3. Move the cursor to the numeric data to be modified.

4. Input the desired number.
– Press [SHIFT] + the cursor key to increase or decrease the value.
To directly input the number, press [SELECT]. The input buffer line
appears. Type the number and press [ENTER].
5. Press [ENTER].
– The numeric data is modified.
Instruction line
for which
numeric data
was changed.
3-59 142 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
DX100 3 Teaching
3.6.6 Modifying Additional Items

2. Select the instruction line for which the additional item is to be
modified.
– Move the cursor to the instruction area if it is in the address area
Instruction line for
which additional
item is to be modified.

– Move the cursor key to a instruction, the press [SELECT] to display
DETAIL EDIT window.
4. Select the additional item to be modified.

5. Select the desired additional item.

– The modified additional item is displayed on the DETAIL EDIT
window.
6. Press [ENTER].
– The DETAIL EDIT window closes, and the JOB CONTENT window
appears.
7. Press [ENTER].
– Contents of the input buffer line are registered on the cursor line of
the instruction area.
Instruction line
for which additional
item was modified.
3-60 143 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
DX100 3 Teaching
3.6.7 Inserting Additional Items

2. Select the instruction line for which the additional item is to be
inserted.
– The selected line can now be edited.
Instruction line
for which additional
item is to be added.

– Move the cursor key to [SELECT] and press, then DETAIL EDIT
window appears.
4. Select the additional item to be inserted on DETAIL EDIT window.

5. Select inserting additional item.

– The item to be added appears.
– When the additional item needs the numeric data, move the cursor
to the number and press [SELECT]. The input buffer line appears.
Type the number and press [ENTER].
3-61 144 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
DX100 3 Teaching
6. Press [ENTER].
– DETAIL EDIT window closes and JOB CONTENT window appears.
7. Press [ENTER].
which additional
item was added.
3-62 145 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
DX100 3 Teaching
3.6.8 Deleting Additional Items
NOTE This operation cannot be used for the additional item which
is locked.
2. Select the line where the additional item is to be deleted.
– Move the cursor to the instruction area when it is in the address
area.
which additional
item is to be deleted.

– Move the cursor to the instruction and press [SELECT], then
4. Select the additional item to be deleted.

5. Select “UNUSED”.
– “UNUSED” is displayed ton the DETAIL EDIT window.
6. Press [ENTER].
– The DETAIL EDIT window closes, and the JOB CONTENT window
appears.
7. Press [ENTER].
which the additional
item was deleted.
3-63 146 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
DX100 3 Teaching
3.7 Editing Jobs
3.7 Editing Jobs

The following five operations are to edit jobs.
Copy :Copies a specified range to the buffer.
Cut :Copies a specified range from a job to the buffer, and deletes
it in a job.
Paste :Inserts the contents of the buffer into a job.
Reverse Paste :Reverses the order of the contents of the buffer, and inserts
them into a job. 
(Refer to the following figure.)
Base Reverse :Reverses the order of the contents of the buffer and adjusts
Paste the to-and-from speeds same, and inserts them into a job. 
(Refer to the following figure.)
V=100 V=50 2
V=80
:
MOVL V=100 ;Move to at V=100
MOVL V=50 ;Move to t V= 50 1 V=30
MOVL V=30 ;Move to t V=30
MOVL V=70 ;Move to at V=30 4
:
V=70
Excute Reverse Paste

5
: 2
MOVL V=100 ;Move to at V=100 V=100 V=50 V=80
MOVL V=50 ;Move to t V= 50 V=?? 3
MOVL V=80 ;Move to at V=80 V=100 V=50
V=30
MOVL V=30 ;Move to at V=30 1
MOVL V=70 ;Move to t V=70 V=80
The speed and interpolation are 4
MOVL V=50 ;Move to at V= 50 different going and returning.
: V=30
V=70
5
Execute Base Reverse Paste
: 2
;Move to at V=100 V=100 V=50 V=80
MOVL V=100 3
MOVL V=50 ;Move to t V= 50
MOVL V=80 ;Move to at V=80 V=50 V=80
1
V=30
MOVL V=70 ;Move to t V=70 V=30
MOVL V=70 ;Move to at V=70 The speed and interpolation are 4
MOVL V=30 ;Move to at V=30 the same going and returning.
MOVL V=80 ;Move to at V= 80
: V=70 V=70
3-64 147 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
DX100 3 Teaching
3.7 Editing Jobs
0000 NOP
MOVJ VJ=50.00 0001 ’TEST JOB
Copy 0002 MOVJ VJ=50.00
TIMER T=1.00
MOVL V=100 Cut 0003 TIMER T=1.00
0004 MOVL V=100
0005 MOVL V=100
0000 NOP
0001 ’TEST JOB
0005 MOVL V=100
0000 NOP
0001 ’TEST JOB
Paste 0002 MOVJ VJ=50.00
0003 TIMER T=1.00
The buffer content is inserted. 0004 MOVL V=100
0005 MOVL V=100
0000 NOP
0001 ’TEST JOB
Reverse paste 0002 MOVL V=100
0003 TIMER T=1.00
Buffer content order is reversed and inserted. 0004 MOVJ VJ=50.00
0005 MOVL V=100
3-65 148 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
DX100 3 Teaching
3.7 Editing Jobs
3.7.1 Selecting the Range

After setting the range, Copy and Delete can be performed.
Move the cursor to

instruction area.
2. Move the cursor to the start line and press [SHIFT] + [SELECT].
– The range specification begins, and the address is displayed in
reverse.
Start line
3. Move the cursor to the end line.

– The range is varied by moving the cursor. Up to the line specified by
the cursor is the range.
End line
3-66 149 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
DX100 3 Teaching
3.7 Editing Jobs
3.7.2 Copying
Before copying, the range to be copied has to be specified.
1. Select {EDIT} under the menu.
– The pull-down menu appears.
2. Select {COPY}.
– The specified range is copied to the buffer.
3.7.3 Cutting
Before cutting, the range to be cut has to be specified.
2. Select {CUT}.
– The confirmation dialog box appears. When “YES” is selected, the
specified range is deleted and copied to the buffer.
– When “NO” is selected, the cutting operation is canceled.
3-67 150 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
DX100 3 Teaching
3.7 Editing Jobs
3.7.4 Pasting
Before pasting, the range to be pasted has to be stored in the buffer.
1. Move the cursor to the line immediately before the desired position in
the JOB CONTENT window.

3. Select {PASTE}.
– The confirmation dialog box appears.
– When “YES” is selected, the contents of the buffer are inserted to
the job.
– When “NO” is selected, the pasting operation is canceled.
3-68 151 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
DX100 3 Teaching
3.7 Editing Jobs
3.7.5 Reverse Pasting

Before pasting, the range to be pasted has to be stored in the buffer.
1. Move the cursor to the line immediately before the desired position in
3. Select {REVERSE PASTE}.

– When “YES” is selected, the contents of the buffer are reverse
pasted to the job.
– When “NO” is selected, the reverse-pasting operation is canceled.
3-69 152 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
DX100 3 Teaching
3.8 Test Operations
3.8 Test Operations

Playback operations can be simulated in the teach mode with test
operations. This function is convenient for checking continuous paths and
operation instructions.
Test operation differs in the following ways from actual playback in the
play mode.
• Operation speeds greater than the maximum teaching

speed are reduced to the maximum teaching speed.
NOTE • Only machine lock is available among special operations

for playback in the play mode.
• Work instruction output, such as arc output, is not
executed.
3.8.1 Test Operation Procedures

Test operation is performed by pressing [INTERLOCK] and [TEST
START]. For safety purposes, these keys will only function while the keys
are held down.
2. Press {JOB}.
– The test operation JOB CONTENT window appears.
3. Press [INTERLOCK] + [TEST START].
– The manipulator starts the test cycle operation.
– The manipulator moves only while these keys are held down.
However, after the operation starts, the motion continues even if
[INTERLOCK] is released.
– The manipulator stops immediately when [TEST START] is
released.
NOTE Always check safety conditions before starting the

manipulator in motion.
3-70 153 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
DX100 3 Teaching
3.9 Other Job-editing Functions
3.9.1 Editing Play Speed

There are two ways to modify play speed:
• Modification of Speed Type
• Relative Modification
3.9.1.1 Modification of Speed Type

This method is used to modify the speed type (such as VJ, V, VR, etc.)
0005 MOVJ VJ=25.00
0006 MOVL V=138
0007 MOVJ VJ=50.00
Only VJ is changed to 100.
0005 MOVJ VJ=100.00

0006 MOVL V=138
0007 MOVJ VJ=100.00
Type of  Explanation
Play Speed
VJ Joint Speed Normal robot axes
V TCP Speed
VR Posture Angle Speed
VE Base Axis Speed
3.9.1.2 Relative Modification

All steps are selected regardless of the play speed type. This method is
used to change all steps by a specified percentage (1% to 200%). This is
called relative modification.
0005 MOVJ VJ=25.00
0006 MOVL V=138
0007 MOVJ VJ=50.00
Speed is doubled.
0005 MOVJ VJ=50.00

0006 MOVL V=276
0007 MOVJ VJ=100.00
The speed of the entire job or specified section can be changed.

2. Select {JOB}.
3. Move the cursor to the instruction area.
4. Press [SHIFT] + [SELECT] in the speed modify start line.
– If the section is not specified, the speed of the entire job will be
changed.
– Move the cursor to the end line. The line numbers of the selected
lines are highlighted.
3-71 154 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
DX100 3 Teaching

6. Select {CHANGE SPEED}.
– The SPEED MODIFICATION window appears.
A
B
C
D
E
7. Set desired items.

A. START LINE NO.
Displays the first line number of the section to be modified.
B. END LINE NO.
Displays the last line number of the section to be modified.
C. MODIFICATION TYPE
Selects the confirmation before changing: “CONFIRM” or “NO
CONFIRM”. 
Each time [SELECT] is pressed when the cursor is on this item, the
setting alternates between “CONFIRM” and “NO CONFIRM”.
D. SPEED KIND
Selects the speed type. 
When [SELECT] is pressed when the cursor is on this item, selection
dialog box appears. Select the speed type to be changed.
E. SPEED
Specifies the speed value. 
When [SELECT] is pressed when the cursor is on this item, the mode
changes to the number input mode. Input the speed value and press
[ENTER].
8. Select “EXECUTE”.
– The speed begins to change.
– If “MODIFICATION TYPE” is set to “CONFIRM”, the confirmation
dialog box “Modifying speed” is displayed. Press [ENTER] to
change the speed on the first line and search for the next speed.
Press the UP/DOWN cursor button to keep the speed on the first
line and search for the next speed. To cancel the speed
modification, press [CANCEL].
– If “MODIFICATION TYPE” is set to “NOT CONFIRM”, all the speeds
of the specified section are changed.
3-72 155 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
DX100 3 Teaching
3.9.1.3 Modification by TRT (Traverse Time)

Modifications made by TRT have the following characteristics:
• By setting the time required to execute a move instruction (moving
time) to a desired value, the speeds can be modified.
• It is possible to measure the moving time without actually moving the
manipulator.
For example, when the movement from lines 5 through 20 currently

requires 34 seconds, and you want to reduce it to 15 seconds or extend it
to 50 seconds, this function is used.
2. Select {JOB}.
4. Press [SHIFT] + [SELECT] in the weaving time measure start line.
– Move the cursor to the end line. The line numbers of the selected
lines are highlighted.
6. Select {TRT}.
– The TRT window appears.
A
B
C
D
7. Set the desired items.

A. START LINE NO.
Displays the first line number of the section to be measured and
modified.
B. END LINE NO.
Displays the last line number of the section to be measured and
modified.
C. MOVING TIME
The weaving time needed to move from the first number to last number
is measured and displayed.
D. SETTING TIME
Set the desired weaving time. 
When [SELECT] is pressed when the cursor is on this item, the input
buffer line appears. Input the desired weaving time and press [ENTER].
3-73 156 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
DX100 3 Teaching
– The speed is changed according to the setting.
• If instructions that include specific speed data such as

SPEED or ARCON instructions (including speed data of
the welding condition file) exist in the specified section, the
speed data for those steps are not changed. Therefore, in
such cases, the set time and the actual time required are
NOTE not same.
• If the speed data is limited by the maximum value, the
following message is displayed.
!Limited to maximum speed
3-74 157 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
DX100 3 Teaching
3.9.2 Editing Interpolation Type

2. Select {JOB}.
4. Select the line to be modified.
– The instruction on the cursor is displayed in the input buffer line.
5. Press [SHIFT] + the cursor key simultaneously.

– The interpolation type in the input buffer line changes.
– The modification of the speed according to the modification of the
interpolation type is calculated by the ratio to maximum speed at
each speed.
– Joint Speed: MAX=100.0% 
Linear Speed: MAX=9000cm/min 
(e.g.) 
Joint Speed: 50% = Linear Speed: 4500cm/min 
Linear Speed: 10% = Linear Speed: 900cm/min
6. Press [ENTER].
– The instruction on the cursor line is replaced with one on the input
buffer line.
3-75 158 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
DX100 3 Teaching
3.9.3 Editing Condition Files

Condition files are prepared in order to set the conditions for the
manipulator to execute instructions.
Multiple condition files are provided for each application. More than one
pattern can be set up in each condition file. The patterns are listed by
“condition numbers”. This number is specified by the work instruction in a
job.
Refer to DX100 Operator’s Manual of each application for

NOTE information regarding the contents and editing methods of
the condition file.
Condition Files
Application A Application B Application C
Condition Condition Condition

Condition Condition Condition
Number 1 Condition Number 1 Number 1 Condition
Number 2 Number 2 Number 2 Condition
Number 3 Number 3
Number 4
3-76 159 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
DX100 3 Teaching
3.9.4 User Variables

User variables are used for jobs to store counters, calculation results or
input signals. Since the same user variable can be used in multiple jobs,
save the numerical values as common references for the jobs and the
user variables are maintained even when the power is turned OFF.
User variables have the following applications:
• Controlling of the number of workpieces
• Controlling of the number of jobs
• Sending/receiving of information between jobs
The data formats for user variables are described in the following table:
Table 3-5: User Variables

Data Variable No. Functions
Format (pcs)
Byte Type B000 to B099  Range of storable values is from
(100) 0 to 255. 
Can store I/O status. 
Can perform logical operations
(AND, OR, etc.)
Integer 1000 to 1099 Range of storable values is from -
Type (100) 32768 to 32767.
Double D000 to D099 Range of storable values is from -
Precision (100) 2147483648 to 2147483647.
Integer
Type
Real Type R000 to R099 Range of storable values is from -
(100) 3.4E+38 to 3.4E38. 
Accuracy: 1.18E-38 < x  3.4E38
Character S000 to S099 Maximum storable number of
Type (100) characters is 16.
Position P000 to P127 Can store position data in pulse
Type (128) form or in XYZ form.
BP000 to BP127 XYZ type variable can be used as
(128) target position data for move
instructions, and as incremental
EX000 to EX127 values for parallel shift
(128) instructions.
3-77 160 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
DX100 3 Teaching
• Play Speed V: 
MOVL V=I000 
The variable I000 is used for speed V with this move
instruction. 
The unit for V is 0.1mm per second. 
For example, if I000 were set as 1000, the following would
be true: 
I000=1000  unit for V is 0.1mm/s  V=100.0mm/s 
Note that, depending on the unit being used, the value of
the variable and the value of the actual speed on occasion
might not match.
NOTE • Play Speed VJ: 

MOVL VJ=I000 
The unit for VJ is 0.01%. 
be true: 
I000=1000  unit for VJ is 0.01%  VJ=10.00%.
• Timer T: 
TIMER T=I000 
The unit for T is 0.01 seconds. 
be true: 
I000=1000  unit for T is 0.01 seconds  T=10.00
seconds.
3.9.4.1 Setting Byte, Integer, Double Precision Integer, and Real Type Variables
1. Select {VARIABLE} under the main menu.
– {BYTE}, {INTEGER}, {DOUBLE}, and {REAL} are displayed for the
sub menu.
2. Select desired variable type.
– The BYTE VARIABLE window appears. (Following is a case that
{BYTE} is selected.)
3-78 161 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
DX100 3 Teaching
3. Move the cursor to the desired variable No.

– When the desired variable number is not displayed, move the cursor
with either of the following operations.
• Move the cursor on the variable No. and press [SELECT]. Then
input the variable No. using the Numeric keys and press
[ENTER].
• Move the cursor to the menu area and select {EDIT} 
{SEARCH}. Then input the variable No. with the Numeric keys
and press [ENTER]
Cursor is moved
to desired variable
number.
4. Move the cursor to the data of the variable.

– The number can be directly typed.
5. Input the desired number.
6. Press [ENTER].
– Input value is set to the variable on the cursor position.
3-79 162 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
DX100 3 Teaching
3.9.4.2 Setting Character Type Variables

2. Select {STRING}.
– The STRING VARIABLE window appears.
3. Move the cursor to the desired variable No.

• Move the cursor on the variable No. and press [SELECT]. Then
input the variable No. using the Numeric keys and press [ENTER].
• Move the cursor to the menu area and select {EDIT}  {SEARCH}.
Then input the variable No. with the Numeric keys and press
[ENTER]
The cursor is
moved to
desired variable
number.
3-80 163 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
DX100 3 Teaching
4. Move the cursor to the data of the variable.

– The characters can be directly typed.
5. Input the desired characters.
– For information on character input operation, refer to section 1.2.6
“Character Input Operation” on page 1-18.
6. Press [ENTER].
– The input characters are set to the variable on the cursor position.
3-81 164 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
DX100 3 Teaching
3.9.4.3 Registering Variable Name

2. Select desired variable.
– Select any variable type from among byte type, integer type, double
precision integer type, real type, robot position type, base position
type, and station position type.
3. Move the cursor to desired variable number.
– If desired variable number is not displayed, move the cursor by
either of following operations.
• Select the variable number, input desired variable number and press
[ENTER]. The cursor moves to the variable number to be input.
• Move the cursor to the menu area and select {EDIT}{SEARCH}.
Input desired variable number and press [ENTER]. The cursor
moves to the variable number to be input.
4. Select “NAME”.
– The input buffer line appears.
SUPPLE-
Refer to section 1.2.6 “Character Input Operation” on page
MENT 1-18 for the character input operation.
5. Input name.
6. Press [ENTER].
– The variable name is registered.
3-82 165 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
DX100 3 Teaching
3.9.4.4 Displaying Position Variables

2. Select desired position variable type.
– The POSITION VARIABLE window of desired type among robot
type, base type, and station type appears.
3. Move to a page with the objective variable number.

GO BACK GO BACK
• Press the page key PAGE

or [SHIFT] + page key PAGE
.
• Press page button, then input the variable No. using the Numeric
keys and press [ENTER].
• Move the cursor to the menu area and select {EDIT}  {SEARCH}.
Then input the variable No. with the Numeric keys and press
[ENTER].
Move to desired
variable number
page.
3-83 166 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
DX100 3 Teaching
3.9.4.5 Setting Position Variables

The following table shows the types of position variables and setting
methods.
• The setting of position variables is done in the teach

mode.
NOTE
• Turn the servo power ON when setting the variables with
the axis keys.
Table 3-6: Types of Position Variables and Setting Method

Pxxx BPxxx EXxxx
Type (Robot) (Base) (Station)
Pulse Type XYZ Type Pulse Type XYZ Type Pulse Type
 Select coordinates
 from base, robot,
 user, tool.


 Z-axis
Setting Method
Using the numeric keys
45000
7 8 9
4 5 6
1 2 3
0 . -
X-axis Y-axis
Using the axis keys

X- X+ X- X+
S- S+ R- R+
Y- Y+ Y- Y+
L- L+ B- B+
Z- Z+ Z- Z+
U- U+ T- T+
E- E+ 8- 8+
3-84 167 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
DX100 3 Teaching
3.9.4.6 Setting Position Variables Using the Numeric Keys
 Pulse Type

– The desired variable window appears (robot, base, or station). (The
POSITION VARIABLE window is used for this example.)
3. Select the variable data type.

– If the position variable was set before, confirmation dialog box

appears for data clear. If “YES” is selected, the data is cleared.
4. Select {PULSE}.
5. Move the cursor to desired data to be input and press [SELECT].
6. Input the value.
7. Press [ENTER].
– The value is set in the cursor position.
3-85 168 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
DX100 3 Teaching
 XYZ Type

3. Select the variable data type.
4. Select desired coordinates except PULSE.

5. Move the cursor to desired data to be input and press [SELECT].
6. Input the value.
7. Press [ENTER].
– The value is set in the cursor position.
(1) Setting of “<TYPE>”

– Each time [SELECT] is pressed when the cursor is on the setting
data in the input buffer line, the settings alternate.
About “<TYPE>”
• It is not necessary to set a type if the position variable is to be used
for parallel shift operations.
• When the position variable is used with a move instruction such as
“MOVJ P001”, it is necessary to set a type. For details on types,
refer to section 3.9.4.10 “Manipulator Types” on page 3-89. 
Current Position Window (XYZ) shows the current setting of a type.
3-86 169 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
DX100 3 Teaching
3.9.4.7 Setting Position Variables Using the Axis Keys
 Pulse Type

– The desired variable window appears (robot, base, or station).
3. Press [SHIFT] + [ROBOT]. When you need an external axis position,
press [SHIFT]+[EX.AXIS].
(1) When there are two or more robot, base, or a station, specify the
axis with following operation.
• Robot
Each time [SHIFT] + [ROBOT] is pressed, the axis displayed on the
status line changes: 
R1  R2  ...  R8.
• Base or Station
Each time [SHIFT]+[EX.AXIS] is pressed, the axis displayed on the
B1 B2  ...  B8  S1  S2  ......  S24.
(2) Check the selected axis on the status line.
4. Move the manipulator with the axis keys.
– Move the manipulator or the external axis to the desired position to
be set to position variable.
5. Press [MODIFY].
6. Press [ENTER].
 XYZ Type

• Robot
R1  R2  ...  R8.
B1 B2  ...  B8  S1  S2  ......  S24.
3. Move the manipulator with the axis keys.
– Move the manipulator or the external axis to the desired position to
be set to position variable.
4. Press [MODIFY].
5. Press [ENTER].
3-87 170 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
DX100 3 Teaching
3.9.4.8 Deleting Data Set of Position Variables

3. Select {DATA} under the menu.
4. Select {CLEAR DATA}.

– The position variable data on the displayed page are deleted.
3.9.4.9 Checking Positions by Position Variables

• Robot
R1  R2  ...  R8.
B1 B2  ...  B8  S1  S2  ......  S24.
3. Press [FWD].
– Selected axis moves to the position specified by the variable.
The selected axis (manipulator, base, or station) moves

NOTE directly to the set variable position. 
Before pressing [FWD], check that the surrounding area is
safe.
3-88 171 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
DX100 3 Teaching
3.9.4.10 Manipulator Types

When the position data of the job data are described using the XYZ
format, several postures may be taken according to the manipulator’s
structure when moving it to the described position.
Although these postures have the same coordinates for TCP, they vary in
pulse for each axis.
Thus, the manipulator’s posture cannot be uniquely defined only by the
coordinate value, and it is necessary to specify the data other than the
coordinate value to define the manipulator’s posture.
This is called “Type”.
Type varies according to the manipulator model.
For the manipulator with seven axes, X, Y, Z, Rx, Ry, Rz, Re

and Type are used.
Re is an element to indicate the posture of the manipulator
with seven axes and does not change by the specified
coordinates.
The definition of Re is shown below.
NOTE
3-89 172 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
DX100 3 Teaching
3.9.5 Flip/No Flip

When the angle of B-axis is within (+) range (θB ≥ 0), it is called “Flip”,
and when within (-) range (θB < 0), “No Flip”.
3.9.6 R-axis Angle

This specifies whether the R-axis angle is less than ±180 or greater than
±180.
R < 180 R  180
0° 0°
360° -360°
-180° 180°
-180 < R  180 180 < R

R  -180
NOTE R is the angle when the R-axis home position is 0
3-90 173 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
DX100 3 Teaching
3.9.7 T-axis Angle

This specifies positions of the R-, B-, and T-axis. 
For manipulators with wrist axes (three axes), this specifies whether the 
T-axis angle is less than ±180 or greater than ±180.
T <180 T  180
0° 0°
360° -360°
-180° 180°
-180 < T 180 180 < T

T  -180
NOTE T is the angle when the T-axis home position is 0
3.9.8 Front/Back
This specifies where in the S-axis rotation center the B-axis rotation center
locates when viewing the L-axis and U-axis from the right-hand side.
When viewed from the right-hand side, the right of the S-axis rotation
center is called the front, and the left is called the back.
Right-hand side
(S-axis 0°)
3-91 174 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
DX100 3 Teaching
The diagram below shows the S-axis at 0and at 180. This is the
configuration when the L-axis and the U-axis are viewed from the right-
hand side.
 S-axis 0 S-axis 180
Back Front Front Back
For the manipulator with seven axes, this specifies where in the S-axis
rotation center the U-axis rotation center locates when viewing the L-axis
and U-axis from the right-hand side.
When viewed from the right-hand side, the right of the S-axis rotation
center is called the front, and the left is called the back.
Back Front
3-92 175 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
DX100 3 Teaching
3.9.9 Upper Arm/Lower Arm

This specifies a type comprised of L-axis and U-axis when the L-axis and
U-axis are viewed from the right-hand side.
Right-hand side
Upper Arm Lower Arm
3.9.10 S-axis Angle

This designation is required for the manipulators which have working
envelopes greater than ±180. 
This specifies whether the S-axis angle is less than ±180 or greater than
±180.
S<180 S  180
0° 0°
360° -360°
-180° 180°
-180 < S  180 180 < S

S  -180
NOTE S is the angle when the S-axis home position is 0
3-93 176 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
DX100 3 Teaching
3.9.11 Editing Local Variables

As well as user variables, local variables can be used for the storage of
counters, calculations, and input signals. The data format is the same as
that of user variables. As shown in the following table, the letter L is
affixed to the variable number to indicate a local variable.
Table 3-7: Local Variables
Data Format Variable No. Functions
Byte Type Range of storable values is
from 0 to 255. 
LB000 to
Can store I/O status. 
LB
Can perform logical opera-
tions (AND, OR, etc.)
Integer Type Ll000 to Range of storable values is
LI from -32768 to 32767.
Double Precision Range of storable values is
LD000 to
Integer Type from -2147483648 to
LD
2147483647.
Real Type Range of storable values is
LR000 to from -3.4E+38 to 3.4E+38 
LR Accuracy: 1.18E-38 < x 
3.4E+38
Character Type LS000 to Maximum storable number of
LS characters is 16.
Position Robot Axes LP000 to Can store position data in
Type LP pulse form or in XYZ form.
Base Axes LBP000 to XYZ type variables can be
LBP used as target position data
for move instructions, and as
Station Axes LEX000 to incremental values for parallel
LEX shift instructions.
Local variables differ from user variables in the following four ways:
• Used in One Job Only 
With user variables it is possible to define and use one variable in
multiple jobs, but local variables are used only in the job in which
they are defined, and cannot be read from other jobs. 
Accordingly, local variables do not affect other jobs, so it is possible
to define a variable number (such as LB001) separately in different
jobs, and use it in different ways in each of these jobs.
User Variable
B001
Job 1 Job 2 Job 3

Job 1 Job 2 Job 3 Local Variable Local Variable Local Variable
LB001 LB001 LB001
User Variables Local Variables
• Able to Use Any Number of Variables 

The number is set in the JOB HEADER window. When the number
is set, the area for the value is saved in memory.
3-94 177 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
DX100 3 Teaching
• Not Able to Display the Variable Contents 

To display the local variable contents, user variables are needed. 
For example, to view the contents of local variable LP000, save it
temporarily as user variable P001. Then execute the instruction
SET P001 LP000, and view the POSITION VARIABLE window for
P001.
• Enabled Only During the Execution of the Defined Job 

The contents of the local variables are enabled only during the
execution of the defined job. 
The local variable field is assured when the defined job is called
(when the job is executed by a CALL or JUMP instruction, or the job
is selected by the menu). Once the job is completed by the
execution of a RET, END, or JUMP instruction, the local variable
data that was set is disabled. However, if a job which uses local
variables itself calls a separate job, then is returned by use of a RET
instruction, the data that was present prior to the CALL instruction
remains in effect and can be used.
Precautions for Variables and Units

As was the case with user variables, note that, depending
NOTE on the value of the unit being used, the value of the variable
and the value of the actual speed or time an occasion might
not match. Refer to section 3.9.4 “User Variables” on page
3-77.
3-95 178 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
DX100 3 Teaching
3.9.11.1 Setting the Number of Local Variables

The number of local variables used in a job is set in the JOB HEADER
window. When the number of local variables is set, memory is allocated
for those variables.
Only when expanding the “INSTRUCTION LEVEL”, it is

NOTE possible to use local variables. Refer to section 8.12
“Instruction Level Setting” of “DX100 INSTRUCTIONS”
(RE-CTO-A215) for details on setting the language level.

2. Select {JOB}.
– The JOB HEADER window appears. Scroll the window using the
cursor.
5. Select the number of local variables to be set.

– The input buffer line appears.
3-96 179 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
DX100 3 Teaching
6. Input the number of variables.

7. Press [ENTER].
– The number of local variables are set.
3-97 180 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
DX100 3 Teaching
3.9.12 Search
When editing or checking, jobs and steps can be searched for. Search
can be done when the cursor is in either the address or instruction area on
2. Select {JOB}.
4. Select {SEARCH}.
5. Select the search type.
Search is an operation by which the cursor is moved to a specific step or

instruction in the edit job. The desired item can be instantly searched for
without using the cursor.
3-98 181 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
DX100 3 Teaching
3.9.12.1 Line Search

This function moves the cursor to the desired line number.
1. Select {EDIT], {SEARCH} and “LINE SEARCH”.
– The number can be entered.
2. Input desired line number.
3. Press [ENTER].
– The cursor is moved to the line number and the window appears.
3-99 182 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
DX100 3 Teaching
3.9.12.2 Step Search

This function moves the cursor to the desired step number (move
instruction).
1. Select {EDIT], {SEARCH} and “STEP SEARCH”.
2. Input desired step number.
3. Press [ENTER].
– The cursor is moved to the input step and the window appears.
3-100 183 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
DX100 3 Teaching
3.9.12.3 Label Search

This function searches for the desired label and the instruction using that
label.
1. Select {EDIT}, {SEARCH} and “LABEL SEARCH”.
– The characters can be entered.
2. Input desired label name.
– For information on character input operation, refer to section 1.2.6
“Character Input Operation” on page 1-18.
– At this time, search can be conducted by entering any one character
of the label. For example, to search for the “START” label, enter
only “S”, and the search can be done.
3. Press [ENTER].
– The cursor is moved to the desired label and the window appears.
3-101 184 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
DX100 3 Teaching
4. Use the cursor to continue search.

– While searching, forward search and backward search are possible
by pressing the cursor key.
– To end search, select {EDIT}  {END SEARCH} on the menu and
press [SELECT].
3-102 185 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
DX100 3 Teaching
3.9.12.4 Instruction Search

This function moves the cursor to a desired instruction.
1. Select {EDIT}, {SEARCH} and “INSTRUCTION SEARCH”.
– The INFORM command list appears.
2. Select desired instruction group.

3. Select desired instruction.
– The cursor is moved to the selected instruction and the window

appears.
3-103 186 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
DX100 3 Teaching

press [SELECT], or press [CANCEL].
3-104 187 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
DX100 3 Teaching
3.9.12.5 Tag Search

This function moves the cursor to the desired tag.
1. Select {EDIT}, {SEARCH} and “TAG SEARCH”.
– The instruction list dialog box appears.
2. Select desired instruction group.

3. Select desired instruction for which the tag is to be searched.
– The tag list dialog box for selected instruction appears.
3-105 188 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
DX100 3 Teaching
4. Select the desired tag.

– The cursor is moved to the selected tag and the window appears.

press [SELECT], or press [CANCEL].
3-106 189 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
DX100 4 Playback
4.1 Preparation for Playback
4 Playback
4.1.1 Selecting a Job

Playback is the act of executing a taught job. Before playback operation,
first call the job to be executed.
4.1.1.1 Calling a Job

4-1 190 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
DX100 4 Playback
4.1.1.2 Registering the Master Job

If a particular job is played back frequently, it is convenient to register that
job as a master job (master registration). A job registered as the master
job can be called more easily than the method described on the preceding
page.
Only one job can be registered as the master job.

NOTE Registering a master job automatically cancels the
previously registered master job.
Be sure to register a master job in the teach mode.

2. Select {MASTER JOB}.
– The MASTER JOB window appears.
3. Press [SELECT].
4-2 191 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
DX100 4 Playback
4. Select {CALL MASTER JOB}.

5. Select a job to be registered as a master job.

– The selected job is registered as the master job.
4-3 192 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
DX100 4 Playback
4.1.1.3 Calling the Master Job

This operation is to call a master job. The job can be called in the JOB
CONTENT window, PLAYBACK window, JOB SELECT window, or the
MASTER JOB window.
 Calling from the JOB CONTENT, PLAYBACK, JOB SELECT Window
1. Select {JOB} under the menu.

– The master job is called, and the JOB CONTENT window appears.
4-4 193 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
DX100 4 Playback
 Calling from the MASTER JOB Window

– The MASTER JOB window appears.
3. Press [SELECT].
4. Select {CALL MASTER JOB}.

– The master job is called, and the JOB CONTENT window (during
the teach mode), or the PLAYBACK window (during the play mode)
appears.
4-5 194 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
DX100 4 Playback
4.1.2 The PLAYBACK Window

When the mode switch on the programming pendant is switched to
“PLAY” while displaying the JOB CONTENT window, the PLAYBACK
window appears.
B
D
C, E
F
A. Job Content
The cursor moves according to the playback operation. The contents
are automatically scrolled as needed.
B. Override Speed Settings
Displayed when override speed setting is performed.
C.Cycle Time
Displays the operating time of the manipulator. Each time the
manipulator is started, the previous cycle time is reset, and a new
measurement begins. Either showing or hiding the cycle time display is
selectable.
D. Start No.
First step in the measurement. Measurement starts when the start
button lamp lights and the playback starts.
E. Motion Time
Displays the weaving time of the manipulator.
F. Playback Time
Displays the time from the beginning to the end of the measurement.
Measurement ends when the manipulator stops and the start button
lamp goes off.
4.1.2.1 Display of Cycle Time

Follow the procedure below to set whether or not to display the cycle time
on the PLAYBACK window.
2. Select {CYCLE TIME}.
– The cycle time is displayed.
– Repeat the same operation to hide the cycle time display.
4-6 195 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
DX100 4 Playback
4.1.2.2 Operation Cycle

There are three types of manipulator operation cycles:
• AUTO : Repeats a job continuously.

• 1 CYCLE : Executes a job once. If there is a called job during
execution, it is performed, after which the execution processing
returns to the original job.
• 1 STEP : Executes one step (instruction) at a time.
The operation cycle can be changed as follows:

1. Select {JOB} under the main menu, and then select {CYCLE}.
2. Select the operation cycle to be changed.
– The operation cycle is changed.
4-7 196 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
DX100 4 Playback
 Automatic Setting for Operation Cycle

Automatic setting of the operation cycle can be changed by the following
operation.
This can be done in the management mode only.
1. Select {SETUP} under the main menu.
2. Select {OPERATE COND}.
– The OPERATING CONDITION window appears. Use the cursor to
scroll the screen.
3. Select the desired operation.

“NONE” setting
The operation cycle is not changed when “NONE” is set.
SUPPLE-
MENT For example, if the setting is “CYCLE SWITCH IN PLAY
MODE = NONE”, the operation cycle is maintained even
after switching to the play mode.
4-8 197 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
DX100 4 Playback
4. Select a cycle.
– The operation cycle when switching modes is set.
4-9 198 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
DX100 4 Playback
4.2 Playback
4.2 Playback
4.2.1 Playback Operation
After checking to be sure there is no one near the

NOTE manipulator, start the playback operation by following the
procedures below.
Playback is the operation by which the taught job is played back. Follow
the procedures below to start the playback operation.
• Programming pendant (start button)

• Peripheral device (external start input)
Which is used to start playback is specified by the mode switch on the

Mode Switch on Programming Job is started up by

Pendant
[PLAY] [START] button on
programming pendant
[REMOTE] Peripheral device
For playback using the programming pendant, follow the procedures

below.
4.2.1.1 Selecting the Start Device

1. Set the mode switch on the programming pendant to “PLAY”.
– The remote mode is disabled and the play mode is enabled so the
machines are to be started up by the programming pendant.
4.2.1.2 Servo On
1. Press [Servo ON Ready].
– DX100 servo power is ON and the Servo ON lamp on the
programming pendant lights.
4.2.1.3 Start Operation

1. Press [START].
– The start button lamp lights and the manipulator begins operation.
4-10 199 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
DX100 4 Playback
4.2 Playback
4.2.2 Special Playback Operations

The following special operations can be performed during playback:
• Low speed operation

• Limited speed operation
• Dry run speed operation
• Machine lock operation
• Check mode operation
Two or more special operations can be performed at the same time. If

multiple operations are selected, the speed during playback is limited to
the speed of the slowest operation. Settings for special operations are
done in the SPECIAL PLAY window.
When the PLAYBACK window is displayed, move the cursor to the menu
area and select {UTILITY}  {SETUP SPECIAL RUN}. The SPECIAL
PLAY window appears.
4.2.2.1 Low Speed Operation

The manipulator moves at low speed during the first step after starting.
After the operation of this step, the manipulator stops regardless of the
selection of the operation cycle and then low speed operation is canceled.
Even if the manipulator is stopped its motion during the low speed
operation, the low speed status would not be canceled before it reaches
the first step.
After one step operation, pressing [START] allows the manipulator to
move at the taught speed.
1. Select “LOW SPEED START” on the SPECIAL PLAY window.
– The setting alternates between “VALID” and “INVALID”.
2. Select “COMPLETE”.
– The window returns to the PLAYBACK window.
4-11 200 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
DX100 4 Playback
4.2 Playback
4.2.2.2 Limited Speed Operations

The manipulator operates within the limited speed for the teach mode.
Usually, the limited speed is set to 250mm/s. However, operation is
performed at actual playback speeds for steps in which the set speed is
under this limit.
1. Select “SPEED LIMIT” under the SPECIAL PLAY window.
4.2.2.3 Dry-run Speed Operations

The dry-run speed is a constant speed that is independent of the teaching
speeds. The manipulator executes all the steps at a constant speed,
which is convenient for quick check of a job consisting of slow operations.
The dry-run speed is 10% of maximum speed.
Be careful of steps programmed at lower speeds than the

NOTE dry-run speed, because they are executed at greater
speeds than programmed.
1. Select the “DRY-RUN SPEED” under the SPECIAL PLAY window.

Fig. 4-1: Safety Speed and Dry-run Speed

Speed
Play speed
Safety speed
Dry-run speed
Step
4-12 201 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
DX100 4 Playback
4.2 Playback
4.2.2.4 Machine Lock Operation

A job is played back without moving the manipulator to check the status of
input and output.
1. Select “MACHINE LOCK” under the SPECIAL PLAY window.
• The setting of “MACHINE LOCK” is maintained even after

the mode is switched: If the machine lock is set to “VALID”
in the teach mode, it is still “VALID” after switching to the
play mode. 
The same applies when the mode is switched from the
play mode to the teach mode.
NOTE
• Note that the machine lock becomes “INVALID” if the
following operation is performed.
• Execution of “CANCEL ALL SELECT” in the SPECIAL
PLAY window.
• Turning off the main power.
4.2.2.5 Check Mode Operation

The machine runs without issuing work instructions, such as the ARCON
instruction. It is used primarily to check the path of the program.
1. Select “CHECK-RUN” under the SPECIAL PLAY window.
4.2.2.6 Weaving Prohibit Setting during Check Mode Operation

The weaving operation is not executed in the weaving section of the job.
1. Select “WEAV PROHIBIT IN CHK-RUN” under the SPECIAL PLAY
window.
4-13 202 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
DX100 4 Playback
4.2 Playback
4.2.2.7 Cancel All Special Operations

All special operations are disabled by the following operation.
1. Select {EDIT} from the menu.
2. Select “CANCEL ALL SELECT”.
– The message “All special functions canceled” appears.
NOTE Special operations are also automatically cancelled if the

main power is shut OFF.
4-14 203 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
DX100 4 Playback
4.3 Stop and Restart

The manipulator stops in the following conditions:
• Hold
• Emergency stop
• Stop by alarm
• Others
4.3.1 Hold
Hold operation causes the manipulator to stop all motion.
SUPPLE-
[HOLD] lamp lights while it is held down. At the same time,
MENT [START] lamp goes OFF.
4.3.1.1 Using the Programming Pendant
 Hold
1. Press [HOLD] on the programming pendant.

2. The manipulator stops. The [HOLD] lamp lights while the [HOLD]
button is held down.
 Release
1. Press [START] on the programming pendant.

2. The manipulator restarts its operation from the position where it was
stopped.
4.3.1.2 Using an External Input Signal (System Input)
 Hold
1. Turn ON the hold signal from an external input (system input).

– The manipulator stops temporarily.
External holding
– The output signal “HOLD” turns ON.

– The programming pendant [HOLD] lamp lights.
 Release
1. Turn off the hold signal from an external input (system input).
– Hold is released.
– To continue the operation, press [START] or turn ON the external
input signal (system input). The manipulator restarts its operation,
beginning from the position where it was stopped.
4-15 204 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
DX100 4 Playback
4.3.2 Emergency Stop

At an emergency stop, the servo power supply that drives the manipulator
is turned OFF and the manipulator stops immediately. An emergency stop
can be performed by using either of the following:
• Button on the Front Door of the DX100
• Programming pendant
• External input signal (system input)
 Emergency Stop
1. Press the emergency stop button .
– The servo power turns OFF and the manipulator stops immediately.
– On the front door of the DX100:
– On the programming pendant:
Using the Emergency Stop Button on the Programming Pendant
Robot stops by P.P. emergency stop
Using the External Input Signal (System Input)
Robot stops by external emergency stop
 Release
1. Turn the emergency stop button in the direction of the arrows.
TURN
– On the front door of the DX100:
TURN
– On the programming pendant:
– To turn ON the servo power supply again, press [SERVO ON

READY] and then grip the Enable switch of the programming
pendant.
SERVO
ON
READY
4-16 205 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
DX100 4 Playback
4.3.2.1 Restart After Emergency Stop
CAUTION
• Prior to restarting after an emergency stop, confirm the position for
the next operation and make sure there is no interference with the
workpiece or fixture.
• The application of an emergency stop during high speed operations
on continuous steps can result in the manipulator stopping two or
three steps prior to the step that is being displayed. There is a risk
of interference with the workpiece or fixture when the manipulator is
restarted under such conditions.
4-17 206 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
DX100 4 Playback
4.3.3 Stop by Alarm

If an alarm occurs during operation, the manipulator stops immediately
and the ALARM window appears on the programming pendant indicating
that the machine was stopped by an alarm.
– If more than one alarm occurs simultaneously, all alarms can be
viewed on the window. Scroll down the viewing area of the window
when necessary.
The following operations are available in the alarm status: 

window change, mode change, alarm reset, and emergency stop. 
To display the ALARM window again when the window is changed during
alarm occurrence, select {SYSTEM INFO} and then {ALARM HISTORY}.
 Releasing Alarms
<Minor Alarms>
1. Press [SELECT].
– Select “RESET” under the ALARM window to release the alarm
status.
– When using an external input signal (system input), turn ON the
“ALARM RESET” setting.
<Major Alarms>
1. Turn OFF the main power supply and remove the cause of the alarm.
– If a severe alarm such as hardware failure alarm occurs, the servo
power is automatically shut off and the manipulator stops. If
releasing does not work, turn OFF the main power and correct the
cause of the alarm.
4-18 207 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
DX100 4 Playback
4.3.4 Others
4.3.4.1 Temporary Stop by Mode Change

When the play mode is switched to the teach mode during playback, the
manipulator stops immediately.
!Stopped by switching mode
To restart the operation, return to the play mode and perform a start
operation.
4.3.4.2 Temporary Stop by the PAUSE Instruction

When the PAUSE instruction is executed, the manipulator stops
operating.
!Robot stops by execution PAUSE command
To restart the operation, perform a start operation. The manipulator

restarts from the next instruction.
4-19 208 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
DX100 4 Playback
4.4 Modifying Play Speed
4.4.1 Speed Override

Speed modifications using the speed override have the following features:
• Speed can be modified during playback. 

The job can be played back at various speeds until the play speed is
properly adjusted.
• Speed can be increased or decreased by a ratio of the current play
speed. 
The ratio settings range from 10% to 150% in increments of 1%. 
Therefore, it is convenient when, for example, all play speed settings
are to be increased by 150% at the same time.
The operation flow is shown below.
Start speed override
Call job to perform speed override
Set speed override

(Speed data modify :OFF,specify the ratio)
Changes experimentally,
without modifying registered
speed
Start playback
Adjust the ratio during playback if needed
(1cycle completed)
YES
Reset and playback?
NO
NO
Modify?
YES
Call job to perform speed override
Set speed override

(Speed data modify: ON,specify the ratio) Modifies play speed
Start playback
Modify play speed simultaneously
(1cycle completed)
End
4-20 209 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
DX100 4 Playback
4.4.1.1 Setting Speed Overrides

1. Select {UTILITY} under the menu in the PLAYBACK window.
2. Select {SPEED OVERRIDE}.
– The PLAYBACK window shows the speed override status.
3. Select “ON” or “OFF”.

– Each time [SELECT] is pressed, “ON” and “OFF” alternate.
– Select “ON” to modify the registered play speed during playback.
– When “OFF” is selected, the registered play speed is not modified.
To change the play speed temporarily (for example, to experiment
with various speeds), select “OFF”.
4. Line up the cursor with the override ratio and move the cursor up and
down to change the ratio. 
If you want to input the ratio number directly, move the cursor to the
override ratio and press [SELECT].
– The number input line appears. Input the override ratio using the
Numeric keys.
4-21 210 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
DX100 4 Playback
4.4.1.2 Modifying Play Speed

1. Set speed override.
2. Playback the manipulator.
– The play speed is increased or decreased in the set ratio.
– When setting “MODIFY” to “ON”, the step’s play speed is modified
when each step is reached.
– When one cycle is completed by the END instruction, the speed
override setting is canceled.
• Assuming that the manipulator moves from step 1 to step

2, the play speed of step 2 is not modified if the speed
override is canceled before reaching step 2.
• The play speed after the modification by the speed
override is limited by the maximum and the minimum
NOTE speed of manipulator.
• When the safety speed operation is commanded with the
setting of “MODIFY: ON”, the manipulator operates at the
safety speed. However, the play speed in memory is
modified as set by the speed override.
• Play speed set by the SPEED instruction is not modified.
4.4.1.3 Canceling Speed Override Settings

1. Select {UTILITY} under the menu in the PLAYBACK window.
2. Select {SPEED OVERRIDE}.
– The setting of the speed override ratio is canceled.
– If canceled, the speed ratio setting is not displayed on the
PLAYBACK window.
The speed override settings are automatically canceled in

the following cases:
• When dry-run speed operation is set.
• When the mode is changed to any mode other than the
NOTE play mode.
• When an alarm or error occurs.
• When one cycle operation is completed with the END
instruction.
• When the power supply is turned OFF.
4-22 211 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
DX100 4 Playback
4.5 Playback with Reserved Start
4.5.1 Preparation for Reserved Start

In the reserved start function, jobs registered at different stations are
played back in the reserved order using the start buttons on the stations.
Station 3
(Job 3 registered)
Station 1
(Job 1 registered)
Station 2
(Job 2 registered)
For example, in the case where three stations handle three different
workpieces, as shown in the illustration above, the jobs would be
registered as follows:
• Job 1 is registered to process workpiece 1 at Station 1
To play back the jobs, prepare workpiece 1 and press the start button on
Station 1. The manipulator executes Job 1. Prepare workpieces 2 and 3
while Job 1 is being executed, and press the start buttons on Stations 2
and 3. Even if Job 1 is being executed at that time, jobs on different
stations are reserved in the order that the start buttons have been
pressed, and will be executed in that order. 
During playback, the status of the reservation can be checked on the start
reservation window.
4-23 212 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
DX100 4 Playback
4.5.1.1 Enabling Reserved Start

The start button on the station is operative when the reserved start
function is enabled, and the following start operations are disabled.
• [START] on the programming pendant

• Start operation from external input signal (system input)
NOTE The OPERATING CONDITION window is shown only when

the security mode is management mode.

2. Select {OPERATE COND}.
– The OPERATING CONDITION window appears.
– The screen is scrolled up/down by the cursor key when it locates at
the top/bottom of the items.
3. Select “RESERVED START”.

– Each time [SELECT] is pressed, “PERMIT” and “PROHIBIT”
alternate. Select “PERMIT”.
4-24 213 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
DX100 4 Playback
When the reserved start is enabled, the external start and

the programming pendant start are prohibited even if setting
NOTE is “PERMIT”.
Regardless of the operation cycle selected, it is
automatically set to 1 CYCLE.
4-25 214 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
DX100 4 Playback
4.5.1.2 Registering Reserved Start I/O Signal

Register the start I/O signal as a preparation to perform the start operation
from the station.
This operation can be done only when the operation mode

is the teach mode and the security mode is the
NOTE management mode, and only when the setting of
“RESERVED START JOB CHANGE” is “PERMIT” in the
OPERATING CONDITION window.

2. Select {RES. START(CNCT)}.
– The RESERVED START (CNCT) window appears.
3. Select “START IN” or “START OUT” for each station.

– The number can now be entered.
4-26 215 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
DX100 4 Playback
4. Input signal number and press [ENTER].

– The input/output signal number is registered.
4-27 216 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
DX100 4 Playback
4.5.1.3 Registering Jobs to Stations

Register the starting job of each station.

NOTE is the teach mode and the setting of “RESERVED START
JOB CHANGE” is “PERMIT” in the OPERATING
CONDITION window.

2. Select {RES. START(JOB)}.
– The RESERVED START (JOB) window appears.
–  indicates that the input/output number is registered.
–  indicates that the input/output number is not registered.
3. Select the job name for each station.

4. Select “SETTING START JOB”.

4-28 217 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
DX100 4 Playback
5. Select a job.
– The starting job is registered.
4-29 218 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
DX100 4 Playback
4.5.1.4 Deleting Registered Jobs from Stations

Delete the registered job of each station.

NOTE is the teach mode and the setting of “RESERVED START
JOB CHANGE” is “PERMIT” in the operation condition
display.

2. Select {RES. START(JOB)}.
– The RESERVED START (JOB) window appears.
3. Select the job name of the station to be deleted.
4. Select “CANCEL START JOB”.

– The registered job is deleted.
4-30 219 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
DX100 4 Playback
4.5.2 Playback from Reserved Start
4.5.2.1 Start Operation

1. Set the mode switch to “PLAY”.
2. Press start button on the station.
– The job registered for the station starts up and the manipulator
performs one cycle operation.
• While the job is being executed, the start button lamp on

the station lamps.
• If the workpiece must be prepared at the station, prepare it
before pressing the start button.
• During the execution of a job for one station, if the start
button of another station is pressed, the job of the latter
station is reserved and prepared to start. Jobs are
NOTE reserved and executed in the order that the start buttons
have been pressed.
• When a job is reserved, the start button lamp on the
station blinks.
• No station job is reserved when it is being executed even if
its start button is pressed.
• To suspend a job being executed, perform the Hold
operation.
SUPPLE-
Reservations are canceled when the start button is pressed
MENT again during the job reservation operation.
4-31 220 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
DX100 4 Playback
4.5.2.2 Checking Job Reservation Status

The job reservation status during playback can be checked.
2. Select {RES. STATUS}.
– The RESERVATION STATUS window appears.
A
B
A. STATUS
Reservation status is displayed.
STARTING: Indicates the station currently working.
STOP: Indicates any station where work has been temporarily stopped
by a hold operation.
RESERVE1,RESERVE2,...: Indicates the order in which jobs have
been reserved for start.
B.START IN
Input signal status is displayed. 
“”: Input signal ON 
“”: Input signal OFF
4-32 221 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
DX100 4 Playback
4.5.2.3 Resetting Job Reservation
NOTE If “STARTING” is displayed, the job cannot be reset.
1. Select {JOB} on the RESERVATION STATUS window.

2. Select {RESET RESERVATION} or {RESET ALL}.
– When {RESET RESERVATION} is selected, job reservation
stated to “RESERVE” is reset.
– When {RESET ALL} is selected, job reservation stated to “STOP”
and “RESERVE” is reset.
3. Select “YES”.
All job reservations are reset automatically in the following

conditions:
• When the reserved start sets to “PROHIBIT”. (When
NOTE “RESERVED START” is set to “PROHIBIT” on the
OPERATING CONDITION window.)
• When another job is called or an edit operation is
performed.
4-33 222 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
DX100 4 Playback
4.5.3 Hold Operation

Hold operation causes the manipulator to stop all motion. It can be
performed by the following buttons or signal.
• [HOLD] on the programming pendant
• External Input Signal (system input)
• Hold button for the station axis
SUPPLE-
[HOLD] lamp lights while it is held down. At the same time,
MENT [START] lamp goes OFF.
4.5.3.1 [HOLD] on the Programming Pendant
 Hold
1. Press [HOLD] on the programming pendant.

– The [HOLD] lamp lights while the [HOLD] button is held down.
 Release
1. Press the start button on the suspended station.

– The manipulator restarts its operation from the position where it was
stopped.
4.5.3.2 Hold by External Input Signal (System Input)
 Hold
1. Input ON signal to the external input (system input) specified for the
hold operation.
External holding
– The hold lamp for the external output signal lights.

– The [HOLD] lamp on the programming pendant lights and the
[START] lamp turns OFF.
 Release
1. Input OFF signal to the external input (system input) specified for the
hold operation.
2. To continue the operation, press the start button on the suspended
station.
– The manipulator restarts its operation from the position where it was
stopped.
4-34 223 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
DX100 4 Playback
4.5.3.3 Hold at the Station
 Hold
1. Press the hold button on the station.

External holding
 Release
1. Press the hold button on the suspended station.

– Press the start button on the station, then the manipulator restarts its
operation from the position where it was stopped.
Pressing the start button on a station that is not in the Hold

SUPPLE-
status does not start manipulator operation. The job
MENT registered for the station is reserved or the reservation, if it
has been made, is canceled.
4-35 224 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
DX100 4 Playback
4.6 Displaying Job Stack

During the execution of the series of jobs that combined with CALL or
JUMP instructions, the job stack can be displayed to check where the
current job is and how many jobs are left.
Stack Level 1 Stack Level 2 Stack Level 3 Stack Level 4
Job call
Job A
Job call
Job B
Job call
Return Job C
Job call
Return Job D
Return
SUPPLE- Job calls can be used for up to 12 stack levels.

MENT
1. Select {DISPLAY} under the menu on the PLAYBACK window.

4-36 225 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
DX100 4 Playback
2. Select {JOB STACK}.

– The job stack status dialog box appears.
– To close the job stack status dialog box, select {DISPLAY} and then
{JOB STACK} under the menu again.
– For above example, the playback of Job C is being executed and

the Job C is called from Job B. Also, the Job B is called from Job A.
4-37 226 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
DX100 5 Editing Jobs
5 Editing Jobs
This section explains how to manage the jobs without moving the
manipulator. Copying, deleting, and modifying of the jobs can be done
only in the teach mode. Other operations can be done in any mode.
NOTE Edit operations are restricted when the edit lock is applied.
Editing Move Instructions

See chapter 3 "Teaching" for basic information on editing
move instructions.
• It is not possible to add, delete, or modify move
instructions which have position data. See section 3.4
“Modifying Steps” on page 3-29 for details.
• The following MOV instruction edit operations are
explained in this section:
NOTE For move instructions:

• Insertion, deletion, or modification of additional items
• Modification of interpolation type or play speed for
move instructions
• Setting, modification, or deletion of UNTIL statements
(interruption conditions based on input signals)
• Setting and deletion of NWAIT instructions
For move instructions using position variables:
• Insertion and deletion of move instruction.
SUPPLE-
Refer to section 1.2.6 “Character Input Operation” on page
MENT 1-18 for the character input operation.
5-1 227 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
5.1 Copying Jobs
5.1 Copying Jobs

This operation is used to copy registered jobs and use them to create new
jobs. It can be done using either the JOB CONTENT window or the JOB
LIST window.
5.1.0.1 Copying Jobs on the JOB CONTENT Window

On the JOB CONTENT window, the current edit job becomes the copy
source job.
2. Select {JOB}.
3. Select {JOB}  {COPY JOB} under the pull-down menu.
4. Input the job name.

– Input the new job name.
– The name of the copy source job is displayed on the input area. It is
possible to partially change this name to enter a new name.
5-2 228 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
5.1 Copying Jobs
SUPPLE-
See section 1.2.6 “Character Input Operation” on page 1-18
MENT for information on letter input operations.
5. Press [ENTER].
– If “YES” is selected, the job is copied and the new job appears.
– If “NO” is selected, the job copy is not executed, and the process is
canceled.
5.1.0.2 Copying Jobs on the JOB LIST Window

On the JOB LIST window, select the copy source job from the registered
jobs and specify the copy destination directory.
1. Select {JOB}  {SELECT JOB} under the main menu.
2. Move the cursor to the copy source job.

3. Select {JOB}  {COPY JOB} under the pull-down menu.
5-3 229 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
5.1 Copying Jobs

– The name of the copy source job is displayed on the input area. It is
SUPPLE-
5. Press [ENTER].
– If “YES” is selected, the job is copied and the new job appears.
– If “NO” is selected, the job copy is not executed, and the process is
canceled.
5-4 230 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
5.2 Deleting Jobs
5.2 Deleting Jobs

This operation is used to delete jobs that are registered on the DX100. It
can be performed in either the JOB CONTENT window or the JOB LIST
window.
5.2.0.1 Deleting Jobs on the JOB CONTENT Window

On the JOB CONTENT window, the current edit job is deleted.
2. Select {JOB}.
3. Select {JOB}  {DELETE JOB} under the pull-down menu.
4. Press “YES”.
– When “YES” is selected, the edit job is deleted. When deletion is
completed, the JOB LIST window appears.
– When “NO” is selected, the job deletion is canceled.
5-5 231 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
5.2 Deleting Jobs
5.2.0.2 Deleting Jobs on the JOB LIST Window

On the JOB LIST window, select the job to be deleted from the list of the
registered jobs.
2. Move the cursor to the job to be deleted.

3. Select {JOB}  {DELETE JOB} under the pull-down menu.
4. Press “YES”.
– When “YES” is selected, the selected job is deleted. When deletion
is completed, the JOB LIST window appears.
– If “NO” or [CANCEL] is selected, the job deletion is canceled and the
JOB LIST window appears.
SUPPLE-
To select all the registered jobs at a time, select {EDIT} from
MENT the menu and then select “SELECT ALL”.
5-6 232 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
5.3 Modifying Job Names

This operation is used to modify the name of a job that is registered. The
operation can be performed in either the JOB CONTENT window or the
JOB LIST window.
5.3.0.1 Modifying Job Names on the JOB CONTENT Window

2. Select {JOB}.
3. Select {JOB}  {RENAME JOB} under the pull-down menu.

– The name of the source job is displayed on the input area. It is
SUPPLE-
5-7 233 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
5. Press [ENTER].
– When “YES” is selected, the job name is changed and a new job
name is displayed.
– When “NO” is selected, the job name is not changed, and the
process is canceled.
5-8 234 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
5.3.0.2 Modifying Job Names on the JOB LIST Window

On the JOB LIST window, select the job whose name is to be modified
from the list of the registered jobs.
2. Move the cursor to the name to be changed.

3. Select {JOB}  {RENAME JOB} under the pull-down menu.

– The name of the source job is displayed on the input area. It is
SUPPLE-
5. Press [ENTER].
– When “YES” is selected, the job name is changed and a new job
name is displayed.
5-9 235 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
– When “NO” is selected, the job name is not changed, and the
process is canceled.
5-10 236 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
5.4 Editing Comments

Comments of up to 32 characters can be added to each job to identify
each job more specifically. Comments are displayed and edited on the
JOB HEADER window.
2. Select {JOB}.
3. Select {DISPLAY} under the pull-down menu.
– The JOB HEADER window appears.
5. Select “COMMENT”.
– The window for character input appears.
6. Input comments.
– Input comments.
– For the jobs that are already registered, comments are displayed on
the input area. It is possible to partially change comments to enter
new comments.
SUPPLE-
5-11 237 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
7. Press [ENTER].
– The comment on the input area is registered and is displayed on the
“COMMENT” area in the JOB HEADER window.
5-12 238 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
5.5 Setting Edit Lock on Individual Job Units
5.5 Setting Edit Lock on Individual Job Units

In order to prevent inadvertent changes in the registered jobs or data, it is
possible to set the edit lock to each job. When the edit lock is ON, the job
cannot be edited or deleted.
The edit lock can be set and canceled on the JOB HEADER window.
SUPPLE-
Setting of the edit lock can be changed only when the
MENT security mode is management mode.

2. Select {JOB}.
3. Select {DISPLAY} under the pull-down menu.
– The JOB HEADER window appears.
5. Select “EDIT LOCK” and set the edit prohibit.

– Each time [SELECT] is pressed, the setting alternates between
“ON” (edit disabled) and “OFF” (edit enabled).
5-13 239 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
5.6 Enabling the Modification of Position Data Only
5.6 Enabling the Modification of Position Data Only

Even in the edit-locked job, the position data can be modified.
2. Select {TEACHING CONDITION SETTING}.
– The TEACHING CONDITION SETTING window appears.
SUPPLE-
TEACHING CONDITION SETTING window is shown only
MENT when the security mode is edit mode or management mode.
3. Select “STEP ONLY CHANGING” and press [SELECT].

– Each time [SELECT] is pressed, the setting alternates between
“PROHIBIT” and “PERMIT”.
5-14 240 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
DX100 6 Convenient Functions
6.1 One-touch Operation “Direct Open”
6 Convenient Functions

The direct open function immediately shows the JOB CONTENT window
or condition file contents of a job called by the CALL instruction. Move the
cursor to the desired job name or condition file name and simply press the
direct open key to display the contents of the file. This function can
DIRECT
OPEN
be used for the following window: 
• JOB CONTENT window for a job name directly specified by a CALL

instruction
• CONDITION FILE window for a file name directly specified by a work
instruction
• COMMAND POS window for a move instruction
• I/O window with an I/O instruction (when I/O numbers are specified)
<Example> Example Using Direct Open
In the 8th line

DIRECT
OPEN
COMMAND POS window

In the 9th line
DIRECT
OPEN
In the 10th line

DIRECT
OPEN
USER OUTPUT window
In the 11th line

DIRECT
OPEN
WEAVING CONDITION window
JOB CONTENT window for "JOB-C"
6-1 241 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
1. In the JOB CONTENT window, move the cursor to the job name or the
condition file for which the window is to be displayed.
2. Press the direct open key .

DIRECT
OPEN
– This key lamp lights and the JOB CONTENT window or the
condition file window appears.
– When the direct open key is pressed once again, the key lamp
DIRECT
OPEN
turns OFF, and the window returns to the former JOB CONTENT
window.
• The direct open function cannot be used again while a

directly opened window is shown.
• If another window is selected while the direct open
function is effective, the function is automatically cancelled
NOTE and the lamp on the direct open key goes out.
• Once another JOB CONTENT window is opened by the
direct open function, the former job cannot be
continuously operated. (Stopped until the opened JOB
CONTENT window is closed.)
6-2 242 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
6.2 Job Edit Function During Playback
6.2.1 Function
Jobs can be edited during playback, including during the play mode.
<Editable> user job
<Not Editable> macro job and system job
6.2.2 Job Edit During Playback
6.2.2.1 Basic Operation

The job edit operation during playback is described below.
1. During playback, select the main menu {JOB}, then select the
submenu {SELECT JOB}.
– JOB LIST display appears.
2. Select {EDITING} under the pull-down menu {JOB}.
6-3 243 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
3. Select the job to be edited from JOB LIST.
– The selected job will be registered in the display of the submenu

“PLAY EDIT JOB LIST”.
4. Edit the selected job.
– Edit the job selected in the above step in the same manner as the
teach mode.
– Regarding restrictions on editing, refer to section 6.2.2.2 “Editing” on

page 6-6.
6-4 244 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
5. Select {WRITING} under the pull-down menu {JOB} to reflect the

edited data.
– If the job to be written to is listed in “JOB LIST”, a confirmation dialog

“Overwrite?” appears. Select “YES” to reflect the edited data. Refer
to the “SUPPLEMENT” on the next page.
– If the job with the same name is not listed in “JOB LIST”, the job to
be written to will be added to “JOB LIST”. Refer to the
“SUPPLEMENT” on the next page.
6-5 245 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
If data is reflected during playback, the message

“Requesting playback edit JOB writing” appears, and the
status becomes a write request. To write the job, execute
the instruction “LATESTJOB” in the write request status or
end playback. If data is reflected in the play mode but not
during playback, the job will be written immediately.
However, if the job to be written to is being executed
(including jobs in the call stack), 
SUPPLE-
MENT “Error 5240: Cannot write in the JOB in execution.”
appears, and the edited data will not be reflected.
If a job in the call stack is written to in the play mode but not
during playback, 
“Error 5241: Cannot write in the JOB in JOB STACK.”
If data is reflected during teaching, the job will be written
immediately.
6.2.2.2 Editing
The data of the selected job (see the step 4 of section 6.2.2.1 “Basic
Operation” on page 6-3) can be edited in the same manner as the normal
teach mode. 
However, the functions that affect the manipulator motion are restricted as
follows:
• Position teaching cannot be edited.
• The pull-down menu during editing is restricted as shown in Fig. 6-1
“Pull-down Menu (EDIT) * Cursor Is on Line No.” to Fig. 6-4 “Pull-
down Menu (UTILITY)” on page 6-7.
Fig. 6-1: Pull-down Menu (EDIT) * Cursor Is on Line No.
6-6 246 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
Fig. 6-2: Pull-down Menu (EDIT) * Cursor Is on Instruction
Fig. 6-3: Pull-down Menu (DISPLAY)
Fig. 6-4: Pull-down Menu (UTILITY)
In addition to the job edit operation described above, {CREATE NEW

JOB}, {RENAME JOB}, {COPY JOB}, and {DELETE JOB} under the pull-
down menu {JOB} are also available.
All of the above operations are performed for the jobs listed in “PLAY EDIT
JOB LIST”. 
6-7 247 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
To reflect the edited data in the job listed in JOB LIST, {WRITING} must be
done.
Regarding {DELETE JOB}, only the jobs listed in “PLAY EDIT JOB LIST”
can be deleted. The jobs in “JOB LIST” will not be deleted.
The above {WRITING}, {DELETE JOB}, {RENAME JOB},

SUPPLE- and {COPY JOB} can be done in the same manner on the
MENT
“PLAY EDIT JOB LIST” display.
6.2.2.3 Editing Multiple Jobs

The procedure to delete or write multiple jobs at once on the PLAY EDIT
JOB LIST display is described below.
 Deleting Multiple Jobs

1. Select the main menu {JOB}, then select the submenu {PLAY EDIT
JOB LIST}.
2. Select the job to be deleted by [SHIFT] + [SELECT].

– “●“ appears on the left of the selected job.
6-8 248 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
3. Select {DELETE JOB} under the pull-down menu {JOB}.

– A confirmation dialog box appears for each selected job. Select
“YES” to delete the job from the PLAY EDIT JOB LIST display.
 Writing to Multiple Jobs

JOB LIST}.
2. Select the job to be written to by [SHIFT] + [SELECT].

– “●“ appears on the left of the selected job.
6-9 249 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
3. Select {WRITING} under the pull-down menu {JOB}.

– If the job to be written to is listed in JOB LIST, a confirmation dialog
“Overwrite?” appears. Select “YES” to reflect the edited data. If
“NO” is selected, the edited data will not be reflected. To cancel
writing, press [CANCEL] while the confirmation dialog appears. 
If the job with the same name is not listed in “JOB LIST”, the job to
be written to will be added to “JOB LIST”. Refer to the
“SUPPLEMENT” below.
If data is reflected during playback, the message

“Requesting playback edit JOB writing” appears, and the
status becomes a write request. To write the job, execute
the instruction “LATESTJOB” in the write request status or
end playback. If data is reflected in the play mode but not
during playback, the job will be written immediately.
However, if the job to be written to is being executed
(including jobs in the call stack), 
SUPPLE-
MENT “Error 5240: Cannot write in the JOB in execution.”
If a job in the call stack is written to in the play mode but not
during playback, 
“Error 5241: Cannot write in the JOB in JOB STACK.”
If data is reflected during teaching, the job will be written
immediately.
6-10 250 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
6.2.2.4 Canceling Write Request

The procedure to cancel a write request is described below.
 Canceling Write Request

JOB LIST}, 
or 
select the main menu {JOB}, then select the submenu {JOB EDIT
(PLAY)}.
2. Select {WRITING CANCEL} under the pull-down menu {JOB}.
6-11 251 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
CAUTION
• When the mode switch is changed to the teach mode during job editing
Even if the mode switch is changed to the teach mode without reflecting
or canceling the edited data, the changed data will be saved. In this
case, select the main menu {JOB}, then select the submenu {SELECT
JOB} or {PLAY EDIT JOB LIST} to edit data in the same manner as in
the play mode. However, position teaching cannot be done.
Regarding the job edited in the play mode, even after

SUPPLE- the mode is changed to the teach mode, the edited data
MENT
will not be reflected if {WRITING} is not done.
• Writing a job
{WRITING} operates differently depending on the status of the robot.
Select {JOB}, then select {WRITING} to reflect the edited data in the
job. The data is reflected as described below depending on whether
the job is being executed or not.
1. When the job is NOT being executed: The data is reflected immediately.
2. When the job is being executed: The data is reflected when the
instruction “LATESTJOB” is executed or when the job execution is
completed.
“Requesting playback edit JOB writing” appears while waiting for reflect
operation (during a write request).
• The executing job cannot be written to even by the

instruction “LATESTJOB”.
SUPPLE-
MENT • If a power failure occurs during a write request, the
write request will be canceled upon restarting, and the
job will not be reflected.
• During a file transfer

{WRITING} cannot be done during file transfer (i.e. external memory
operation or data transmission).
In addition, a file cannot be transferred during a write request.
• During a write request
Editing is inhibited during a write request (while “Requesting playback
edit JOB writing” appears).
To edit data, wait for the writing to be completed or cancel the write
request.
6-12 252 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
6.3 Parallel Shift Function
6.3.1 Function Overview

Parallel shift refers to the shifting of an object from a fixed position in such
a way that all points within the object move an equal distance. In the
model for parallel shift shown in the following, the shift value can be
defined as the distance L (three-dimensional coordinate displacement).
The parallel shift function is relevant to the actual operation of the
manipulator because it can be used to reduce the amount of work
involved in teaching by shifting a taught path (or position).
In the example in the figure below, the taught position A is shifted in

increments of the distance L (this is actually a three-dimensional XYZ
displacement that can be recognized by the robot) in order to enable the
operation that was taught at position A to also be performed at positions B
through G.
A B C D E F G
L
Teaching position
6-13 253 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
6.3.1.1 Parallel Shift of Step

The block from the SFTON to the SFTOF instructions is subject to the shift
operation.
Line
Instruction
(Step)
0000 NOP
0001(001 MOVJ VJ=50.00

)
0002(002 MOVL V=138

) Shifted block
0003 SFTON PUF# (1)
0004(003 MOVL V=138

)
0005(004 MOVL V=138

)
1 2 3 4 5 6
6.3.1.2 Parallel Shift of Job

When shifting an entire series of operations, the range to be shifted by the
shift instruction can be set using the method indicated above, but the
method shown in the following, in which just the part to be shifted is made
into a separate job, can also be used.
SFTON P 
CALL JOB:  Job to perform the shifting
SFTOF
6-14 254 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
6.3.2 Setting the Shift Value
6.3.2.1 Coordinate Systems

The shift value for parallel shift is X, Y, and Z increment in each
coordinates. There are four coordinates: base coordinates, robot
coordinates, tool coordinates, and user coordinates. In systems with no
servo track, the base coordinates and robot coordinates are the same.
Tool coordinates
Robot coordinates
User coordinates
Base coordinates
User
coordinates
6.3.2.2 Setting the Shift Value

When setting the shift value for the position variables, use the current
position (coordinates) of the manipulator in the window.
DATA EDIT DISPLAY UTILITY DATA EDIT DISPLAY UTILITY
CURRENT POSITION CURRENT POSITION

COORDINATE USER#01 TOOL:00 COORDINATE USER#01 TOOL:00
R1:X 5.360 mm Rx -179.91 deg. R1:X 105.360 mm Rx -179.91 deg.
Y 66.080 mm Ry -2.17 deg. Y 66.080 mm Ry -2.17 deg.
Z 316.940 mm Rz -102.89 deg. Z 416.940 mm Rz -102.89 deg.
Re -53.6863 deg. Re -53.6863 deg.
<ROBOT TYPE> <ROBOT TYPE>
FRONT UP S>=180 S>=180
FRONT UP
UP R>=180 UP R>=180
NO FLIP T<180 NO FLIP T<180
Teaching position Position to be shifted

(Move the manipulator using the
programming pendant.)
Differences are assumed to be shift amounts.
DATA EDIT DISPLAY UTILITY
POSITION VARIABLE
#P000 ROBOT NAME
R1:X -100.000 TOOL: 00
Y 0.000
Z -100.000 <TYPE>
Rx 0.0000 FRONT S>=180
Ry 0.0000 UP R>=180
Rz 0.0000 FLIP T<180
Re 0.0000
Main Menu Simple Menu
6-15 255 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
The shift value is the X, Y, and Z difference between the shift position and
teaching position and the difference in angular displacement RX, RY, And
RZ (normally set at “0”). If shifting is executed at equal pitch intervals, for
example for palletizing, find the difference between the teaching position
and the final shift position, then divide by the number of pitch intervals
(number of divisions) to calculate the shift value per pitch.
L1
L2
L1
L2=
Number of pitches
Teaching position Final shift position
The posture of the wrist is defined by the angular displacement of the

coordinates of the wrist axes. Consequently, if the shift value is specified
with X, Y, and Z only (RX, RY, RZ=0), the wrist is shifted while maintaining
the same posture as at the teaching point. Since shifting is normally
performed without changing the posture, there is no need to specify an
angular displacement for the wrist. The motion when a parallel shift is
performed is shown in the following:
Shift without changing the wrist posture
(RX,RY,RZ=0)
Teaching posture
Shift with wrist posture change
(RX,RY,RZ 0)
Shift value
The shift value is calculated on the position data window for the
coordinates in which the shift is performed. Since this is normally
performed in the user coordinates, the position data window for the user
coordinates is used.
6-16 256 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
6.3.3 Registering Shift Instructions

To register the instruction, move the cursor to the address area in the JOB
CONTENT window during teach mode as follows:
2. Select {JOB}.
Address area Instruction area
3. Move the cursor to the address area.
6-17 257 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
6.3.3.1 SFTON Instruction

This is the instruction that starts a parallel shift.
1. Move the cursor to the line immediately before where the SFTON
Line immediately 0001 MOVJ VJ=50.00
before where 0002 MOVL V=138
SFTON instruction 0003 MOVL V=138
is to be registered.

IN/OUT
CONTROL
DEVICE
MOTION
ARITH
SFTON SHIFT
SFTOF OTHER
MSHIFT SAME
PRIOR
3. Select {SHIFT}.
4. Select the SFTON instruction.
– The SFTON instruction is displayed in the input buffer line.
5. Modify the additional items or number values as required.
– <When Nothing is to be Changed> 
Proceed to Step 6.
– <When Editing Additional Items>
• Adding or modifying additional items 
To change the position variable number, move the cursor to the
position variable number and press [SHIFT] + the cursor key to
increase or decrease the value.
SFTON P000
To directly input the value using the Numeric keys, press [SELECT]
to display the input buffer line.
P=
SFTON
After the number is input, press [ENTER] to modify the number

value in the input buffer line.
6-18 258 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
• Adding the coordinate system in which the shift is performed

Move the cursor to the instruction in the input buffer line and press
[SELECT]. The DETAIL EDIT window appears.
SFTON P001
– Line up the cursor with ”UNUSED” and press [SELECT]. The

selection dialog box appears. Line up the cursor with the coordinate
system to be added, and press [SELECT].
– After the coordinate system addition is completed, press [ENTER].

The DETAIL EDIT window closes and the JOB CONTENT window
appears.
6. Press [INSERT] and then [ENTER].
– The instruction displayed in the input buffer line is registered.
Line where SFTON 0002 MOVL V=138
0003 SFTON P000 BF
instruction is
0004 MOVL V=138
registered.
6-19 259 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
6.3.3.2 SFTOF Instruction

This is the instruction that ends a parallel shift.
1. Move the cursor to the line immediately before where the SFTOF
Line immediately
0006 MOVL V=138
before where 0007 DOUT OT#(1) ON
SFTOF instruction 0008 TIMER T=1.00
is to be registered.

3. Select {SHIFT}.
4. Select the SFTOF instruction.
– The SFTOF instruction is displayed in the input buffer line.
SFTOF

– The SFTOF instruction is registered.
0006 MOVL V=138
0007 SFTOF
0008 DOUT OT#(1) ON
6-20 260 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
6.3.3.3 MSHIFT Instruction

When a parallel shift of the wrist posture is attempted, the manipulator
may not be shifted to the target posture in the following cases.
• Posture displacement (Rx, Ry, Rz) is specified to the shift value set
by the user.
• When a displacement between two points is calculated using an
INFORM operating instruction (ADD instruction, SUB instruction,
etc.), and a posture displacement (Rx, Ry, Rz) is specified in the shift
value.
In such cases, the MSHIFT instruction can be used to automatically

calculate the optimum shift value for an operation to reach the target shift
position and posture. With an MSHIFT instruction, the shift value between
the reference position and the target position (shift position) when the
parallel shift is performed is determined in the specified coordinate
system, and set as the specified position variable.
1. Move the cursor to the line immediately before where the MSHIFT
Line immediately 0005 MOVJ V=138

before where 0006 GETS PX001 $PX000
MSHIFT instruction 0007 DOUT OT#(1) ON
is registered.

IN/OUT
CONTROL
DEVICE
MOTION
ARITH
SFTON SHIFT
SFTOF OTHER
MSHIFT SAME
PRIOR
3. Select {SHIFT}.
4. Select the MSHIFT instruction.
– The MSHIFT instruction is displayed in the input buffer line.
5. Change the number data or additional items as required.
– <When Nothing is to be Changed> 
Proceed to Step 6.
– <When Editing Additional Items>
– Adding or modifying additional items 
To change the position variable number, move the cursor to the
position variable number and press [SHIFT] + the cursor key to
increase or decrease the value.
MSHIFT PX000 BF PX001 PX002
6-21 261 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
– To directly input the value using the Numeric keys, press [SELECT]
to display the input buffer line.
PX =
MSHIFT 0 BF PX001 PX002
– After the number is input, press [ENTER] to modify the number

value in the input buffer line.
– Changing the coordinate system in which the shift is performed 
Move the cursor to the instruction in the input buffer line and press
[SELECT]. The DETAIL EDIT window appears.
MSHIFT PX000 BF PX001 PX002
– Line up the cursor with “BF” and press [SELECT]. The selection
dialog box appears. Line up the cursor with the coordinate system
to be changed, and press [SELECT].
– After the coordinate system modification is complete, press

[ENTER]. The DETAIL EDIT window closes and the JOB
CONTENT window appears.
– The instruction displayed in the input buffer line is registered.
Line where 0006 GETS PX000 $PX000

MSHIFT is 0007 MSHIFT PX000 RF PX001 PX002
registered. 0008 DOUT OT#(1) ON
6-22 262 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
6.3.4 Continuation of the Parallel Shift Function
CAUTION
• If the shift function is cancelled through a job editing operation after
the execution of a parallel shift instruction, the job must be started
again from the beginning.
• Because no shift is performed when the operation is restarted, there
is a possibility of interference between the workpiece and fixture.
If any of the following operations are performed after executing a parallel

shift instruction, the shift function is cancelled.
• Job editing operation (changing, deleting, adding)

• Job copy, job name change
• Registering a new job, deleting a job, or modifying a selected job
• Restart after the alarm occurs
• When control power is turned OFF
NOTE With any operation other than those listed above, the
parallel shift function remains in effect.
6-23 263 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
6.3.5 Examples of Use
6.3.5.1 Example of Use of Shift Addition/Subtraction
Table 6-1: Workpiece Stacking Operation

Line Instruction
0000 NOP
0001 SET B000 0
0002 SUB P000 P000 Make the first shift value zero.
0003 *A
0004 MOVJ Step 1
0005 MOVL Step 2
0006 ’Gripping workpiece
0007 MOVL Step 3
0008 MOVL Step 4
0009 SFTON P000 UF#(1) Shift start
0010 MOVL Shift position Step 5
0011 ’Releasing workpiece
0012 SFTOF Shift end
0013 ADD P000 P001 Add the shift value for the next
operation.
0014 MOVL Step 6
0015 MOVL Step 7
0016 INC B000
0017 JUMP *A IF B00<6
0018 
SFTON P000 UF#(1) Since the shift data is retained
in memory, the same data can
SFTOF be used (with subtraction
SUB P000 P001 instead of addition) to perform
a workpiece unloading
operation.

1,7 3 4,6
2
Workpiece
6-24 264 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
6.3.5.2 Example of Use of MSHIFT Instruction
Line Instruction Explanation

0000 NOP
0001 MOVJ VJ=20.00 Move the manipulator to the
reference position.
0002 GETS PX000 $PX000 Set the reference position as
position variable P000.
0003 MOVJ VJ=20.00 Move the manipulator to the
target position.
0004 GETS PX001 $PX000 Set the target position as position
variable P001.
0005 MSHlFT PX010 BF PX000 PX001 Set shift value and set it as
position variable P010.
0006 END
6-25 265 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
6.4 Parallel Shift Job Conversion Function

If the manipulator and base positions are moved after a job has been
taught, the entire job has to be modified. The parallel shift conversion
function shortens the modification time required in cases like this by
shifting all steps of the job by the same value to create a new job.
When the parallel shift conversion is performed, all job steps are shifted by
the same value.
Steps Outside the P-point Maximum Envelope

• “/OV” is displayed for the steps which result in a position
outside the P-point maximum envelope of the manipulator.
When the position is corrected, “/OV” display disappears.
Position Variable
• Position variables are not subject to the parallel shift job
NOTE conversion.
Not Converted Job
• The following jobs cannot be converted. If conversion is
attempted, no operation is performed.
• Jobs without any group axes
• Concurrent jobs (optional)
CAUTION
• If a job name after conversion is not specified when executing the
parallel shift job conversion, the position data of the job is shifted
and converted, then the data is overwritten with a new position data
after the shift. Be sure to save the job in the external memory
device or create the same job by copying before executing
conversion.
6-26 266 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
6.4.2 Coordinate Systems for Conversion

When performing the parallel shift job conversion, it is necessary to
specify the coordinate systems in which the conversion is to be
performed. The coordinate system can be selected from the following:
• Base coordinates
• Robot coordinates
• Tool coordinates
• User coordinates (64 types)
• Master tool coordinates (R*+R* job)
• Pulse coordinates
In the case of an ordinary job for which group axes are registered, shift
conversion is performed in accordance with the selected coordinate
system. The relationship between group combinations and coordinates
are shown in the following table.
1 to 4 in the table are followed by their explanations.
Table 6-2: Relationship Between Group Combinations and Coordinates at
Conversion
Group Explanation
Combination Usable Coordinate System
in Job
R Shift is performed on the basis of selected coordinates.
Base coordinates, robot coordinates, tool coordinates, user
coordinates, pulse coordinates
R(B) Shift is performed on the basis of selected coordinates.
1. Base The base axis is shifted by the
Coordinates specified amount and the TCP of the
manipulator is shifted by the specified
amount in the base coordinates.
2. Robot The base axis is shifted by the
Coordinates specified amount. 
The TCP of the manipulator is shifted
by the specified amount in the robot
coordinates. These shifts are carried
out independently.
3. Tool The base axis is shifted by the
Coordinates specified amount. 
The TCP of the manipulator is shifted
by the specified amount in the tool
coordinates. These shifts are carried
out independently.
4. User The base axis is shifted by the
Coordinates specified amount and the TCP of the
manipulator is shifted by the specified
amount in the user coordinates.
5. Pulse The taught position of each axis is
Coordinates shifted by the specified amount on the
basis of pulse values.
S Shift is performed on the basis of pulse values regardless of the
coordinates.
6-27 267 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
Table 6-2: Relationship Between Group Combinations and Coordinates at

Conversion
R+S The manipulator is shifted in the selected coordinates. 
The station axis is shifted on the basis of pulse values regardless
of the coordinates.
coordinates, pulse coordinates
R(B)+S The manipulator is shifted in the selected coordinates, as in 1 to
5 above. 
The station axis is shifted on the basis of pulse values regardless
of the coordinates.
R+R Two manipulators are shifted in the selected coordinates.
coordinates, master tool coordinates 1), pulse coordinates
R(B)+R(B) Two manipulators are shifted in the selected coordinate system,
as in 1 to 5 above. Two base axes are also shifted.
1 In the master tool coordinates, conversion only occurs at the “slave” from the
standpoint of the SMOV instruction.
 About 1 to 4 in the Table
1. Base Coordinates
The base axis is shifted by B and the TCP of the manipulator is shifted
by A in the base coordinates.
Base coordinates
Base
6-28 268 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
2. Robot Coordinates
The base axis is shifted by B. The TCP of the manipulator is shifted by
A in the robot coordinates. These shifts are carried out independently.
Robot coordinates
Base coordinates
3. Tool Coordinates
by A in the tool coordinates. These shifts are carried out independently.
Base coordinates
Tool coordinates
4. User Coordinates
by A in the user coordinates. These shifts are carried out
independently.
User coordinates
Base coordinates
6-29 269 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
 Converting R*+R* Jobs with Master Tool Coordinates
R*+R* coordinated jobs can be subjected to the parallel shift job

conversion in the master tool coordinates. Only the steps taken at the
“slave” from the standpoint of the SMOV instruction are subject to
conversion (i.e. the steps of R2 in the figure below).
R2 (Slave)
R1 (Master)
X-axis
Y-axis Master tool coordinates
Z-axis
1
0001 MOV
+MOV
0002 MOV
+MOV 6
0003 SMOV 5
Displays R2 +MOV 2
Displays R1
0004 SMOV
+MOV
0005 SMOV
+MOV 4
3
0006 MOV
+MOV Motion path
after conversion
6-30 270 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
6.4.3 Executing the Parallel Shift Job Conversion
6.4.3.1 Window Display
A
B
C
D
E
A. SOURCE JOB
Selects the job before conversion. The job which is shown in the JOB
CONTENT window is set initially. To change the job, perform the
following procedure. 
Move the cursor to the job name and press [SELECT]. The JOB LIST
window appears. Select the desired job.
B. STEP SECTION (Start Step  End Step)

Specifies the step section of the source job. All the steps are set initially.
If there is no step in the source job, “***” is displayed. To change the
section, perform the following procedure. 
Move the cursor to the step section indication and press [SELECT].
The input buffer line appears. Input the step number and press
[ENTER].
C. DESTINATION JOB
Specifies the converted job. If this is not specified ( “********” is
displayed), the source job is overwritten with a job after conversion. If
the converted job is specified, the source job is copied and converted.
To change the job, perform the following procedure. 
Move the cursor to the converted job name indication and press
[SELECT]. The character input line appears. The source job name is
displayed in the input line. To enter a job name without using the source
job name, press [CANCEL] and then input a job name.
D. COORDINATES
Selects the conversion coordinates. Move the cursor to the coordinates
name and press [SELECT]. The selection dialog box appears. Select
the desired coordinates. 
When the user coordinates are selected, the input buffer line appears.
Input the desired user coordinate number and press [ENTER].
E. BASE POINT
Calculates the difference by the two teaching points as a shift value.
6-31 271 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
F. SHIFT VALUE
The axis shown is varied according to the setting of “4. coordinates”
above.
Move the cursor to the input box and press [SELECT] to directly input
the shift value.
If the shift value is calculated by the two teaching points, the difference
is shown as a shift value.
6-32 272 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
6.4.3.2 Parallel Shift Job Conversion Operation

There are two methods for specifying the shift value.
• Directly input the shift value by numerical value.
• Calculate the shift value by teaching the original base point and
converted base point.
The method using position variables by parameter setting is

SUPPLE-
described in section 6.4.4 “Specifying the Shift Value by
MENT Position Variables” on page 6-39 other than above two
methods.
The following are the operation procedures by each setting of shift value
for parallel shift job conversion.
 Numerical Value Input

2. Select {JOB}.
3. Select {UTILITY} under the pull-down menu.
4. Select {PARALLEL SHIFT JOB}.
– The PARALLEL SHIFT JOB window appears.
5. Specify the conversion items.

– Specify each item.
6-33 273 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
6. Select the shift value to be set.

7. Type the shift value using the Numeric keys.

8. Press [ENTER].
– The shift value is set.
9. Display the PARALLEL SHIFT JOB window. Select “EXECUTE”.

– The confirmation dialog box appears when the converted job is not
specified. Select “YES” then the conversion is executed.
– The JOB CONTENT window appears when the conversion is
completed.
6-34 274 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
– When “CANCEL“ is selected, the display goes back to the JOB

CONTENT window without executing conversion.
NOTE If an alarm occurs during conversion, conversion is

suspended.
6-35 275 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
 Calculation by Teaching

2. Select {JOB}.

6. Display the PARALLEL SHIFT JOB window. Select “TEACH
SETTING” in the item of “BASE POINT”.
– The BASE POINT window appears.
7. Select “BASE POINT(SRC)”.

8. Move the manipulator to the original base point by the axis keys.
6-36 276 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD

– The original base point is set.
10. Select “BASE POINT(DEST)”.

11. Move the manipulator to the converted base point by the axis keys.
– The conversion base point is set.
13. Touch “EXECUTE”.

– The difference is calculated by the two teaching points and set as a
shift value.
6-37 277 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
14. Display the PARALLEL SHIFT JOB window. Select “EXECUTE”.

– The confirmation dialog box appears when the converted job is not
specified. Select “YES” then the conversion is executed.
– The JOB CONTENT window appears when the conversion is
completed.

suspended.
6-38 278 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
6.4.4 Specifying the Shift Value by Position Variables

The shift value can be specified using position variables by parameter
settings.
Parameter S2C652: SHIFT VALUE FOR PARALLEL SHIFT JOB

CONVERSION
0: Shift value by numeral/teaching (Initial setting)
1: Position variable shift value
6.4.4.1 Window Display
A
B
C
D
E
A. FILE NO.
Specifies position variables.
B. SHIFT JOB NAME

The job which was shown in the JOB CONTENT window is set initially. 
To change the job, perform the following procedure.
Move the cursor to the conversion job name and press [SELECT]. The
JOB LIST window appears. Move the cursor to the desired job and
press [SELECT]. The PARALLEL SHIFT JOB window reappears, and
the job name which was selected is shown.
C. MODE
Specifies the conversion mode.
SINGLE (INDEPENDENT JOB CONVERSION)
Only the selected job is converted even if the selected job includes the
jobs called by JUMP or CALL instructions. Related jobs are not
converted.
RELATIVE (RELATIVE JOB CONVERSION)
Both the selected job and all the related jobs (the jobs called by JUMP
or CALL instructions) are converted.
For details of each conversion mode, refer to section 6.4.4.2 “Jobs
Targeted for Conversion” .
6-39 279 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
D. COORDINATES
Selects the conversion coordinates. 
Move the cursor to the coordinates name and press [SELECT]. The
selection dialog box appears. Select the desired coordinates. 
When the user coordinates are selected, the input buffer line appears.
Input the desired user coordinate number and press [ENTER].
E. CONV. METHOD
Specifies the conversion methods of related jobs such as a coordinated
job with two manipulators or the system with multiple stations.
COMMON (COMMON SHIFT)
All the manipulators (or all the bases, or all the stations) are converted
by the same shift value.
EACH (INDIVIDUAL SHIFT)
Each manipulator (or each base, or each station) is converted
separately by different shift values.
For details of each conversion method, refer to section 6.4.4.3
“Conversion of Coordinated Jobs” on page 6-42.
6-40 280 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
6.4.4.2 Jobs Targeted for Conversion

There are two ways to specify the job to be converted as described in the
following:
• Independent Job Conversion 

Only the selected job is converted even if the selected job includes
the jobs called by JUMP or CALL instructions. Related jobs are not
converted.
SELECTED JOB Converted

(EDIT JOB)
JOB JOB
Related jobs are
not converted.
JOB JOB JOB JOB
• Related Job Conversion 

Both the selected job and all the related jobs (the jobs called by
JUMP or CALL instructions) are converted.
SELECTED JOB
(EDIT JOB)
Converted
JOB JOB
JOB JOB JOB JOB
6-41 281 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
6.4.4.3 Conversion of Coordinated Jobs

There are two ways to convert a related job such as a coordinated job with
two manipulators or the system with multiple stations as described in the
following:
 Common Shift
All the manipulators (or all the bases, or all the stations) are converted by
the same shift value.
Coordinated job with R1+R2
The system with multiple stations
 Individual Shift
Each manipulator (or each base, or each station) is converted separately
by different shift values.
Coordinated job with R1+R2
6-42 282 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
The system with multiple stations
 Variables used in an individual shift
Be sure to use the variables of which numbers are

NOTE consecutive after the selected number. The variables of
which numbers are not consecutive are unable to be
selected.
Example 1) When selecting P010 for a coordinated job with R1 + R2:

Use P010 for R1.
Use P011 for R2.
JOB R1
JOB R2
P010 P011
6-43 283 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
Example 2) When selecting EX005 for multiple jobs with four stations:
Use EX005 for S1.
Use EX006 for S2.
Use EX007 for S3.
Use EX008 for S4.
JOB S1 JOB S2 JOB S3 JOB S4
EX005 EX006 EX007 EX008
 Relation between variables and jobs for conversion in an individual

shift
 In the case of independent job conversion:

• Coordinated job with R1 + R2 
Different shift values can be set for each manipulator and base.
Variables
P001 BP001
JOB For R1 For base R1
R1 + R2
P002 P002
For R2 For base R2
• Job with R (+ S)

Use one variable for a job with one manipulator.
JOB Variables
P001 BP001
R For base R1
For R1
6-44 284 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
 In the case of related job conversion:

• Different shift values can be set for each manipulator, base, and
station.
In a system with R1, R2, and S1 to S12:

Variables
P001 BP001
Job without For R1 For base R1
group axes
P002
P002
For R2
For base R2
R1 + R2 R1 R2 S1 S12
EX001
For S1
EX002
For S1
EX0012
For S1
6.4.4.4 Operation Procedure

The following is the operation procedure for the parallel shift job
conversion using position variables.
1. Set the parameter.
– Set the parameter S2C652 (SHIFT VALUE FOR PARALLEL SHIFT
JOB CONVERSION) to 1 (Position variable shift value).
2. Set the position variable.
– Specify a position variable in advance when setting a shift value by
position variables.
– For the setting of position variables, refer to section 3.9.4 “User
Variables” on page 3-77.
4. Select {JOB}.
6-45 285 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD


– Select “EXECUTE” then the parallel shift job conversion is executed.
The JOB CONTENT window appears when the conversion is
completed.

suspended.
NOTE Specify the position variable in advance when using the

setting value as a shift value.
6-46 286 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
6.5 PAM Function
6.5 PAM Function

The function for position adjustment during playback (PAM: Position
Adjustment by Manual) allows position adjustment by simple operations
while observing the motion of the manipulator and without stopping the
manipulator. Positions can be adjusted in both teach mode and play
mode.
The following data can be adjusted by key input from the programming
pendant.
• Teaching Point (Position)

• Teaching Point (Posture angle)
• Operation Speed
• Position Level
6.5.1.1 Input Ranges for Adjustment Data

The input ranges for adjustment data are indicated in the following table.
Data Input Range

Number of Steps for Adjustment Up to 10 steps can be adjusted at the same
time.
Position Adjustment Range Unit: mm, valid to two decimal places,
(X, Y, Z) maximum ±10 mm
Posture Angle Adjustment Range Unit: deg, valid to two decimal places,
(Rx, Ry, Rz) maximum ±10 deg
Speed Adjustment Range (V) Unit: %, valid to two decimal places,
maximum ±50%
PL Adjustment Range 0 to 8
Adjustment Coordinates Robot coordinates, base coordinates, tool
coordinates, user coordinates (Default
coordinates: robot coordinates)
The input ranges for adjustment data can be changed by the

following parameters:
• S3C1098: Position adjustment range (unit: 0.001 mm)
SUPPLE- • S3C1099: Speed adjustment range (unit: 0.01%)
MENT
• S3C1100: Adjustment coordinate specification
• S3C1102: Posture angle adjustment range (unit: 0.01 deg)
For details, refer to chapter 8 "Parameter".
6-47 287 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
6.5 PAM Function
• Base axis and station axis data cannot be adjusted.

• Adjustment when a TCP instruction is executed is
performed by adjusting the data of the selected tool.
• When the coordinates for adjustment are user
coordinates, an error occurs if teaching has not been
performed in the user coordinates.
NOTE
• If an attempt is made to adjust “PL” when there is no “PL”
in the step subject to the adjustment, an error occurs.
• Position variable and reference point steps cannot be
adjusted. An error occurs if adjustment is attempted.
• An attempt to adjust the speed at the step that has no
speed tag causes an error.
6-48 288 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
6.5 PAM Function
6.5.2 Operating Methods
6.5.2.1 Setting Adjustment Data

2. Select {JOB}.
– The JOB CONTENT window (in the teach mode) or the PLAYBACK
window (in the playback mode) appears.
4. Select {PAM}.
– The PAM window appears.
A
B G
C
5. Set adjustment data.

– Set adjustment data.
– A. Job 
Set the job name to be adjusted. 
Line up the cursor and press [SELECT] to display the JOB LIST
window. 
Move the cursor to the desired job and press [SELECT] to set the
adjusted job.
– B. Status 
Shows the status of adjustment in the PAM function. 
“NOT DONE” appears when adjustment is not executed. “DONE”
appears when the execution of adjustment is completed.
– C. Input Coord 
Set the desired coordinates. 
Line up the cursor and press [SELECT] to display the selection
dialog box. 
Move the cursor to the desired coordinate system and press
[SELECT] to set the input coordinates.
– D. Step Number 
Set the step number to be adjusted. 
Line up the cursor and press [SELECT] to display the number input
buffer line. 
Input the step number and press [ENTER] to set the value.
– E. XYZ Coordinate Adjustment 
Set the direction and amount of the X, Y, and Z coordinates. 
Line up the cursor with the data to be adjusted and press [SELECT]
6-49 289 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
6.5 PAM Function
to display the number input buffer line. 

Input the number data and press [ENTER] to set the adjusted data.
– F. Rx, Ry, Rz Coordinate Adjustment 
Set the direction and amount of the Rx, Ry and Rz posture
angles. 
Line up the cursor with the data to be adjusted and press [SELECT]
to display the number input buffer line. 
– G. V Coordinate Adjustment 
Set the speed. 
Line up the cursor and press [SELECT] to display the number input
buffer line. 
– H. PL 
The position level of the job to be adjusted for the step set in “4. Step
Number” is displayed, and the data can be modified. 
When the position level is not decided, [-] is displayed, and cannot
be set. 
To modify the position level, line up the cursor, press [SELECT],
input the number value and press [ENTER].
6-50 290 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
6.5 PAM Function
6.5.2.2 Executing the Adjustment
 Executing the Adjustment
1. Touch “COMPLETE” on the screen.

– In the teach mode, the job adjustment can be immediately executed.
In the play mode, the job can be adjusted just before execution
(move operation).
– When the job adjustment is completed, the set data shown in the
PAM window is cleared. However, if the step’s adjusted position
exceeds the software limit, an error occurs, and the data in only that
step cannot be cleared on the window.
6-51 291 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
6.5 PAM Function
 Cancelling the Execution
In the play mode, during the adjustment wait status, “STOP” is displayed
in the PAM window. To cancel the adjustment process, touch “STOP” on
the screen. Also, if the following occurs before executing, the process is
automatically cancelled.
• If the mode is changed
• If an alarm occurs
• If the power is turned OFF
 Clearing Data
If there is a mistake made when adjusting the data, or if the adjustment of

the step becomes unnecessary, the data can be cleared.
1. Move the cursor to the step of the data to be cleared.
Steps in which
data is to be
cleared.
2. Select {EDIT} under the pull-down menu.

3. Select {LINE CLEAR}.
– The line data is cleared.
6-52 292 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
6.5 PAM Function
 Copying Data
To input the same data as those set previously, perform the following
operation.
1. Move the cursor to the line to be copied.
3. Select {LINE COPY}.

4. Move the cursor to the line where the item is to be copied.
6. Select {LINE PASTE}.
– The desired data is copied to the line.
– However, if the line where the data is to be copied does not have a
speed value or PL value, it cannot be copied.
 Canceling the Adjustment
After the position adjustment in the PAM function, the job can be returned
to the status before adjustment only during teaching. In this case, follow
the procedures below.
Note that the job cannot be undone during playback.
1. Move the cursor to the line to be copied.
– After the position adjustment, the status shows “DONE”.
6-53 293 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
6.5 PAM Function

3. Select {UNDO} under the pull-down menu.

4. Select “YES“
– The status turns “NOT DONE“ and the job is undone when selecting
“YES“. The status does not change and the job is not undone when
selecting “NO”.
6-54 294 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
6.6 Mirror Shift Function

With the mirror shift function, a job is converted to the job in which the path
is symmetrical to that of the original job. This conversion can be
performed for the specified coordinate among the X-Y, X-Z, or Y-Z
coordinate of the robot coordinates and the user coordinates.
The mirror shift function is classified into the following three: the pulse
mirror-shift function, the robot-coordinates mirror-shift function, and the
user-coordinates mirror-shift function.
Mirror shift
The original path The converted path

before the mirror shift after the mirror shift
6-55 295 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
6.6.2 Pulse Mirror-shift Function

With the pulse mirror-shift function, the mirror shift is performed by
reversing the sign (+/-) for the axes which are specified with the parameter
in advance.
R-ax is R-axi s
T-axis T-axi s
S -axi s S-axi s
6.6.2.1 Parameter Setting

Using the following parameter, specify the axes for which the sign is to be
reversed.
S1CxG065: Mirror Shift Sign Reversing Axis Specification
The 1st axis (0:Not reversed, 1:Reversed)
The 7th axis
6.6.2.2 Object Job

Jobs without group axes and relative jobs cannot be converted.
6.6.2.3 Group Axes Specification

When specifying the group axes for the converted job in a multiple group
axes system, the group axes specified in the original and converted jobs
must be the same.
• Robot Axis: Same model
• Base Axis: Same configuration
• Station Axis: Same configuration
6.6.2.4 Position Variables

Position variables are not converted by the mirror shift function.
6-56 296 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
6.6.3 Robot-coordinates Mirror-shift Function

With the robot-coordinates mirror-shift function, the mirror shift is
performed on the X-Z coordinate of the robot coordinates.
Z Z
Y Y
X X
6.6.3.1 Object Job

Jobs without group axes cannot be converted.

must be the same.

• Mirror shift conversion for the base axis is not performed

with the robot-coordinates mirror shift function.
• With the robot-coordinates mirror shift function, mirror shift
NOTE conversion for the station axis is performed by reversing
the sign for the axes specified with the parameter
S1CxG065 "Mirror Shift Sign Reversing Axis
Specification" .
6-57 297 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
6.6.4 User-coordinates Mirror-shift Function

With the user-coordinates mirror-shift function, the mirror shift is
performed on the X-Z, X-Y, or Y-Z coordinate of the specified user
coordinates.
Z Z
Y Y
X X
6.6.4.1 Object Job

Jobs without group axes cannot be converted.

must be the same.

With the user-coordinates mirror shift function, mirror shift

NOTE conversion for the station axis is performed by reversing the
sign for the axes specified with the parameter S1CxG065
"Mirror Shift Sign Reversing Axis Specification".
6-58 298 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
6.6.5 Notes on the Mirror Shift Function

For manipulators, such as a polishing wrist, whose center of S-axis
rotation and T-axis rotation are offset in the X-coordinate direction, the
mirror shift cannot correctly be performed by the pulse mirror-shift
function. Be sure to use the robot-coordinates mirror-shift function or use
the user-coordinates mirror-shift function with the user coordinates
specified on the center of the T-axis rotation.
(1) Using the Robot-coordinates Mirror-shift Function 

When the robot-coordinates mirror-shift function is performed, the
mirror shift is performed on the X-Z coordinate of the robot coordi-
nates. The path of the converted job is as follows:
Robot-coordinates Mirror-shift Conversi on
After conversion Before conversion
(2) Using the User-coordinates Mirror-shift Function 

To use the user-coordinates mirror-shift function, specify the user
coordinates on the center of T-axis rotation in advance.
User-coordi nates Mirror-shift Conversi on
User coordi nates
After conversi on Before conversi on
6-59 299 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
6.6.6 Operation Procedures
6.6.6.1 Calling Up the JOB CONTENT Window

Call up the JOB CONTENT window of the job to be converted as follows:
 For Current Job

2. Select {JOB}.
 For Another Job

6.6.6.2 Mirror Shift Conversion

1. Display the JOB CONTENT window.
– The MIRROR SHIFT window appears.
3. Select {MIRROR SHIFT}.
– The MIRROR SHIFT window appears.
6-60 300 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
6.6.6.3 Explanation of the Mirror Shift Window
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
A. SOURCE JOB
Selects the conversion source job.
To select another job to be converted, move the cursor to the name and
press [SELECT] to call up the list of jobs. Select the desired job and
press [SELECT].
B. SOURCE CTRL GROUP

Displays the control group of the conversion source job.
C. STEP SELECTION
Specifies the steps to be converted. From the first step to the last step
of the selected job are specified as initial value.
D. DESTINATION JOB
Specifies the converted job name. To enter the name, move the cursor
to the name and press [SELECT]. The name of the conversion source
job is displayed in the input line as initial value. When "***" is displayed,
the name for the converted job is to be the same as that of the
conversion source job.
E. DEST CTRL GROUP

Selects the control group for the converted job. When the destination
job name is entered, the same control group as the conversion source
job is automatically set. To change it, move the cursor to the control
group and press [SELECT] to call up the selection dialog box.
F. COORDINATES
Specifies the coordinates used for conversion.
"PULSE": Executes the pulse mirror-shift conversion.
"ROBOT": Executes the mirror-shift conversion on the basis of the
cartesian coordinates.
"USER": Executes the mirror-shift conversion on the basis of the
specified user coordinates.
6-61 301 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
G. USER COORD NO.

Specifies the user coordinates number when "USER" is selected in “6.
COORDINATES”.
This item cannot be set when "PULSE" or "ROBOT" is selected in “6.
COORDINATES”.
H. TARGET
Specifies the coordinate where conversion is to be done when "ROBOT"
or "USER" is selected in “6. COORDINATES”. "XY", "XZ", or "YZ" can
be selected. Always specify "XZ" for "ROBOT".
I. EXECUTE
Mirror shift conversion is executed when pressing “EXECUTE” or
[ENTER]. A job is created with the name of conversion source job when
a job after conversion is not entered.
6-62 302 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
6.7 Multi Window Function

Multi window function divides the general-purpose display area up to 4
windows and shows them simultaneously.
There are seven dividing patterns to be optionally choose as necessary.
6.7.2 Setting the Dividing Pattern of the General-Purpose Display Area

The dividing pattern of the general purpose display area can be changed
in the window exclusive for setting.
Table 6-3: Display the dividing Pattern (Sheet 1 of 2)

Number of the window Dividing Pattern
1 1 window
2 2 windows
1 2
3 2 windows
1
2
4 3 windows
1
2 3
6-63 303 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
Table 6-3: Display the dividing Pattern (Sheet 2 of 2)

Number of the window Dividing Pattern
5 3 windows
1 2
3
6 3 windows
1 2
3
7 4 windows
1 2
3 4
6.7.2.1 Calling Up and Operating Methods of the Display Dividing Pattern Setting
Window
Call up the dividing pattern setting window.
1. Select [DEIPLAY SETUP] -[CHANGE WINDOW PATTERN] under the
main menu.
2. Dividing pattern setting window appears in the center of the display.
6-64 304 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
In the dividing pattern setting window, set the dividing pattern of the
1. Key operation 1:

When “Window Pattern” is focused in the window, the option of the
dividing pattern shifts as cursor moves upper or lower.
– Choose the desired dividing patter from the “Window Pattern”.
2. Key operation 2:

Press Select key when “Window Pattern” is focused. The list of the
dividing patterns appears. The list closes and a pattern is set after
choosing the desired pattern and press “Select” key.
6-65 305 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
3. Touching operation:
The desired pattern can be chosen by touching a pattern in the
window.
– Choose a pattern from the dividing pattern buttons.
4. Touch [OK] button or move the cursor to it and press [SELECT] key.
– The dividing pattern setting window closes and the chosen pattern
(chosen with the procedure either 1, 2 or 3) appears.
6-66 306 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
Cancel the setting

1. Touch [CANCEL] button or move the cursor to it and press [SELECT]
key.
– Dividing pattern setting window closes. The dividing pattern in the
general-purpose display area doesn’t change.
SUPPLE-
The cursor moves by pressing [AREA] key in the dividing
MENT pattern setting window.
6-67 307 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
6.7.3 Displaying the Multi Window
6.7.3.1 Multi Window Mode and Single Window Mode

Specifying more than two-window pattern in the dividing pattern setting
window shows plural windows simultaneously in the general-purpose
display area.
This is called multi window mode.
On the other hand, a single active window can be displayed with pressing
[SHIFT] + [MULTI] key operation.
This is called single window mode.
Pressing [SHIFT] + [MULTI] key operation switches the display from single
window mode to multi window mode. The mode can be changed as
necessary.
6.7.3.2 Displaying the Status of Plural (more than two) Window Dividing Pattern
Setting
When more than two windows are displayed as a desired pattern,

appears on the upper part of the window whereas it doesn't appear when
a single window is displayed.
6-68 308 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
6.7.3.3 Displaying of Active Window and Non-Active Window

When a display is in the multi window mode, one window should be active
and the rest is (are) non-active. The title of the active window is displayed
in deep blue and non-active window is in light blue.
The active window is the subject of key operation.
Also, the menu area or the operational buttons under the general-purpose
displaying area are displayed for the operation of the active window.
6.7.3.4 Limited Matters in Multi Window Mode

The content of window when it is in multi window mode can be different
from the same window when it is in single window mode because of its
limited size. The content becomes normal when the window is displayed
in the single window mode.
• The input buffer in the JOB window is displayed only when the
window is active.
• No auxiliary window appears.
6-69 309 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
6.7.4 Operation of Multi Window
6.7.4.1 Switching of Multi Window Mode and Single Window Mode

When more than two windows are displayed as a dividing pattern of the
multi window, it is possible to switch multi window mode to single window
mode.
1. Set the mode of the general-purpose displaying area to multi window
mode.
2. Press [SHIFT]+[MULTI] keys.

– Active window is displayed under single window mode in the
general-purpose window displaying area.
6-70 310 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
3. Press [SHIFT]+[MULTI] keys in step 2 status.

– The general-purpose display area changes to already set pattern in
multi window mode.
6-71 311 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
6.7.4.2 Switching of Active Window

Switch the active window in the multi window displaying mode.
1. Set the mode of the general-purpose displaying area to multi window
mode.
2. Key Operation:
Press [MULT] key
– The window to be active shifts. The active window shifts in the order
mentioned in section 6.7.2 “Setting the Dividing Pattern of the
General-Purpose Display Area” on page 6-63.
(12341······)
3. Touching Operation:
Touch the window to be active.
– The touched window becomes active.
6-72 312 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
Switch the active window in the single window mode.

1. Set the mode of the general-purpose displaying area to single window
mode.
2. Press [MULT] key

– The following windows are displayed in the order mentioned in
section 6.7.2 “Setting the Dividing Pattern of the General-Purpose
Display Area” on page 6-63. (12341······)
During the period before menu is selected when alarm

NOTE occurred, the active window cannot be switched if alarm
window is displayed, direct open is ON or a window is
displayed by key allocation operation.
6-73 313 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
6.7.5 Switching the Axis Operation Control Group

The appropriate control group for axis operation is automatically selected
in accordance with the window status or its operation in the active window.
Due to this function, when the general-purpose display area is in multi
window mode, the control group for axis operation can vary depending on
the window which is active at the time.
To avoid unexpected control group to function and for the better safeness,
the change of the control group with the [MULTI] key operation or touching
operation when switching the active window is notified to the user.
The change of the control group for axis operation due to

SUPPLE-
other than [MULTI] key operation or touching operation; due
MENT to the switch of the window by selecting main menu, is not
notified to the user.
6.7.5.1 S2C540 “Choosing Method of Notifying the Change of Axis Operation

Control Group when Switching the Active Window”
The method to notify the change of control group for axis operation due to
the switch of active window can be changed with parameter.
• Setting Value:0
– Keep displaying the message in the human interface display area
for three seconds.
– Message “Control group switched by switching the active window” is
displayed.
6-74 314 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
• Setting Value:1
– Call up the confirmation dialog box to confirm the switch of the
active window.
– Message “Control group will be changed. Switch the active
window?” is displayed
– “Yes” ······ After switching the window to be active, a message
appears in the human interface display area.
– “No” ······ Cancel the window to be active.
• Setting Value:2
– Do not notify the control group change.
6-75 315 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
6.8 Simple Menu Function
6.8 Simple Menu Function 1)
6.8.1 Simple Menu

This function enables users to create “USER DEFINITION” menu by
registering the layouts (screen dividing patterns and screen to be
displayed) on the general-purpose display area.
Eight layout patterns can be registered to the user definition menu at
maximum. 
The registered layout patterns can be easily called up with the buttons of
simple menu.
1 Simple menu function is available in DS1.50-00 version or later.
6-76 316 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
6.8.2 Registering the Layout Patters to User Definition Menu
6.8.2.1 Register with {REGIST} Button

Register the layout patterns by using {RESIST} button which is in “USER
DEFINITION” menu.
1. Press [SIMPLE MENU] key or select {Simple Menu} button on the
display while the layout pattern to be registered is on the general-
purpose display area.
– “USER DEFINITION” menu appears.
2. Press {REGIST} button.

– “USER DEFINITION” menu closes.
– The message “Do you register a current layout?” appears in the
confirmation dialog box.
3. Select {YES}.
– The layout is registered and the dialog box closes.
*It will not be registered when {NO} is selected.
6-77 317 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
6.8.2.2 Register by Key Operation

Use the programming pendant keys to register the layout patterns to
“USER DEFINITION” menu.
1. Press [SHIFT] + [SIMPLE MENU] keys while the layout pattern to be
registered is on the general-purpose display area.
– The message “Do you register a current layout?” appears in the
confirmation dialog box.
2. Select {YES}.
– The layout is registered and the dialog box closes.
*It will not be registered when {NO} is selected.
6-78 318 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
6.8.2.3 Conditions to Register the Layout

There are some cases that the layout patterns cannot be registered to
“USER DEFINITION” menu.
Followings are the conditions and the messages that the layout is refused
to register.
Condition Message
1 when the layout is already This layout is already registered.
registered.
2 when eight layouts are already There is not an undefined domain.

registered.
3 When the registering layout The screen which I cannot register is

includes the window which cannot included [W1W2W3W4]
be started up from the main menu.
(The number W1 to W4 indicates the

windows which are actually displayed
on the general-purpose display area,
however, the highlighted numbered
window cannot be registered.
*For the layout of 1 to 4,refer to Table
6-3 "Display the dividing Pattern" on
page 6-63.
4 When a single window is displayed Cannot register at current operation
under the multi window mode. mode.
The screens which cannot be started up from the main menu

are impossible to register. 
SUPPLE- Also, the layout of the screens that are called up from {FD/
MENT
PC CARD} or ladder editor (optional function) cannot be
registered.
6.8.2.4 The Displayed Layout Name

After a layout pattern is registered to “USER DEFINITION” menu, it is
named in accordance with the status of the general-purpose display area
when the layout pattern is created. 
Refer to the followings for the details.
Status of general- Name registered to “USER DEFINITION”
purpose display area Menu
1 Single window mode (Same as the sub menu in main menu)
2 Multi window mode Layout -n (“n” should be a number from 0 to 7)
It is possible to change the name even after the name is registered. Refer
to section 6.8.4.3 “Change the Name of Registered Layout Name” on
page 6-84.
6-79 319 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
6.8.3 Calling Up of the Registered Layout
6.8.3.1 Calling up
Call up the registered layout with the following procedures.
1. Press [SIMPLE MENU] key or select {Simple Menu} button at the
lower-left on the display.
– “USER DEFINITION” menu appears.
2. Select and press a button on “USER DEFINITION” menu to display a

layout to be called up.
– The selected layout appears on the general-purpose display area.
6-80 320 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
6.8.3.2 Conditions when Calling Up the Layout

There are some cases where the layout cannot be called up depending on
the conditions when calling up.
Followings are the conditions and the messages that the layout is refused
to be called up.
Condition Message
1 When all the There are no windows to display within the chosen
registered layout layout.
windows cannot be
displayed due to
security mode or its
purpose of use.
When undisplayed screen is included in the layout to be called up due to

above mentioned reasons, the message, “Please selected a Main Menu”
appears to the said screen.
6.8.4 Editing “USER DEFINITION” Menu

Editing procedures of “changing the registered name” and “deleting the
registered item” are possible to the items registered to “USER
DEFINITION MENU” window.
Those editions are executed on “USER DEFINITION MENU” window.
Displaying of “USER DEFINITION MENU” window is possible in the
operation mode or more and editing of this menu is possible in the editing
mode or more.
6.8.4.1 Displaying “UNSER DEFINITION” Window

Displays “UNSER DEFINITION MENU” Window with {EDIT} button.
1. Press [SIMPLE MENU] key or select {Simple Menu} button at the
lower-left on the display.
– “USER DEFINITION MENU” menu appears.
6-81 321 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
2. Press {EDIT} button.

– “USER DEFINITION MENU” window appears on the active window
in the general-purpose display area.
6.8.4.2 Displaying “USER DEFINITION MENU” window Under Main Menu

Displays “USER DEFINITION MENU” window under main menu.
1. Select {SYSTEM INFO} under the main menu.
– {SYSTEM INFO} sub menu appears.
2. Select {USER DEFINITION}.
6-82 322 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
– “USER DEFINITION MENU” window appears on the active window

in the general-purpose display area.
6-83 323 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
6.8.4.3 Change the Name of Registered Layout Name

The registered layout names can be changed.
1. Display “USER DEFINITION MENU” window.
2. Move the cursor key to the layout name to be changed and press
[SELECT] key.
– The software key pad for inputting letters appears.
6-84 324 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
3. Input the layout name, then press [ENTER] key or {ENTER} button.
– The software key pad closes.
– The name changes.
* If complete the software key pad operation with [CANCEL] key or

{CANCEL} button, the name editing operation is also canceled.
SUPPLE-
When the bilingual function is valid, name in each 
MENT language can be set.
6-85 325 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
6.8.4.4 Deleting the Layout

The layout registered to “USER DEFINITION” menu can be deleted.
2. Move the cursor key to the layout to be deleted and press [SHIFT] +
[SELECT] keys. (multiple selection possible)
– “●” mark is indicated at the head of the selected line.
3. Select {DATA} in the menu.

6-86 326 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
4. Select {DELETE MENU}.

– The confirmation dialog box with a message “Delete? Layout -4
(layout name)” appears to the line marked with “●”.
5. Select {YES} in the dialog box.

– The marked layout is deleted.
* The layout will not be deleted if {NO} in the dialog box is selected.
6-87 327 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
6.8.4.5 Delete All Layout

All layouts registered to “USER DEFINITION” menu can be deleted at a
time.
2. Select {EDIT} in the menu.
3. Select {SELECT ALL}.

– “●” mark is indicated to all the registered layouts.
6-88 328 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
4. Select {DATA} in the menu.

5. Select {DELETE MENU}.

– The confirmation dialog box with a message “Delete? Layout -0
(layout name)” appears to the lines marked with “●”.

– The marked layouts are deleted.
* The layout will not be deleted if {NO} in the dialog box is selected.
Move the cursor to the line with “●” mark, and press [SHIFT] +
SUPPLE-
[SELECT] keys to disappear “●” mark.
MENT When select {EDIT} - {CANCEL SELECT} under the pull down
menu to cancel select and “●” marks disappear.
6-89 329 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
6.8.5 Save/Load (to external memory devices) the User Definition Menu
Data
The data registered to “USER DEFINITION” menu (user menu data) can
be saved to and loaded from the external memory device.
In this case, the name of the file is “USERMENU.DAT”.
6.8.5.1 Saving the Data

User menu data can be saved at the security level of operation mode or
more.
1. Select {EX. MOMORY} under the main menu.
– {EX. MOMORY} sub menu appears.
2. Select {SAVE}.
– {SAVE} window of external memory device appears.
3. Select {FILE/GENERAL DATA}.

– {FILE/GENERAL DATA} window of external memory device
appears.
6-90 330 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
4. Select {USER MENU DATA}.

– “” mark is indicated at the head of {USER MENU DATA}.
5. Press [ENTER].
– The confirmation dialog box with a message “SAVE” appears.

– {USER MENU DATA} is saved.
* It will not be saved if {NO} in the dialog box is selected.
6-91 331 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
6.8.5.2 Loading the Data

User menu data can be loaded at the security level of editing mode or
more.
1. Select {EX. MOMORY} under the main menu.
– {EX. MOMORY} sub menu appears.
2. Select {LOAD}.
– {LOAD} window of external memory device appears.
3. Select {FILE/GENERAL DATA}.

– {FILE/GENERAL DATA} window of external memory device
appears.
6-92 332 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
4. Select {USER MENU DATA}.

– “” mark is indicated at the head of {USER MENU DATA}.
5. Press [ENTER].
– The confirmation dialog box with a message “LOAD?” appears.

– {USER MENU DATA} is loaded.
* It will not be loaded if {NO} in the dialog box is selected.
6-93 333 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
6.9 Parameter Setting Function
6.9.1 Parameter Setting Function

Among the parameters explained in chapter 8 "Parameter", frequently
used parameters’ settings can be changed from the exclusive windows.
Those windows are sorted out depending on the parameters’ function as
shown below.
• TEACHING CONDITION SETTING

Teaching-relevant parameters are displayed.
• OPERATE CONDITION SETTING 
Mode switching/power-relevant parameters are displayed.
• OEPRATE ENABLE SETTING
ON/OFF of the manipulator-relevant parameters are displayed.
• FUNCTION ENABLE SETTING
Enable/unable of optional function-relevant parameters settings are
displayed.
• JOG CONDITION SETTING
Operation of the jog-relevant parameters are displayed.
• PLAYBACK CONDITION SETTING
Playback operation-relevant parameters are displayed.
• FUNCTIONAL CONDITION SETTING
Execution of each function-relevant parameters are displayed.
Select above mentioned menu from {SETUP} window under main menu.
6-94 334 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
Move the cursor key to select a menu, then the settings of the desired
parameters can be changed by one of the following three methods
according to its content.
• When there are two options.
The options alternate every time the select key is pressed.
• When there are three or more options.

A dialog box with the options appears. Select one to change the 
settings.
• When it requires to input a value.

Input a value using the Numeric keys and press [ENTER] to change
the settings.
6-95 335 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
6.9.2 Teaching Condition Setting

Select {SETUP}  {TEACHING CONDITION SETTING} to display the
following window.
• LANGUAGE LEVEL (S2C211)

Refer to section 8.3.0.13 “S2C211: LANGUAGE LEVEL” on page 8-
16.
Setting Parameter Value
Subset 0
Standard 1
Expanded 2
• INSTRUCTION INPUT LEARING (S2C214)

Refer to section 8.3.0.14 “S2C214: INSTRUCTION INPUT
LEARNING FUNCTION” on page 8-16.
Valid 0
Invalid 1
• MOVE INSTRUCTION SET POSITION (S2C206)

Refer to section 8.3.0.8 “S2C206: ADDITIONAL STEP POSITION”
on page 8-13.
Step 0
Line 1
6-96 336 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
• BUZZER WHEN POSITION TEACHING (S2C433)

Refer to section 8.3.0.43 “S2C433: POSITION TEACHING
BUZZER” on page 8-28.
Consider 0
Not 1
Consider
• STEP ONLY CHANGING (S2C203)

Refer to section 8.3.0.6 “S2C203: CHANGING STEP ONLY” on
page 8-13.
Permit 0
Prohibit 1
• RECT/CYL INDRICAL (S2C196)

Refer to section 8.3.0.2 “S2C196: SELECTION OF CARTESIAN/
CYLINDRICAL” on page 8-12.
Cyl. 0
Rectangle 1
• TOOL NO. SWITCH (S2C431)

Refer to section 8.3.0.42 “S2C431: TOOL NO. SWITCHING” on
page 8-28.
Prohibit 0
Permit 1
• TOOL NO. INTERLOCK FOR STEP ENTRY(S2C234)

Refer to section 8.3.0.29 “S2C234: STEP REGISTRATION AT
TOOL NO. CHANGE” on page 8-20.
Permit 0
Prohibit 1
• POS. TEACH ONLY JOG CONTROL GROUP (S2C320)

Refer to section 8.2.0.15 “S2C320: CONTROLLED GROUP JOB
TEACHING POSITION CHANGE” on page 8-7.
Prohibit 0
Permit 1
6-97 337 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
• JOB UNDELETE FUNCTION(S2C413)

Refer to section 8.3.0.39 “S2C410: WORD REGISTRATION
FUNCTION / WORD EDITING FUNCTION SPECIFICATION” on
page 8-25.
Invalid 0
Valid 1
• INDEPENDENT :MOTION OF NEXT/TEST(S2C231)

Refer to section 8.6.0.3 “S2C231: OPERATION METHOD AT FWD/
BWD OPERATION OR TEST RUN BY INDEPENDENT CONTROL”
on page 8-45.
This appears only when the independent control is valid.
Single 0
All 1
• BWD OPERATION NO GROUP AXIS (S2C688 d0 bit)

• BWD OPERATION CONCURRENT JOB (S2C688 d1 bit)
Refer to section 8.6.0.10 “S2C688: EXECUTION OF “BWD”
OPERATION” on page 8-48.
This appears only when the independent control is valid.
Setting Bit Status
Permit 0
Prohibit 1
• STATION TWIN (S2C434)

Refer to section 8.3.0.44 “S2C434: JOB LINKING DESIGNATION
(When Twin Synchronous Function Used)” on page 8-28.
This appears only when the STATION TWIN SYNCHRONOUS
JOB is valid.
Invalid 0
Valid 1
• CLEARANCE TEACHING METHOD (S2C612)

This appears only when it is for motor gun use.
Upper Tip 0
Lower Tip 1
Gun Close 2
6-98 338 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
6.9.3 Operation Condition Setting

Select {SETUP}  {OPERATE CONDITION SETTING} to display the
following window.
• SPEED DATA INPUT FORM (S2C221)

Refer to section 8.3.0.21 “S2C221: SPEED DATA INPUT FORM” on
page 8-18.
mm/sec 0
cm/min 1
inch/min 2
mm/min 3
• CYCLE SWITCH IN TEACH MODE (S2C313)

Refer to section 8.3.0.33 “S2C313: TEACH MODE FIRST CYCLE
MODE” on page 8-21.
Step 0
Cycle 1
Auto 2
None 3
6-99 339 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
• CYCLE SWITCH IN PLAY MODE (S2C314)

Refer to section 8.3.0.34 “S2C314: PLAY MODE FIRST CYCLE
Step 0
Cycle 1
Auto 2
None 3
• CYCLE SWITCH IN LOCAL MODE (S2C294)

Refer to section 8.3.0.31 “S2C294: LOCAL FIRST CYCLE MODE”
on page 8-20.
Step 0
Cycle 1
Auto 2
None 3
• CYCLE SWITCH IN REMOTE MODE (S2C293)

Refer to section 8.3.0.30 “S2C293: REMOTE FIRST CYCLE MODE”
on page 8-20.
Step 0
Cycle 1
Auto 2
None 3
• SET SYCLE ON POWER ON (S2C312)

Refer to section 8.3.0.32 “S2C312: POWER ON FIRST CYCLE
Step 0
Cycle 1
Auto 2
None 3
6-100 340 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
• SECURITY MODE WHEN POWER ON (S2C195)

Refer to section 8.3.0.1 “S2C195: SECURITY MODE WHEN
CONTROL POWER SUPPLY IS TURNED ON” on page 8-12.
Operation 0
Mode
Editing Mode 1
Management 2
Mode
• JOB STEP WHEN POWER ON (S2C215)

Refer to section 8.3.0.15 “S2C215: ADDRESS SETTING WHEN
CONTROL POWER IS TURNED ON” on page 8-16.
Power OFF 0
Initial 1
• GENERAL OUT KEEP WHEN POWER ON (S2C235)

Refer to section 8.5.0.1 “S2C235: USER OUTPUT RELAY WHEN
CONTROL POWER IS ON” on page 8-40.
Power OFF 0
Initial 1
6-101 341 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
6.9.4 Operate Enable Setting

Select {SETUP}  {OPERATE ENABLE SETTING} to display the
following window.
• EXTERNAL START (S2C219)

Refer to section 8.3.0.19 “S2C219: EXTERNAL START” on page 8-
17.
Setting Parameter Status
Permit 0
Prohibit 1
• PP START (S2C220)
Refer to section 8.3.0.20 “S2C220: PROGRAMMING PENDANT
START” on page 8-17.
Permit 0
Prohibit 1
• EXTERNAL MODE SWITCH (S2C225)

Refer to section 8.3.0.24 “S2C225: EXTERNAL MODE SWITCH” on
page 8-18.
Permit 0
Prohibit 1
6-102 342 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
• EXTERNAL CYCLE SWITCH (S2C227)

Refer to section 8.3.0.25 “S2C227: EXTERNAL CYCLE
SWITCHING” on page 8-18.
Permit 0
Prohibit 1
• PP CYCLE SWITCH (S2C228)

Refer to section 8.3.0.26 “S2C228: PROGRAMMING PENDANT
CYCLE SWITCHING” on page 8-19.
Permit 0
Prohibit 1
• EXTERNAL SERVO ON (S2C229 d0 bit)

• PP SERVO ON (S2C229 d1 bit)
• DSW SERVO ON (S2C229 d2 bit)
Refer to section 8.3.0.27 “S2C229: SERVO ON FROM EXTERNAL
PP PROHIBITION” on page 8-19.
Setting Bit Status
Permit 0
Prohibit 1
6-103 343 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
6.9.5 Function Enable Setting

Select {SETUP}  {FUNCTION ENABLE SETTING} to display the
following window.
• MASTER JOB CHANGE (S2C207)

Refer to section 8.3.0.9 “S2C207: MASTER JOB CHANGING
OPERATION” on page 8-14.
Permit 0
Prohibit 1
• RESERVED START (S2C222)

Refer to section 8.3.0.22 “S2C222: RESERVED START” on page 8-
18.
Permit 0
Prohibit 1
• RESERVED START JOB CHANGE (S2C209)

Refer to section 8.3.0.11 “S2C209: RESERVED WORK JOB
CHANGING OPERATION” on page 8-14.
Permit 0
Prohibit 1
6-104 344 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
• JOB SELECT WHEN REMOTE OR PLAY (S2C224)

Refer to section 8.3.0.23 “S2C224: JOB SELECTION AT REMOTE
FUNCTION (PLAY MODE)” on page 8-18.
Permit 0
Prohibit 1
• I/O-VARIABLE CUSTOMIZE FUNCTION (S2C397)

Refer to section 8.3.0.38 “S2C397: I/O VARIABLE CUSTOMIZE
FUNCTION” on page 8-24.
Invalid 0
Valid 1
• GENERAO I/O NAME DISP. ON JOB (S2C544)

Refer to section 8.3.0.46 “S2C544: I/O NAME DISPLAY FUNCTION
FOR JOB” on page 8-30.
Invalid 0
Valid 1
• ANTICIPATION FUNCTION (S2C646)

Refer to section 8.8.0.1 “S2C646: ANTICIPATOR FUNCTION” on
page 8-51.
Invalid 0
Valid 1
• ALL AXES ANGLE DISP FUNCTION (S2C684 d0 bit)

Refer to section 8.3.0.47 “S2C684:ALL AXES ANGLE DISPLAY
FUNCTION” on page 8-30.
Invalid 0
Valid 1
6-105 345 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
6.9.6 Jog Condition Setting

Select {SETUP}  {JOG CONDITION SETTING} to display the following
window.
• COORD SWITCH WHEN JOG OPERATION (S2C197)

Refer to section 8.3.0.3 “S2C197: COORDINATE SWITCHING
PROHIBITED” on page 8-12.
Tool & User OK 0
Tool NG 1
User NG 2
Tool & User NG 3
• MANUAL SPEED SAVE EVERY COORDS (S2C204)

Refer to section 8.3.0.7 “S2C204: MANUAL SPEED STORING FOR
EACH COORDINATE” on page 8-13.
Invalid 0
Valid 1
6-106 346 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
6.9.7 Playback Condition Setting

Select {SETUP}  {PLAYBACK CONDITION SETTING} to display the
following window.
• CHECK/MACHINE LOCK (S2C208)

Refer to section 8.3.0.10 “S2C208: CHECK AND MACHINE-LOCK
KEY OPERATION IN PLAY MODE” on page 8-14.
Permit 0
Prohibit 1
• MASTER CALLING UP (S2C210)

Refer to section 8.3.0.12 “S2C210: MASTER OR SUBMASTER
CALL OPERATION IN PLAY MODE” on page 8-15.
Permit 0
Prohibit 1
• INITIAL MOVE SPEED OF ROBOT (S2C217)

Refer to section 8.3.0.17 “S2C217: INITIAL OPERATION OF
MANIPULATOR” on page 8-17.
Special Play 0
Low Speed 1
6-107 347 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
• START METHOD AFTER ABSO OVER (S2C316)

Refer to section 8.3.0.35 “S2C316: START CONDITION AFTER
ALARM-4107 (“OUT OF RANGE (ABSO DATA)”)” on page 8-21.
Pos. Check 0
Low Speed 1
• SIGNAL NO. WHEN DROP VALUE OVER (S2C240)

Refer to section 8.5.0.7 “S4C240: USER OUTPUT NO. WHEN
MANIPULATOR DROP ALLOWABLE RANGE ERROR OCCURS”
on page 8-44.
6-108 348 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
6.9.8 Functional Condition Setting

Select {SETUP}  {FUNCTIONAL CONDITION SETTING} to display the
following window.
• COORDINATE (PAM) (S2C1100)

Refer to section 8.2.0.24 “S3C1098 to S3C1102: POSITION
CORRECTING FUNCTION DURING PLAYBACK” on page 8-11.
Base 0
Robot 1
Tool 2
User #1 3
:
User #63 65
• POSITION ADJUST RANGE (PAM) (S2C1098)

• SPEED ADJUST RANGE (PAM) (S2C1099)
• POSTURE ANGLE ADJUST RANGE (PAM) (S2C1102)
Refer to section 8.2.0.24 “S3C1098 to S3C1102: POSITION
CORRECTING FUNCTION DURING PLAYBACK” on page 8-11.
6-109 349 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
6.10 Jog Key Allocation
6.10.1 Jog Key Allocation Function

This function enables to operate external axis without switching control
groups by using operation keys of 7th-axis (E+, E-) and 8th-axis (8+,8-) on
the programing pendant after setting any external axis to them.
CAUTION
• Operation of external axis by using the allocated operation keys of
7th-axis and 8th-axis are valid only when operating a robot.
In the case where operating external axes, operate them by using
keys from the key for 1st -axis.
Furthermore, when the robot is equipped with 7th and 8th axes,
keys on the pendant are used to operate existing axes on a priority
basis. 
For example, when the robot is equipped with 7 axes, E-axis will
move even if the external axis operation is allocated to 7th-axis (E+,
E-) operational key.
This function can operate other control group than

displayed in the upper part of the programming pendant
(Status display area or the LED of [ROBOT] or [EX.AXIS]
keys).
NOTE
Also, the simultaneous operation of the robot and the
external axes is possible by pressing several axis
operational keys at a time. Please be careful to the axes
movements when pressing them.
6-110 350 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
6.10.2 Jog Key Allocation Setting
6.10.2.1 Allocation of the Jog Key
CAUTION
a
• Allocation of the jog keys is valid only in the management mode

while only confirmation of allocated axes is valid in the operation
mode and edit mode.
The setup conditions are saved in the following parameters.

Even if the same numbered external axes are allocated to a
key (example:S1 for the 1st-axis), the value of the
NOTE parameter to be saved varies depending on the composition
of the control group of the system. In this consequence,
when loading the parameter file (ALL.PRM or AC.PRM),
please make sure to confirm the allocating status before
executing the function.
Parameters for saving the setup conditions of jog key allocation.

S2C739 7th-axis
S2C740 8th-axis
1. Select {SETUP} under main menu.

2. Select {JOG KEY ALLOCATION}.
– Jog key allocation window appears.
6-111 351 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
3. Move the cursor key to “GROUP” and press down [SELECT] key.
– The list of allocatable external axes appears.
4. Select an external axis to be allocated.

– The selected external axis is indicated in “GROUP” and “1” is
indicated in “AXIS NO”.
5. (In the cases where the external axis is composed of more than two
axes and the axis from the 2nd-axis are operated)
Move the cursor key to “AXIS NO”. and press down [SELECT] key.
– The list of selected external axes appears.
6. Select a desired axis number.

– The selected axis is indicated in “AXIS NO”.
6-112 352 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
6.10.2.2 Cancellation of Jog Key Allocation

2. Select {JOG KEY ALLOCATION}.
– Jog key allocation window appears.
3. Move the cursor key to “GROUP” and press down [SELECT] key.
– The list of allocatable external axes appears.
4. Select “NONE”.
– “******” is indicated in “GROUP” and “AXIS NO”.
6-113 353 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
6.10.2.3 Operating Method of Allocated External Axis
CAUTION
• When the same external axis (same group and axis number) is
allocated to 7th- and 8th-axis keys, it won’t move even both keys
are pressed individually. In the case like this, the message “Check
the setting of JOG KEY ALLOCATION(7th and 8th)” is indicated to
alarm that the same external axis is allocated to two different keys.
Please cancel the allocation setting or allocate another external axis
to either of the key.
1. Press [ROBOT] key.

– A mark of robot is indicated at the left side of the status area on the
programming pendant, and this expresses that the robot is selected
to be the object of operation.
Also, the LED of [ROBOT] key lights.
2. Press 7th(E+,E-)-axis or 8th(8+,8-)-axis operation key.
– The allocated external axes moves if there are no 7th- and 8th-axes
and the allocation setting was done properly.
6-114 354 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
6.11 Energy-Saving Function
6.11.1 Energy-Saving Function

Energy-saving function is a function to save power by halting the power to
the robot after applying brake to the motor when robot’s all axes won’t
move for a designated period of time while servo is turned ON in play
mode. The initial designated period of time is 10 minutes.
This energy-saving function is valid when all the following condition met.
1. Energy-saving function is valid.
2. The system input signal (signal to prohibit on energy-saving mode
#40580) is turned OFF.
Followings are the status of the robot while this function is valid.
1. The message “On energy saving mode” is indicated on the
2. The servo is turned ON.
3. The jobs under execution are continuously executed.
4. The system output signal (ENERGY-SAVING:SOUT#0576(#50727))to
indicate that it is in energy-saving status is turned ON while other
signals won’t change.
CAUTION
This function is cancelled in the following cases.
– When the programming pendant mode is switched to teach
mode.
– When the system input signal of external servo OFF(1,2,3) is
input.
– When the axis, which belongs to the subject control group of the
executing job, is about to move while energy-saving function is
valid.
– In the cases where emergency stop or servo OFF is executed
when alarming.
This function will not be cancelled if the system input signal

NOTE (signal to prohibit energy-saving #40580) is turned ON. 
This signal merely prohibits to shift the status to energy-
saving status.
6-115 355 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
6.11.2 Energy-Saving Setting Method
6.11.2.1 Valid/Invalid of Energy-Saving Setting
CAUTION
• Valid/invalid of the energy-saving function is available only in the
management mode while only confirmation of this function is
available in the operation mode and edit mode.

2. Select {ENERGY SAVING FUNCTION}.
– Energy-saving function window appears.
6-116 356 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
3. Move the cursor key to “ENERGY SAVING FUNCTION” and press

[SELECT].
– Valid and invalid alternate at each press of select key.

Press [SELECT] key

6-117 357 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
4. Move the cursor key to {SETTING TIME} and press [SELECT] key.
– Input the time you want to start energy-saving after the robot is
stopped into {SETTING TIME} section (unit: min.). The initial value
is set to 10 min. and the range of the inputting value is from 1 to 60.
6.11.2.2 Accumulated Energy-Saving Time Clearance

– Energy-saving function window appears.
3. Move the cursor key to {ACCUMULTED ENERGY-SAVING TIME}.
4. Move the cursor key to {DATA} and press [SELECT] key.
– “CLEAR ACCUMULTED” appears in the pull-down menu.
6-118 358 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
5. Select {CLEAR ACCUMULTED}

6. Select “YES” on the dialog box,

– The accumulated energy-saving time is cleared.
6-119 359 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
6.11.3 Energy-Saving Status Confirmation Method
6.11.3.1 Confirmation by the accumulated energy-saving time

– Energy-saving function window appears.
The accumulated energy-saving time is being counted up while the
status is in the energy-saving mode.
6.11.3.2 Confirmation by System Signal Output

1. Select {IN/OUT} under main menu.
2. Select {SPECIFIC OUTPUT}.
– The specific output window appears.
3. Press [PAGE] or [SELECT] key to display SOUT#0576 (#50727).
– The system output status during the energy-saving status is
indicated.
This signal is turned ON while in the energy-saving mode.
– This signal is turned OFF after the energy-saving mode is released.
6-120 360 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
6.12 Instruction Displaying Color Setting Function
6.12.1 Setting the Instruction Displaying Color on the Job Window1)

With this function, each instruction can be displayed on a color to color
basis on the job window.
The following instructions are the subject of this function.
• Move instruction
• DEVICE instruction
• Comment instruction
• Label instruction
• Macro instruction (when the macro function is effective)
• I/O instruction
• All the instructions other than listed above
The color of each instruction in the job window can be set on the DISPLAY
COLOR CONDITION SETTING window.
2. Select {DISPLAY COLOR CONDITION SETTING}.

– The display color condition setting window appears.
1 Instruction displaying color setting function on the job window is available from
version DS2.00-00.
6-121 361 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
3. Move the cursor to the instruction to be changed and press [SELECT].

– The list of the candidate colors for the instruction is displayed.
4. Select a color.
– The color of each instruction is fixed.
5. Select JOB window.

– Each instruction is displayed in the selected colors on the job
window.
6-122 362 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
6.13 Present Manipulator Position Output Function
6.13.1 Outline
Output the present manipulator’s cartesian position (base coordinate) to
the specified register.
6.13.2 Parameters
The following parameters specify the function and output register number.
S1CxG Meaning
208 Specify a function which outputs a specified value of the present cartesian position
(base coordinate) to the register
0: invalid
1: Valid
209 Specify the output size to the register
0: 2 bytes output
1: 4 bytes output
210 Cartesian position (command value) X register number of output destination
211 Cartesian position (command value) Y register number of output destination
212 Cartesian position (command value) Z register number of output destination
213 Cartesian position (command value) Rx register number of output destination
214 Cartesian position (command value) Ry register number of output destination
215 Cartesian position (command value) Rz register number of output destination
216 Cartesian position (command value) Re register number of output destination
217 Specify a function which outputs a FB value of the present cartesian position (base
coordinate) to the register
0: invalid
1: Valid
218 Specify the output size to the register
0: 2 bytes output
1: 4 bytes output
219 Cartesian position (FB value) X register number of output destination
220 Cartesian position (FB value) Y register number of output destination
221 Cartesian position (FB value) Z register number of output destination
222 Cartesian position (FB value) Rx register number of output destination
223 Cartesian position (FB value) Ry register number of output destination
224 Cartesian position (FB value) Rz register number of output destination
224 Cartesian position (FB value) Re register number of output destination
6-123 363 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
(Example 1)
S1C1G Setting value
208 1
209 0
210 10
211 11
212 12
213 13
214 14
215 15
216 16
When setting the parameter as above, the manipulator’s present cartesian

position is output to the registers as follows.
M010 = Manipulator’s present cartesian position (command value) X [unit: mm]
M011 = Manipulator’s present cartesian position (command value) Y [unit: mm]
M012 = Manipulator’s present cartesian position (command value) Z [unit: mm]
M013 = Manipulator’s present cartesian position (command value) Rx [unit: deg]
M014 = Manipulator’s present cartesian position (command value) Ry [unit: deg]
M015 = Manipulator’s present cartesian position (command value) Rz [unit: deg]
M016 = Manipulator’s present cartesian position (command value) Re [unit: deg]
6-124 364 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
(Example 2)
S1C1G Setting value
217 1
218 1
219 10
220 12
221 14
222 16
223 18
224 20
225 22
When setting the parameter as above, the manipulator’s present cartesian

position is output to the registers as follows
M010= Lower 2 bytes of the manipulator’s present cartesian position (FB value) X [unit: µmm]
M011= Upper 2 bytes of the manipulator’s present cartesian position (FB value) X [unit: µmm]
M012= Lower 2 bytes of the manipulator’s present cartesian position (FB value) Y [unit: µmm]
M013= Upper 2 bytes of the manipulator’s present cartesian position (FB value) Y [unit: µmm]
M014= Lower 2 bytes of the manipulator’s present cartesian position (FB value) Z [unit: µmm]
M015= Upper 2 bytes of the manipulator’s present cartesian position (FB value) Z [unit: µmm]
M016= Lower 2 bytes of the manipulator’s present cartesian position (FB value) Rx [unit: 0.001deg]
M017= Upper 2 bytes of the manipulator’s present cartesian position (FB value) Rx [unit: 0.001deg]
M018= Lower 2 bytes of the manipulator’s present cartesian position (FB value) Ry [unit: 0.001deg]
M019= Upper 2 bytes of the manipulator’s present cartesian position (FB value) Ry [unit: 0.001deg]
M020= Lower 2 bytes of the manipulator’s present cartesian position (FB value) Rz [unit: 0.001deg]
M021= Upper 2 bytes of the manipulator’s present cartesian position (FB value) Rz [unit: 0.001deg]
M022= Lower 2 bytes of the manipulator’s present cartesian position (FB value) Re [unit: 0.001deg]
M023= Upper 2 bytes of the manipulator’s present cartesian position (FB value) Re [unit: 0.001deg]
6-125 365 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
• When validating the command value register output

function (S1CxG208=1), never fail to set the output
register number (S1CxG210 to 216) of each coordinate
value.
• When validating the FB value register output function
(S1CxG217=1), never fail to set the output register
number (S1CxG219 to 225) of each coordinate value.
• In case 2 bytes is set as the register output size
(S1CxG209=1 or S1CxG218=1), the unit of X,Y and Z-
axes coordinate value becomes “mm” and that of Rx, Ry,
NOTE Rz and Re coordinate value becomes “deg”. In both
cases, only the lower 2 bytes are output.
• When setting 4 bytes to the register output size
(S1CxG209=1 or S1CxG218=1), the unit of X,Y and Z-
axes coordinate value becomes “µmm” and that of Rx, Ry,
Rz and Re coordinate value becomes “0.0001deg”.
• When setting 4 bytes to the register output size
(S1CxG209=1 or S1CxG218=1), upper byte of the
coordinate value is output to the following register number
to the specified output register number. In this
consequence, confirm the register’s status of use before
setting the output size to the register.
6-126 366 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
6.14 Softlimit Setting Function
6.14.1 About the Softlimit Setting Function

The softlimit setting function is a function to set the softlimit to limit the
range of the manipulator motion in software.
6.14.2 The Softlimit Setting Screen
CAUTION
• The softlimit setting screen is displayed at the teach mode and the
management mode.
1. Select {ROBOT} in the main menu.

2. Select {SOFTLIMIT SETTING}.
– The softlimit setting screen is displayed.
6-127 367 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
3. Set the control group as desired.
GO BACK
– Switch to the desired control group by the page key PAGE or the
selection dialog.
– As for the selection dialog, select [PAGE] on the screen and move
the cursor to desired control group. Press [SELECT].
6.14.3 Setting the Softlimit by Numerical Value Input

1. Move the cursor to the desired axis of the softlimit (+) or the softlimit (-),
and press [SELECT].
2. Enter the values of the softlimit (+)/ the softlimit (-), and press
[ENTER].
– The softlimit is set.
6-128 368 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
6.14.4 Set the Current Value to the Softlimit

1. Move the manipulator by the axis key.
– Move the manipulator to the position of which value is maximum
number or minimum number of the softlimit by the axis key.
2. Move the cursor to the desired axis of the softlimit (+) or the softlimit (-).
– When change the maximum number of the first softlimit, 
move the cursor to the first axis of the softlimit (+).
– When change the minimum number of the first softlimit, 
move the cursor to the first axis of the softlimit (-).
3. Press [MODIFY].
– The message [Update the data with <ENTER>.] appears.
– If perform the one of the following operations, the modify operation

will be canceled.
• Press [MODIFY] key.
• Press [SELECT] key.
• Press the one of [ ↑ ] [ ↓ ] [ ← ] [ → ] keys.
• Press [PAGE] key.
• Press [DIRECT OPEN] key.
• Press a ten key.
• Select the reserved display.
• Switch the screen.
• Switch the mode.
6-129 369 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
– The message [Update operation with <CHANGE> was canceled.]

appears.
4. Press [ENTER].
– The current position is set as the softlimit.
6-130 370 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
6.14.5 Set the Softlimit (+)/ the Softlimit (-) to the Initial Maker Value
1. Select {DATA} in the pull-down menu.
– {Initial Maker Value} appears.
2. Select {Initial Maker Value}.

– The confirmation dialog appears.
3. Select [YES].
– The initial maker value is set for all displayed axes. 
The operation is canceled when select [NO].
The initial maker value limits the range of the mechanical

motion of the manipulator, and it varies according to the
NOTE model of the robot.
It is different from the motion range which was set to add
the base station axis.
6-131 371 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
6.14.6 Change the Coordinate Display of the Softlimit (+)/ the Softlimit (-)
1. Select {DISPLAY} in the pull-down menu.
– {Coordinate Change} appears.
2. Select {Coordinate Change}.

– When the displaying coordinate is a pulse, 
the robot axis is changed to the angle display;
the base axis is changed to the distance display; and
the station axes is changed for each axis by the value of the station
axis display parameter (S2C265 to 288). 

When the first bit is OFF, the first axis is changed to the angle
display.
When the second bit is ON, the second axis is changed to the
distance display. 
When the display coordinate is angle/distance, the all axes are
changed to the pulse display.
• When the display of the softlimit value is the angle

display, the pulse display and the sign may be different.
NOTE
• Be sure to confirm the motion range by the jog operation
after changing the softlimit value.
6-132 372 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
6.15 Analog Output Function Corresponding to Speed
6.15.1 Overview
The analog output function corresponding to speed changes the analog
output value automatically, according to the manipulator operating speed.
This function does not need resetting of the analog output value according
to the operating speed, so that the time required for job teaching can be
reduced.
For example, when the thickness of sealing or painting should be
constant, the discharged amount of seals or paints can be controlled by
the manipulator operating speed.
Speed : slow
Discharged amount : small
Speed : fast
Discharged amount : large
For the analog output function corresponding to speed, the

NOTE following board is needed.
• Analog output expansion board: JANCD-YEW02-E
6-133 373 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
6.15.2 Instructions
6.15.2.1 Instructions for Analog Output Function Corresponding to Speed

The instructions, ARATION and ARATIOF, are used for the analog output
function corresponding to speed.
 ARATION
The analog output function corresponding to speed is performed after
executing ARATION instruction. This instruction is valid during circular
interpolation, linear interpolation or spline interpolation. It is executed only
at playback or FWD key operation; it is not executed during axis
operation.
This instruction is also used when each set value for the analog output
function corresponding to speed is to be changed.
ARATION AO#(1) BV=10.00 V=200.0 OFV=2.00

Output port number
General analog output port to execute the analog output corresponding
to speed
Setting range : 1 to 40
Basic voltage
Voltage to be output at the speed set with the basic speed.
Setting range : -14.00 to +14.00V
Basic speed
Operating speed which becomes the basis for when the set voltage is
output.
Setting range : 0.1 to 1500.0mm/sec
1 to 9000cm/min
Offset voltage
Analog voltage when the operating speed is 0.
Setting range : -14.00 to +14.00V
6-134 374 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
According to the set value of the ARATION instruction, the output

characteristics for the relation between the operating speed and the
analog voltage are calculated. The analog output function corresponding
to speed is executed depending on these output characteristics.
The following graph shows the output characteristics.
Fig. 6-5: Output Characteristics When Analog Output Function Corresponding to

Speed is Used
Analog voltage
14V
Basic
voltage
Offset
voltage
Operating
0 speed
Basic
speed
NOTE When the analog output value exceeds ± 14.00 V because

of the operating speed, the value is limited within ± 14.00 V.
 ARATIOF
When the ARATIOF instruction is executed, the analog output
corresponding to speed is completed, and the set offset voltage becomes
the fixed output.
ARATIOF AO#(1)
Output port number

General analog output port to end the analog output corresponding to
speed
Setting range : 1 to 40
6-135 375 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
6.15.2.2 Registration of Instructions

The instructions can be registered when the cursor is in the address area
on the job content display in teach mode. Perform the following
operations before registering an instruction.
1. Select {JOB} under the main menu
2. Select {JOB CONTENT}
3. Move the cursor to the address area
Address Instruction
area area
 ARATION
1. Move the cursor to one line above the place to register the ARATION
instruction
The line above the
place to register
ARATION instruction.
2. Press [INFORM LIST]

3. Select [IN/OUT]
– The instruction list dialog appears.
4. Select “ARATION”
– The ARATION instruction is indicated in the input buffer line.
6-136 376 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
5. Change any additional items and numerical values

– <Register without changes>
To register without changes, perform operation of step 6.
– <Register with addition or change of the additional items>
• To change the output port number
In case of using [SHIFT] and the cursor key, move the cursor to
the output port number, and then press [SHIFT] and the cursor
key simultaneously, to change the output port number.
In case of using the number keys, move the cursor to the output
port number, and press [SELECT] to display an input buffer line.
Enter the number, and then press [ENTER] to change the number
displayed.
• To change the basic voltage, the speed, and the offset voltage
Move the cursor to the instruction in the input buffer line, and then
press [SELECT]. The detail edit display is shown.

Move the cursor to “UNUSED” of the additional item to be
changed, and then press [SELECT]. The selection dialog is dis-
played.
Move the cursor to the additional item to be changed, and press
[SELECT].
When the additional item is changed, press [ENTER]. The detail
6-137 377 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
edit window closes, and the job content window appears.

6. Press [INSERT] and [ENTER]
– The instruction indicated in the input buffer line is registered.
The line where
ARATION
instruction is
registered.
 ARATIOF
1. Move the cursor to one line above the place to register ARATIOF
instruction
The line above the
place to register
ARATIOF instruction.
2. Press [INFORM LIST]

3. Select [IN/OUT]
– The instruction list dialog appears.
4. Select “ARATIOF”
– The ARATIOF instruction is indicated in the input buffer line.
5. Press [INSERT] and [ENTER]

– The ARATIOF instruction is registered.
6-138 378 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
6.15.2.3 Analog Output Display

The current settings can be confirmed on the analog output window.
Terminal
General analog output port
OUTPUT (V)
Indicates the voltage which is currently output.
BASIC (V)
Indicates the basic voltage used for the analog output corresponding to
speed.
This value is used until a new value is set by ARATION instruction.
TRAIT
Indicates the current output characteristics of the output port.
SP RAT : during execution of the analog output corresponding to speed
STATIC : fixed output status
OFFSET (V)
Indicates the offset voltage used for the analog output corresponding to
speed.
BASIC SPD
Indicates the basic speed used for the analog output corresponding to
speed.
ROBOT
Indicates the manipulator number for the analog output corresponding
to speed.
1. Select {IN/OUT} from the main menu

2. Select {ANALOG OUTPUT}
– The analog output window appears.
The output terminal numbers which follow

the AOUT4 can be switched and
displayed by pressing the page key.
6-139 379 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
6.15.3 Examples
6.15.3.1 Examples of Output Characteristics

The graph below shows the change in the output characteristics when the
following job is done.
Output Voltage (V)
MOVJ VJ=50.00
ARATION AO#(1) BV=7.00 V=150.0 OFV=-10.00 7.00
MOVL V=50.0 -4.33
MOVC V=100.0 1.33
MOVC V=100.0 1.33
MOVC V=100.0 1.33
MOVL V=200.0 12.67
Analog voltage
(V)
14V
10
Basic
voltage 7
5
Operating speed
0 50 100 150 200 (mm/s)
Basic
speed
-5
Offset
-10
voltage
6-140 380 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
6.15.3.2 Example of Variation of Operating Speed and Analog Output Value

The following graph shows the change of the analog output
according to the speed variation.
MOVL V=200.0
ARATION AO#(1) BV=10.00 V=200.0 OFV=-2.00
MOVC V=150.0
MOVC VR=20.0 (When the tool center point speed is 100 mm/s)
MOVC V=150.0
MOVL V=180.0
MOVL (When the tool center point speed is 180 mm/s)
AOUT AO#(1) 10.00
Fig. 6-6: Analog Voltage according to Speed

Analog
voltage (V)
Operating
speed (mm/s)
10
7
1
8.8
200 5 6
7
180
2 4
4
150
3
100
Time
• Since the analog output corresponding to speed is made

for the calculated speed, there may be little difference
from the actual operating speed of the manipulator.
NOTE
• When a posture speed is specified, the analog output
corresponding to speed is made for the operating speed at
the tool center point with the posture speed.
6-141 381 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
6.15.4 Filter Process

In the analog output function corresponding to speed, the output analog
signal can be filtered by setting a filter constant at the parameters.
6.15.4.1 When Parameter is Set to “0”

The analog signal according to the speed reference (the speed
determined by a path operation) is output.
Analog output signal

Manipulator actual speed
Voltage Speed
Time
6.15.4.2 When Parameter is Set to Values Other Than “0”

The analog signal according to the speed of filtered speed reference is
output. By the filter process, the output signal can be close to the
manipulator’s actual speed.
Analog output signal

Manipulator actual speed
Voltage Speed
Time
6.15.4.3 Parameter Setting

Adjust the settings of parameters during actual operations.
Table 6-4: Parameter (Sheet 1 of 3)
Parameter Analog Output Content Unit
Number
S3C1111 Analog output No.1 Primary filter constant [msec]
S3C1112 Analog output No.1 Secondary filter constant [msec]
6-142 382 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD

Number
6-143 383 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD

Number
The standard parameter settings are as follows.

• For small capacity robot with a payload 6 kg and 16 kg
Primary filter constant : 50 msec
Secondary filter constant : 50 msec
• For large capacity robot with a payload 60 kg and 130 kg
Primary filter constant : 100 msec
Secondary filter constant : 100 msec
6-144 384 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
6.15.5 Precautions
6.15.5.1 When Analog Output Corresponding to Speed is Interrupted

If the manipulator is stopped for some reason and the editing operation is
performed, the analog output corresponding to speed is interrupted. This
interruption is performed in all output terminals, and the analog voltage
fixed immediately before the interruption is output to each output terminal.
The analog output corresponding to speed is not interrupted in any other
cases.
6.15.5.2 When More than One Manipulator is Used

The attribute of the job where the instruction is executed determines the
manipulator where the analog output corresponding to speed is
performed.
For a coordinated job, the analog output corresponding to speed is
performed at the operating speed of the manipulator at the slave side.
6-145 385 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
6-146 386 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
DX100 7 External Memory Devices
7.1 Memory Devices
7 External Memory Devices
7.1 Memory Devices

The following memory devices can be used in the DX100 to save and load
data such as jobs and parameters.
Device Function Media (destination of Optional function

saved/ loaded data) requirement
CF: Pendant Standard Compact Flash Card No requirement. 
(CF card) Programming pendant is
equipped with a slot.
USB: Standard USB Memory Stick No requirement. 
Pendant Programming pendant is
equipped with a slot.
FC1 Optional1) 2DD floppy disk, “FC1“or personal
personal computer computer with “FC1
(FC1 emulator) emulator”
FC1 (DX) Optional1) Personal computer Personal computer with
(FC1 emulator) “FC1 emulator”
FC2 Optional1) 2DD floppy disk,  “FC2”
2HD floppy disk
PC Optional1) Personal computer Via RS-232C: “Data
(MOTOCOM32 host) transmission function “and
“MOTOCOM32” 
Via Ethernet: “Ethernet
function” plus above two
requirements
FTP Optional1) FTP server such as “Data transmission
personal computer function”, “MOTOCOM32”,
and “FTP function”
1 For the operation, refer to instruction manuals for each optional function.
7-1 387 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
7.1 Memory Devices
7.1.1 Compact Flash (CF Cards)

The programming pendant is equipped with CF card slot. Use the FAT16
or FAT32 formatted Compact Flash.
7.1.1.1 Recommended Compact Flash Cards

Refer to section 9.1.2 “Device” in “DX100 INSTRUCTIONS 
(RE-CTO-A215)” for the recommended products used for external
memory of DX100. Model numbers are subject to be updated due to
termination of product and new addition. Contact Yaskawa representative
when necessary.
7.1.1.2 Notes on handling Compact Flash

• Do not drop or bend exerting any shock or strong force to the
Compact Flash.
• Keep away from water, oil, organic solvent, dust, and dirt.
• Do not use or keep the Compact Flash in places where strong static
electricity or electronic noise may occur.
• Do not insert or remove the Compact Flash or turn OFF the power
when accessing the Compact Flash (writing-in or reading-out the
Compact Flash data).
• To protect the data, back up the data regularly on other media.
Damages or loss of data due to operation errors or accidents can be
minimized.
*Compact Flash has a limited life span.

The life span differs depending on products or status of use. However,
normal use of Compact Flash as an external memory device for the
DX100 does not adversely affect the Compact Flash. For details, refer to
instruction manuals for each medium.
7-2 388 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
7.1 Memory Devices
7.1.1.3 Inserting a Compact Flash

When inserting a Compact Flash, take note of insertion direction.
With the notch and clip of the Compact Flash downward, insert the
Compact Flash slowly into the slot of the programming pendant of which
display faces up.
Forcible insertion may result in damage to the Compact Flash or CF card
slot.
After inserting the card, be sure to close the cover of the slot before
starting operation.
Fig. 7-1: Using a Compact Flash Card
START HOLD
REMOTE TEACH
PLAY
JOB EDIT DISPLAY UTILITY
JOB CONTENT
TEST01 S:0000
CONTROL GROUP:R1 TOOL:
0000 NOP
0001 SET B000 1
0002 SET B001 0
0003 MOVJ VJ=80.00
0004 MOVJ VJ=80.00
0005 DOUT OT#(10) ON
Insertion slot for
0006 TIMER T=3.00
0007 MOVJ VJ=80.00
0008 MOVJ VJ=100.00
the Compact Flash
0009 MOVJ VJ=100.00
0010 MOVJ VJ=100.00
0011 MOVJ VJ=100.00
MOVJ VJ=0.78 Insertion direction
Main Menu Short Cut Turn on servo power
top surface
LAYOUT TOOL SEL GO BACK
DIRECT
COORD OPEN
Multi PAGE AREA
ENTRY
SERVO
SELECT
MAIN SIMPLE ON CANCEL
MENU MENU READY ASSIST
X-
S-
X+
S+
SERVO ON
X-
R-
X+
R+
Notch Click
HIGH
SPEED
Y- Y+ Y- Y+
L- L+ B- B+
FAST
Z- Z+ MANUAL SPEED
Z- Z+
U- U+ T- T+
SLOW
E- E+ 8- 8+
INTER 7 8 9 TEST
SHIFT
SHIFT
LOCK START
ROBOT INFORM 4 5 6 BWD FWD

LIST
EX.AXIS
WELD 1 2 3 DELETE INSERT
ON/OFF
MOTION 0 . -
AUX MODIFY ENTER
TYPE
7-3 389 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
7.1 Memory Devices
7.1.2 USB Memory Stick

The programming pendant is equipped with a USB connector. Use the
FAT16 or FAT32 formatted USB memory stick.
7.1.2.1 Recommended USB Memory Stick

Refer to section 9.1.2 “Device” in “DX100 INSTRUCTIONS (RE-CTO-
A215)” for the recommended products used for external memory of
DX100. Model numbers are subject to be updated due to termination of
product and new addition. Contact Yaskawa representative when
necessary.
7.1.2.2 Notes on handling USB Memory Stick

• Do not drop or bend exerting any shock or strong force to the
Compact Flash.
• Keep away from water, oil, organic solvent, dust, and dirt.
• Do not use or keep the Compact Flash in places where strong static
electricity or electronic noise may occur.
• Do not insert or remove the Compact Flash or turn OFF the power
when accessing the Compact Flash (writing-in or reading-out the
Compact Flash data).
• To protect the data, back up the data regularly on other media.
Damages or loss of data due to operation errors or accidents can be
minimized.
*USB memory stick has a limited life span.

The life span differs depending on products or status of use. However,
normal use of USB memory stick as an external memory device for the
DX100 does not adversely affect the USB memory stick. For details, refer
to instruction manuals for each medium.
7-4 390 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
7.1 Memory Devices
7.1.2.3 Inserting a USB Memory Stick

When inserting a USB memory stick, take note of insertion direction.
With the USB memory stick face-up and the connector upwards, insert the
stick slowly into the slot of the programming pendant of which display
face-down.
Forcible insertion may result in damage to the USB memory stick or USB
connector.
After inserting the stick, be sure to close the cover of the connector before
starting operation.
Fig. 7-2: Using a USB Memory Stick
USB Connector
Insertion position
Top surface
USB memory stick
When a USB memory stick is used, the waterproofing of

programming pendant cannot be maintained.
If the USB memory stick is always set in the programming
NOTE pendant, the stick may fall out of the pendant.
If it is impossible to maintain the waterproofing of
programming pendant or to prevent the USB memory stick
from falling out of the programming pendant, use a
Compact Flash card instead.
7-5 391 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
7.2 Handling Data
7.2 Handling Data
7.2.1 Data Classification

For the DX100, data that can be saved online are classified into eight
categories.
1. JOB
2. FILE/GENERAL DATA
3. BATCH USER MEMORY*1
4. PARAMETER*2
5. SYSTEM DATA
6. I/O DATA
7. BATCH CMOS*3
8. ALL CMOS AREA*4
Data saved on the external memory device can be loaded again into the
DX100.
Each data in the eight categories varies depending on applications or
options.
When the device is set to “PC” and “FTP”, data cannot be handled other
than “1. JOB” and “2. FILE/GENERAL DATA”.
Also, the “1. JOB” whose name consists of more than nine letters cannot
be handled at “FC1” and “FC2”.
*1: “3. BATCH USER MEMORY” includes “1. JOB” and “2. FILE/
GENERAL DATA”.
*2: “PARAMETER BATCH” includes all “P4. PARAMETER”.
*3: “7. BATCH CMOS” includes “3. BATCH USER MEMORY”, 
“4. PARAMETER”, “5. SYSTEM DATA”, and “6. I/O DATA”.
*4:“ALL CMOS AREA” data cannot be loaded in edit mode and 
management mode.
PARAMETER, I/O DATA, SYSTEM DATA, PARAMETER

BATCH, BATCH CMOS, and ALL CMOS AREA are used
for backup.
If those data are loaded by other controllers, unintended
data overwriting, unexpected operation, or abnormal
system startup may occur.
Do not load those backup data into other controllers.
If two controllers are loaded with the same job, paths of the
NOTE two manipulators are different due to the home positions or
mechanical error of the component parts.
Be sure to check the operation instruction before operation.
The data such as variable data, user coordinate data, job
data, parameter data and each condition file data should not
be changed during saving the ALL CMOS AREA, SYSTME
DATA and BATCH USER MEMORY.
Changing the those data may cause incorrect saving as
well as during the playback.
7-6 392 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
7.2 Handling Data
Table 7-1: Data List (Sheet 1 of 2)

Data Classification File Name Save Load
(Saved Data) OPN EDIT MAN OPN EDIT MAN
8. ALL CMOS AREA ALCMSxx.HEX    X X X
7. BATCH CMOS CMOSxx.HEX    X X 
3. BATCH USER MEMORY JOBxx.HEX    X  
1. JOB Single job JOBNAME.JBI    X  
Related job JOBNAME.JBR    X  
(Job+Condition)
2 FILE/ Tool data TOOL.CND    X  
GENERAL Weaving data WEAV.CND    X  
DATA
User coordinate data UFRAME.CND    X  
Variable data VAR.DAT    X  
Arc start condition data ARCSRT.CND    X  
Arc end condition data ARCEND.CND    X  
Welding condition ARCSUP.DAT    X  
auxiliary data
Power source WELDER.DAT    X  
characteristic data
Power source WELDUDEF.DAT    X  
characteristic definition
data
Shock detection level SHOCKLVL.CND    X  
data
Motor gun pressure SPRESS.CND    X  
power data
Motor gun dry spot  SPRESSCL.CND    X  
pressure data
Spot gun characteristic SGUN.DAT    X  
data
Spot welding power SWELDER.DAT    X  
source characteristic
data
Short/Full open STROKE.DAT    X  
position data
Spot I/O allocation data SPOTIO.DAT    X  
Airgun condition data AIRGUN.DAT    X  
Spot welding condition SPOTWELD.DAT    X  
data
Clearance data CLEARANCE.DAT    X  
Interference area file CUBEINTF.CND    X  
4. PARAMETER BATCH ALL.PRM    X X 
4. PARA- Robot matching RC.PRM    X X 
METER parameter
System definition SD.PRM    X X 
parameter
7-7 393 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
7.2 Handling Data
Table 7-1: Data List (Sheet 2 of 2)

Data Classification File Name Save Load
(Saved Data) OPN EDIT MAN OPN EDIT MAN
8. 7. 4. 4. PARA- Coordinate home RO.PRM    X X 
METER position parameter
System matching SC.PRM    X X 
parameter
ClO parameter CIO.PRM    X X 
Function definition FD.PRM    X X 
parameter
Application parameter AP.PRM    X X 
Transmission (general) RS.PRM    X X 
parameter
Sensor parameter SE.PRM    X X 
Servo parameter SV.PRM    X X 
Servomotor parameter SVM.PRM    X X 
Operation control AMC.PRM    X X 
parameter
Servo power block  SVP.PRM    X X 
parameter
Motion function MF.PRM    X X 
parameter
SERVOPACK SVS.PRM    X X 
parameter
Converter parameter SVC.PRM    X X 
Robot control expand RE.PRM    X X 
parameter
5. I/O DATA CIO program CIOPRG.LST    X X 
I/O name data IONAME.DAT    X X 
Pseudo input signals PSEUDOIN.DAT    X X 
External I/O name data EXIONAME.DAT    X X 
Register name data IOMNAME.DAT    X X 
6. SYSTEM User word register UWORD.DAT    X X 
DATA name
SV monitor signals SVMON.DAT    X X 
Variable name VARNAME.DAT    X X 
Second home position HOME2.DAT    X X 
Alarm history data ALMHIST.DAT    X X X
Home position ABSO.DAT    X X 
calibrating data
System information SYSTEM.SYS    X X X
Work home position OPEORG.DAT    X X 
data
I/O message history IOMSGHST.DAT    X X X
data
Function key allocation KEYALLOC.DAT    X X 
data
Arc monitor data ARCMON.DAT    X X X
* OPN: Operation Mode, EDIT: Edit Mode, MAN: Management Mode 
 : Can be done, X : Cannot be done
7-8 394 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
7.2 Handling Data
7.2.2 File Existence

The following data categories show whether the same file name as a file
that is going to be saved is in the external memory device or not.
• JOB 
No mark appears when the selected folder has the file of the same
name. 
The asterisk (*) appears when the folder does not have the same
name file.
• FILE/GENERAL DATA, PARAMETER, SYSTEM DATA, I/O DATA 
Black circle ( ) appears when the selected folder has the file of
the same name. 
White circle ( ) appears when the folder does not have the same
name file.
Whether the job after editing is saved or not can be judged

by checking “TO SAVE TO FD” in the JOB HEADER
SUPPLE- window. However, the status of “TO SAVE TO FD” does not
MENT
change after saving “3. BATCH USER MEMORY” and “7.
BATCH CMOS”.
Fig. 7-3: Example of JOB
Fig. 7-4: Example of FILE/GENERAL DATA
7-9 395 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
7.2 Handling Data
7.2.2.1 Saving by Overwriting

“3. BATCH USER MEMORY”, “7. BATCH CMOS”, and “8. ALL CMOS
AREA” can be overwritten.
As for “1. JOB”, “2. FILE/GENERAL DATA”, “4. PARAMETER”, “5.
SYSTEM DATA”, and “6. I/O DATA”, those data cannot be overwritten.
Delete the target file in the device before the saving operation. If Compact
Flash is used as the device, the file does not need to be deleted because
another folder can be created to save the data.
7-10 396 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
7.3 Operation Flow
7.3 Operation Flow

The following description is the operation flow for external memory
devices.
• SELECT DEVICE 
Select {FD/PC CARD} --> {DEVICE}, and the destination device for
saving. 
The device selected is valid after turning the power supply ON again. 
*1: Sub menu {FORMAT} appears when selecting FC1 or FC2.
• SELECT FOLDER 
Select {FD/PC CARD} --> {DEVICE}, and the destination folder for
saving. 
The folder selected is invalid after turning the power supply ON
again. 
*2: {FOLDER} appears when using the Compact Flash as a device. 
*3 The settings of {CREATE NEW FOLDER}, {DELETE FOLDER},
and {ROOT FOLDER} can be set.
• SELECT SUB MENU 

Select an operation to be performed from {LOAD}, {SAVE},
{VERIFY}, and {DELETE}.
• SELECT DATA CATEGORY 

Select the target data category.
• SELECT DATA 
Select the target data. 
“3. BATCH USER MEMORY”, “7. BATCH CMOS”, and “8. ALL
CMOS AREA” do not require this operation. 
*4 Individual selection, batch selection, marker (*) selection, and
canceling selection can be performed.
• EXECUTE 
Select [ENTER] or {EXECUTE}.
Main Menu
{FD/PC CARD}
Sub Menu
*1 *2
{LOAD} {SAVE} {VERIFY} {DELETE} {FORMAT} {DEVICE} {FOLDER}
Select Floppy Type Select *3

Operate Folder
Select Data Category Select Size Device
{EXECUTE} Select Folder

Select Data*4
Select [ENTER] or {EXECUTE}
7-11 397 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
7.3 Operation Flow
7.3.0.1 Operating a Folder

Folders can be used in order to classify and sort out the data such as jobs
and condition files when using the Compact Flash. The folders can be
created in hierarchical structure positioning a root folder at the top.
 Restrictions
Folder name: Up to 8 one-byte characters + 3 characters for extension
*Long folder names cannot be used such as the name that exceeds the
restricted number of characters mentioned above as created in PC, etc.
Maximum path length: 42 one-byte characters

*“ERROR 3360: INVALID FOLDER” appears when selecting the folder of
which name exceeds the maximum path length.
 Selecting a Folder
1. Select {FD/PC CARD} under the main menu.

2. Select {FOLDER}.
– The FOLDER LIST window appears.
3. Move the cursor to a folder and press [SELECT].
– A folder can be selected.
4. To move the hierarchy from a child folder to a parent folder, move the
cursor to [..] and press [SELECT].
7-12 398 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
7.3 Operation Flow
 Creating a Folder
1. Change the security to management mode. Select {FD/PC CARD}

under the main menu.
2. Select {FOLDER}.
– Select the higher-level folder where a new folder to be created
should be contained.
– When creating a folder in top-level, this step is unnecessary.
4. Select {DATA} --> {CREATE NEW FOLDER} under the pull-down
menu. Input folder name using the keyboard on the screen and press
[ENTER].
– A folder is created.
 Deleting a Folder

2. Select {FOLDER}.
– Select the higher-level folder where a folder to be deleted is
contained.
– When deleting a folder in top-level, this step is unnecessary.
4. Delete the files and subfolders beforehand inside the folder that is to
be deleted.
– A folder cannot be deleted if the folder contains files or subfolders
inside.
Move the cursor to the folder to be deleted.
5. Select {DATA} --> {DELETE FOLDER} under the pull-down menu.
7-13 399 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
7.3 Operation Flow
 Initial Folder Setting

The folder that is contained in a deep hierarchy can be selected in a
shortened operation.
When selecting {LOAD}, {SAVE}, {VERIFY}, or {DELETE} from the sub
menu of {FD/PC CARD}, the folder that has been set as an initial folder
becomes a current folder.

2. Select {FOLDER}.
– Select a folder that is to be set as a root folder.
4. Select {DISPLAY} --> {ROOT FOLDER} under the pull-down menu.
– The INITIAL FOLDER SETTING window appears.
– A folder currently selected appears in “CURRENT FOLDER” and the

initial folder appears in “ROOT FOLDER”.
7-14 400 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
7.3 Operation Flow
5. Select {EDIT} --> {SETUP FOLDER} under the pull-down menu. Move
the cursor to “AUTO CHANGE” and press [SELECT].
– The initial folder is set in “ROOT FOLDER”.
– “AUTO CHANGE” shows “ON” and the initial folder setting becomes
valid. Subsequently, every time {FD/PC CARD} --> {FOLDER} is
selected, the initial folder that has been set becomes a current
folder.
When the initial folder is missing due to exchange of the

Compact Flash, etc., “ERROR 3360: INVALID FOLDER”
appears when selecting {LOAD}, {SAVE}, {VERIFY},
SUPPLE- {DELETE} or {FOLDER} menu from {FD/PC CARD}, and
MENT
simultaneously the initial folder becomes invalid. Set “ON”
in “AUTO CHANGE” when the initial folder setting needs to
be valid.
7-15 401 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
7.3 Operation Flow
7.3.0.2 Saving Data

To download data from the memory of the DX100 to the external memory
device, perform the following procedure.
Data such as PARAMETER, SYSTEM DATA, I/O DATA,

and the batch data such as PARAMETER BATCH, BATCH
CMOS, ALL CMOS AREA, that include PARAMETER,
SYSTEM DATA, I/O DATA, contain the information specific
to each robot controller.
NOTE Those data are prepared as backup data for reloading into
the controller used for saving.
Loading the data from other controller may result in
destruction or loss of critical system information.
Take extra care for the saved data.
 Saving a Job

2. Select {SAVE}.
– The following window appears.
3. Select {JOB}.
7-16 402 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
7.3 Operation Flow
4. Select a job to be saved.

– The selected job is marked with “”.
5. Press [ENTER].
– The selected job is saved.
7-17 403 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
7.3 Operation Flow
 Saving a Condition File or General Data

2. Select {SAVE}.
3. Move the cursor to {FILE/GENERAL DATA} and select.

– The selection window appears.
– The content of the display varies in accordance with applications
and options.
7-18 404 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
7.3 Operation Flow
4. Select condition files or general data to be saved.

– The selected files are marked with “”.
5. Press [ENTER].
– The selected files are saved.
7-19 405 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
7.3 Operation Flow
 Saving a Parameter

2. Select {SAVE}.
3. Move the cursor to {PARAMETER} and select.

– The selection window for parameters appears.
4. Select parameters to be saved.

– The selected parameters are marked with “”.
7-20 406 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
7.3 Operation Flow
5. Press [ENTER].
– The selected parameters are saved.
7-21 407 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
7.3 Operation Flow
 Saving I/O Data

2. Select {SAVE}.
3. Move the cursor to {I/O DATA} and select.

– The selection window for I/O data appears.
4. Select I/O data to be saved.

– The selected I/O data are marked with “”.
5. Press [ENTER].
– The selected I/O data are saved.
7-22 408 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
7.3 Operation Flow
 Saving System Data

2. Select {SAVE}.
3. Move the cursor to {SYSTEM DATA} and select.

– The selection window for system data appears.
7-23 409 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
7.3 Operation Flow
4. Select system data to be saved.

– The selected system data are marked with “”.
5. Press [ENTER].
– The selected system data are saved.
“BATCH USER MEMORY”, “BATCH CMOS”, and “ALL

CMOS AREA” can be overwritten.
As for “JOB”, “FILE/GENERAL DATA”, “PARAMETER”,
SUPPLE-
MENT “SYSTEM DATA”, and “I/O DATA”, the data cannot be
overwritten. In this case, delete the file of the same name in
the folder beforehand or create a new folder so that the data
can be stored inside.
7-24 410 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
7.3 Operation Flow
 Saving All User’s Programs

2. Select {SAVE}.
3. Move the cursor to {BATCH USER MEMORY} and select.

– All user’s programs are saved.
7-25 411 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
7.3 Operation Flow
 Saving All CMOS Data

2. Select {SAVE}.
3. Move the cursor to {BATCH CMOS} and select.

– All CMOS data are saved.
7-26 412 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
7.3 Operation Flow
 Saving All Data in CMOS Area

2. Select {SAVE}.
3. Move the cursor to {ALL CMOS AREA} and select.

– All data in CMOS area are saved.
7-27 413 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
7.3 Operation Flow
7.3.0.3 Loading Data

To upload data from the external memory device to the memory of the
DX100, follow the procedure in the following.
Data such as PARAMETER, SYSTEM DATA, I/O DATA,

and the batch data such as PARAMETER BATCH, BATCH
CMOS, ALL CMOS AREA, that include PARAMETER,
SYSTEM DATA, I/O DATA, contain the information specific
to each robot controller.
NOTE Those data are prepared as backup data for reloading into
the controller used for saving.
Loading the data from other controller may result in
destruction or loss of critical system information.
Take extra care for the saved data.
 Loading a Job

2. Select {LOAD}.
3. Select {JOB}.
– The job selection window appears.
7-28 414 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
7.3 Operation Flow
4. Select a job to be loaded.

– The selected jobs are marked with “”.
5. Press [ENTER].
– The selected jobs are loaded.
7-29 415 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
7.3 Operation Flow
 Loading a Condition File or General Data

2. Select {LOAD}.
3. Move the cursor to {FILE/GENERAL DATA} and select.

– The selection window for condition file or general data appears.
4. Select a condition file or general data to be loaded.

7-30 416 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
7.3 Operation Flow
5. Press [ENTER].
– The selected files are loaded.
 Loading a Parameter

2. Select {LOAD}.
3. Move the cursor to {PARAMETER} and select.

– The selection window for parameters appears.
7-31 417 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
7.3 Operation Flow
4. Select parameters to be loaded.

– The selected parameters are marked with “”.
5. Press [ENTER].
– The selected parameters are loaded.
7-32 418 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
7.3 Operation Flow
 Loading I/O Data

2. Select {LOAD}.
3. Move the cursor to {I/O DATA} and select.

– The selection window for I/O data appears.
4. Select I/O data to be loaded.

– The selected I/O data are marked with “”.
5. Press [ENTER].
– The selected I/O data are loaded.
7-33 419 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
7.3 Operation Flow
 Loading System Data

2. Select {LOAD}.
3. Move the cursor to {SYSTEM DATA} and select.

– The selection window for system data appears.
4. Select system data to be loaded.

– The selected system data are marked with “”.
7-34 420 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
7.3 Operation Flow
5. Press [ENTER].
– The selected system data are loaded.
7-35 421 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
7.3 Operation Flow
 Loading All User’s Programs

2. Select {LOAD}.
3. Move the cursor to {BATCH USER MEMORY} and select.

– All user’s programs are loaded.
7-36 422 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
7.3 Operation Flow
 Loading All CMOS Data

2. Select {LOAD}.
3. Move the cursor to {BATCH CMOS} and select.

4. The confirmation dialog box appears.
– All CMOS data are loaded.
7-37 423 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
7.3 Operation Flow
7.3.0.4 Verifying Data

Follow the procedure below to verify data in the memory of the DX100
with data saved in the external memory device.
This function cannot be executed with “BATCH USER

NOTE MEMORY”, “BATCH CMOS”, or “ALL CMOS AREA”
specified.
 Verifying a Job

2. Select {VERIFY}.
3. Select {JOB}.
7-38 424 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
7.3 Operation Flow
4. Select a job to be verified.

5. Press [ENTER].
– The selected jobs are verified.
7-39 425 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
7.3 Operation Flow
 Verifying a File

2. Select {VERIFY}.
3. Select the group of the file to be verified.

4. Select a file to be verified.
5. Press [ENTER].
– The selected files are verified.
7-40 426 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
7.3 Operation Flow
7.3.0.5 Deleting Data

Follow the procedure below to delete a file or files on an external memory
device.
 Deleting a Job

2. Select {DELETE}.
3. Select {JOB}.
4. Select a job to be deleted.

5. Press [ENTER].
– The selected jobs are deleted.
7-41 427 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
7.3 Operation Flow
 Deleting a File

2. Select {DELETE}.
3. Select the group of the file to be deleted.
4. Select a file to be deleted.

5. Press [ENTER].
– The selected files are deleted.
7-42 428 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
7.3 Operation Flow
7.3.0.6 Job Selection Mode

The method of selecting a job and various data files when loading, saving,
verifying, and deleting are described in the following:
• Individual Selection 
Jobs and data files are selected individually one at a time.
• Batch Selection 
Jobs and data files are selected all at one time.
• Marker (*) Selection 
Loading: selects the files in the external memory device. 
Saving: selects the files in the memory of the DX100. 
Verifying: selects both the files in the external memory device and in
the memory of the DX100. 
 Using Individual Selection
1. In either the external memory JOB LIST window or the file selection
window, move the cursor to a job or a file to be selected.
2. Press [SELECT]. 
Move the cursor to a file needed and press [SELECT] again. 
*To cancel the selected items, select {EDIT} and then {CANCEL
SELECT}.
7-43 429 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
7.3 Operation Flow
 Using Batch Selection
window, select {EDIT} under the menu.
2. Select {SELECT ALL}. 

SELECT}.
– All jobs are selected.
7-44 430 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
7.3 Operation Flow
 Using Marker (*) Selection
window, select {EDIT} under the menu.
2. Select {SELECT MARKER (*)}. 

SELECT}.
7-45 431 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
DX100 8 Parameter
8.1 Parameter Configuration
8 Parameter
8.1 Parameter Configuration

The parameters of DX100 can be classified into the following seven:
Motion Speed Setting Parameter

Determines the manipulator motion speed for jog operation at teaching,
test operation, or playback operation.
Mode Operation Setting Parameter
Makes the setting for various operations in the teach mode or remote
mode.
Parameter according to Interference Area
Limits the P-point maximum envelope of the manipulator or sets the
interference area for axis interference or cubic interference.
Parameter according to Status I/O
Sets the parity check or I/O setting for user input/output signals.
Parameter according to Coordinated or Synchronized Operation
Makes the settings for coordinated or synchronized operations between
manipulators or between manipulators and stations.
Parameter for Other Functions or Applications
Makes the settings for other functions or applications.
Hardware Control Parameter
Makes the hardware settings for fan alarm or relay operation, etc.
S1CxG Parameters
The initial setting of S1CxG parameters depends on the
SUPPLE-
manipulator model.
MENT
For a system in which two manipulators are controlled, the
following two types of parameters are used: S1C1G type
and S1C2G type.
8-1 432 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
DX100 8 Parameter
8.2 Motion Speed Setting Parameters

These parameters set the manipulator motion speed for jog operation at
teaching, test operation, or playback operation.
8.2.0.1 S1CxG000: IN-GUARD SAFE OPERATION MAX. SPEED

Units: 0.01%
The upper speed limit is set for in-guard safe operation. While the in-
guard safe operation command signal is being input, the TCP speed is
limited to the TCPmax speed.
8.2.0.2 S1CxG001: DRY-RUN SPEED

Units: 0.01%
This is a dry-run operation speed setting value used when checking the
path. Take safety into consideration when setting changes are
unnecessary.
Normal playback operation speed

In-guard safe
operation speed
limit
Operation speed under in-guard
safe operation
Teach-speed
Dry-run speed
Operation speed
when dry-run is
specified.
8.2.0.3 S1CxG002 to S1CxG009: JOINT SPEED FOR REGISTRATION

Units: 0.01%
The value set in these parameters is registered as the joint speed for each
speed level when teaching the position data with the programming
pendant. The percentage corresponding to the set value at each level is
registered as 100% of the value set in the playback speed limit. Values
greater than those set as speed limit values cannot be set.
S1CxG002: Level 1 
·
·
·
S1CxG009: Level 8
8-2 433 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
DX100 8 Parameter
8.2.0.4 S1CxG010 to S1CxG017: LINEAR SPEED FOR REGISTRATION

Units: 0.1mm/s
The value set in these parameters is registered as the linear speed for
each speed level when teaching the position data with the programming
pendant. Values greater than those set as playback speed limit values
cannot be set.
·
·
·
S1CxG017: Level 8
8.2.0.5 S1CxG018 to S1CxG025: POSITION ANGLE SPEED

Units: 0.1/s
The value set in these parameters is registered as the position angle
speed for each speed level when teaching the position data with the
programming pendant. Values greater than those set as playback speed
limit cannot be set.
·
·
·
S1CxG025: Level 8
8.2.0.6 S1CxG026 to S1CxG029: JOG OPERATION ABSOLUTE VALUE SPEED

Units: 0.1mm/s
These are setting values of jog operation speed set by the programming
pendant. Values greater than those set as jog operation speed limit value
cannot be set.
S1CxG026 Low level : Jog operation speed when “LOW” manual
speed is specified.
S1CxG027 Medium level : Jog operation speed when “MEDIUM” manual
speed is specified.
S1CxG028 High level : Jog operation speed when “HIGH” manual
speed is specified.
S1CxG029 High-speed-level : Jog operation speed when [HIGH SPEED] is
pressed.
8-3 434 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
DX100 8 Parameter
8.2.0.7 S1CxG030 to S1CxG032: INCHING MOVE AMOUNT

These parameters specify the amount per move at inching operation by
the programming pendant. The referenced parameter differs according to
the operation mode at inching operation.
S1CxG030 : Joint Operation (Unit: 1 pulse)
S1CxG031 : Cartesian/cylindrical (Unit: 0.001 mm)
S1CxG032 : Motion about TCP (Unit: 0.001 degree)
SUPPLE-
If the value set for S1CxG031 or S1CxG032 is too small, the
MENT inching operation does not proceed.
NOTE Note that the units of S1CxG031 and S1CxG032 are

smaller than those for the NX100.
8.2.0.8 S1CxG033 to S1CxG040: POSITIONING ZONE

This parameter value will be referenced when positioning is specified with
the “MOVE” instruction: MOVJ (joint movement) or MOVL (linear
movement).
<Example> MOVL V=100.0 PL=1

Positioning level
Positioning specification
The value set in this parameter specifies the range to enter in relation to
the teaching point for that step positioning. After entering the specified
positioning zone, the manipulator starts moving to the next step. The
system is also set up so inward turning operation is carried out in the
moving section when moving to the next path; speed changeover is
smooth.
S1CxG033: Positioning level 1 
S1CxG034: Positioning level 2 
·
·
·
S1CxG040: Positioning level 8
8-4 435 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
DX100 8 Parameter
Since operation will be turning inward during playback, as shown in the

following diagram, use setting values taking safety aspects into
consideration.
P1
P1
l1
l2
l l3
P1 l4
l8
P1
NOTE This process becomes effective when change in direction of

steps is between 25and 155.
Position Level
Position levels are divided into nine stages of 0 to 8 with the
“MOV” instruction. 
e.g. MOVL V=500 PL=1 (PL:Position Level) 
The functions at each level are as follows: 
0: Complete positioning to the target point 
1 to 8: Inward turning operation 
Following are explanations of the respective processing
details and their relations with the parameter.
• Level 0 
Determines positioning completion when the amount of
deviation (number of pulses) to the target point of each
SUPPLE-
MENT axis comes within the position set zone specified by the
parameter. 
After the positioning completes, the instruction system
starts instruction to the next target point.
• Level 1 to 8 
Recognizes virtual positioning before the target point. The
distance of the virtual target position from the target point is
specified at the positioning level. 
Distance data corresponding to each level are set in the
parameter. Determination of the virtual target position is
carried out in the instruction system. 
Set zone: The zone of each positioning level set in the
parameter. (m)
8-5 436 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
DX100 8 Parameter
8.2.0.9 S1CxG044: LOW-SPEED START

Units: 0.01%
This parameter specifies max. speed at low speed start. Specify the
starting method for “initial operation speed of manipulator” (S2C217).
8.2.0.10 S1CxG045 to S1CxG048: JOG OPERATION LINK SPEED

Units: 0.01%
These parameters prescribe the link speed at jog operation by the
programming pendant. Specify the percentage (%) for the jog operation
speed limit, the joint max. speed.
S1CxG045: Jog operation link speed at level “LOW”
S1CxG046: Jog operation link speed at level “MEDIUM”
S1CxG047: Jog operation link speed at level “HIGH”
S1CxG048: Jog operation link speed at level “HIGH SPEED”
8.2.0.11 S1CxG056: WORK HOME POSITION RETURN SPEED

Units: 0.01%
This parameter specifies the speed for returning to work home position
against the maximum speed.
8.2.0.12 S1CxG057: SEARCH MAX. SPEED

Units: 0.1mm/s
This parameter specifies the max. speed for searching.
8.2.0.13 S2C201: POSTURE CONTROL AT CARTESIAN OPERATION OF JOG

This parameter specifies whether or not posture control is performed at
cartesian operation of “JOG” by the programming pendant. Use posture
control unless a special manipulator model is used.
0 : With posture control
1 : Without posture control
8.2.0.14 S2C202: OPERATION IN USER COORDINATE SYSTEM (WHEN

EXTERNAL REFERENCE POINT CONTROL FUNCTION USED)
This parameter specifies the TCP or reference point of motion about TCP
when the external reference point control function is used and the user
coordinate system is selected by the programming pendant.
Fig. 8-1: 0: When manipulator TCP is selected
Manipulator TCP
8-6 437 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
DX100 8 Parameter
Fig. 8-2: 1: When external reference point is selected

External
reference
point
8.2.0.15 S2C320: CONTROLLED GROUP JOB TEACHING POSITION CHANGE

This parameter is used to change only the job teaching position of
controlled group axis.
0 : Not changed
1 : Changed
8.2.0.16 S2C422: OPERATION AFTER RESET FROM PATH DEVIATION
8.2.0.17 S2C423: OPERATION AFTER JOB

These parameters specify the method of restarting the manipulator that
has deviated from the normal path such as an emergency stop or jog
operation.
0 : Move to the indicated step (initial setting).
1 : After moving back to the deviated position, move to the indicated step.
2 : Move back to the deviated position and stop.
Table 8-1: S2C422

Parameter
Setting Movement When Restarting
Value
Move to next step.
Emergency stop
Movement Move to next step.

when restarting
After moving back to the deviated position, move to the indicated

step.
Emergency stop
1
Move back to the deviated
position and stop.
When restarting, move to
the indicated step.
Emergency stop (Servo OFF)

2 Move back the the deviated
position and then move to
the indicated step.
8-7 438 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
DX100 8 Parameter
Table 8-2: S2C423

Parameter
Setting Movement When Restarting
Value
Move to the next step.
0
Movement
JOG Move to next step.
when restarting
After moving back to the deviated position, move to the indicated

step.
1
Move back to the deviated
position and then move to
the indicated step.
JOG
2 Move back to the deviated

position and stop. When
restarting, move to the
JOG indicated step.
• To the path deviated position, the manipulator moves in a

straight line at low speed operation (SICxG044). 
It is linear movement. After resetting from deviation, the
NOTE speed becomes the same as taught speed.
• The initial setting (prior to shipping) is 0: The manipulator
moves in a straight line from the present position to the
indicated step.
8.2.0.18 S2C424: DEVIATED POSITION

This parameter specifies whether deviated position is to be robot current
(reference) position or feedback position.
0 : Return to the feedback position.
1 : Return to the current value (reference) position.
8-8 439 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
DX100 8 Parameter
When emergency stop is applied during high-speed motion, the deviated

position differs from the robot current value (reference) position and
feedback position as shown in the following.
Current value
Feedback position (reference) position
Emergency stop
8.2.0.19 S2C425: CIRCULAR INTERPOLATION TOOL POSITION CONTROL

This parameter selects tool position control methods at circular
interpolation operation.
0 : Fixed angle position
Interpolation is performed depending on the position change viewed from
the base coordinate.
As the figure below (left) shows, when tool position viewed from outside is
not significantly changed and that position is mainly taught at teaching, this
setting is required.
1 : Rotating position by circular arc path

Interpolation is performed depending on the position change
corresponding to circular arc path.
As the figure below (right) shows, when tool position corresponding to
circular arc path (tool position viewed from the center of the circular arc) is
not significantly changed, and that position is mainly taught at teaching,
this setting is required.
0: Fixed angle position 1: Rotating position by circular arc path
P1 P1
P2
P0 P0
P2
8.2.0.20 S2C653: EMERGENCY STOP CURSOR ADVANCE CONTROL

FUNCTION
This parameter specifies whether to use the cursor advance control
function or not.
0: Not use
1: Use
8-9 440 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
DX100 8 Parameter
8.2.0.21 S2C654: EMERGENCY STOP CURSOR ADVANCE CONTROL

FUNCTION CONT PROCESS COMPLETION POSITION
Units: %
When the manipulator stops during moving inner corner by CONT
process, this parameter specifies which position of the inner corner should
be considered as the end of step.
Step 4
100%
When 50% is set, moves to Step 3
if the manipulator stops in A section,
B and to Step 4 if the manipulator stops
in B section.
50%
A
Step 3
0%
8.2.0.22 S2C655: EMERGENCY STOP ADVANCE CONTROL FUNCTION

WORK START INSTRUCTION STEP MOTION COMPLETION DELAY
TIME
Units: ms
In order to recognize securely the completion of motion to the step of work
start instruction (such as ARCON instruction), this parameter specifies the
delay time for motion completion of the work start instruction step only.
8.2.0.23 S2C698: BASE AXIS OPERATION KEY ALLOCATION SETTING
Table 8-3: Parameter Setting and Jog Operation Key Allocation

Coordinates/Parameter S2C698= “0” S2C698= “1”
Joint Axis number order Specified
Cylindrical Axis number order Specified
Cartesian Specified Specified
Tool Specified Specified
User Specified Specified
Axis number order: X: First axis, Y: Second axis, Z: Third axis

Specified: X: X-direction (RECT-X), Y: Y-direction (RECT-Y), Z: Z-direction
(RECT-Z)
8-10 441 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
DX100 8 Parameter
8.2.0.24 S3C1098 to S3C1102: POSITION CORRECTING FUNCTION DURING

PLAYBACK
These parameters specify the necessary data for position correcting
function (PAM) during playback operation.
S3C1098 Specifies the limit of position correcting range (Units: m)
S3C1099 Specifies the limit of speed correcting range (Units: 0.01%)
S3C1100 Specifies the correcting coordinates
0 : Base
1 : Robot
2 : Tool
3 : User 1
to
26:User 24
S3C1102 Specifies the limit of posture angle adjustment range (Units: 0.01
8-11 442 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
DX100 8 Parameter
8.3 Mode Operation Setting Parameters

These parameters set various operations in the teach mode or remote
mode. 
Some parameters can be set through {SETUP}  {TEACHING COND} or
{OPERATE COND}.
8.3.0.1 S2C195: SECURITY MODE WHEN CONTROL POWER SUPPLY IS

TURNED ON
The operation level when the control power supply is turned ON is set.
0 : Operation Mode
1 : Editing Mode
2 : Management Mode
8.3.0.2 S2C196: SELECTION OF CARTESIAN/CYLINDRICAL

This parameter specifies whether the cartesian mode or cylindrical mode
is affected when cartesian/cylindrical mode is selected by operation
(coordinate) mode selection at axis operation of programming pendant.
This specification can be done on the TEACHING CONDITION window.
0 : Cylindrical mode
1 : Cartesian mode
8.3.0.3 S2C197: COORDINATE SWITCHING PROHIBITED

This parameter prohibits switching coordinates during JOG operation by
the programming pendant.
0 : Switching permitted for tool coordinates and user coordinates
1 : Switching prohibited for tool coordinates
2 : Switching prohibited for user coordinates
3 : Switching prohibited for tool coordinates and user coordinates
8.3.0.4 S2C198: EXECUTION UNITS AT “FORWARD” OPERATION

This parameter specifies the execution units at step mode of “FORWARD”
operation by the programming pendant.
Parameter Setting
Operation Units
Value
MOVL Stops at every instruction
DOUT
0 TIMER
DOUT
MOVL
MOVL Stops at move instruction

DOUT
1 TIMER
DOUT
MOVL
8-12 443 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
DX100 8 Parameter
8.3.0.5 S2C199: INSTRUCTION (EXCEPT FOR MOVE) EXECUTION AT

“FORWARD” OPERATION
This parameter specifies the method of instruction (except for move)
execution at “FORWARD” operation by the programming pendant.
0 : Executed by pressing [FWD] + [INTERLOCK]
1 : Executed by pressing [FWD] only
2 : Instruction not executed
8.3.0.6 S2C203: CHANGING STEP ONLY

This parameter specifies whether to permit only step changes in an
editing-prohibited job. When permitted, only position data can be changed
but additional data such as speed cannot be changed. This specification
can be done on the TEACHING CONDITION window.
0 : Permitted
1 : Prohibited
8.3.0.7 S2C204: MANUAL SPEED STORING FOR EACH COORDINATE

This parameter specifies whether to assign different manual speeds for
the joint coordinates and other coordinates. If “NOT STORED” is
selected, manual speed is not affected by changing the coordinates. If
“STORED” is selected, manual speeds can be selected separately for the
joint coordinates and other coordinates.
0 : Not stored
1 : Stored
8.3.0.8 S2C206: ADDITIONAL STEP POSITION

This parameter designates either “before next step” or “after the cursor
position (between instructions)” as additional step position. This
specification can be done on the TEACHING CONDITION window.
Fig. 8-3: <Example>
Line Instruction
10 MOVL V=100
11 TIMER T=1.00
12 DOUT OT# (1) ON
13 MOVL V=50
Cursor position
8-13 444 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
DX100 8 Parameter
Fig. 8-4: S2C206-0 (Before the Next Step)

Line Instruction
10 MOVL V=100
11 TIMER T=1.00
12 DOUT OT#(1) ON
13 MOVL V=100
14 MOVL V=50
Added step
Fig. 8-5: S2C206-1 (Between Instructions)

Line Instruction
10 MOVL V=100
11 TIMER T=1.00
12 MOVL V=100
13 DOUT OT# (1) ON
14 MOVL V=50
Added step
8.3.0.9 S2C207: MASTER JOB CHANGING OPERATION

This parameter specifies whether to permit or prohibit master job changing
operation. If “PROHIBIT” is specified, the master job cannot be changed
(or registered) easily. The specification can be done on the OPERATING
CONDITION window.
0 : Permitted
1 : Prohibited
8.3.0.10 S2C208: CHECK AND MACHINE-LOCK KEY OPERATION IN PLAY

MODE
This parameter specifies whether to permit or prohibit in play mode to
change the operation that changes the operation condition. Even if an
error occurs because of the operation with the keys, the manipulator does
not stop. The specification can be done on the OPERATING CONDITION
window.
0 : Permitted
1 : Prohibited
8.3.0.11 S2C209: RESERVED WORK JOB CHANGING OPERATION

This parameter specifies whether to permit reserved work job changing
operation.
The designation can be done on the OPERATING CONDITION window.
0 : Permitted
1 : Prohibited
8-14 445 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
DX100 8 Parameter
8.3.0.12 S2C210: MASTER OR SUBMASTER CALL OPERATION IN PLAY

MODE
This parameter specifies whether the master or submaster call operation
in play mode is permitted or not. When the independent control function is
valid, the master job for sub-task is specified at the same time. The
specification can be done on the OPERATING CONDITION window.
0 : Permitted
1 : Prohibited
8-15 446 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
DX100 8 Parameter
8.3.0.13 S2C211: LANGUAGE LEVEL

This parameter specifies the level of the robot language (INFORM III).
The levels simplify the instruction registering operation. With the DX100,
all robot instructions can be executed regardless of specification of
instruction sets. The specification can be done on the TEACHING
CONDITION window.
0: Contracted Level 
Only frequently used robot instructions are selected to reduce the number
of instructions to be registered. Robot instructions displayed on the
instruction dialog box are also reduced so that specification is simplified.
1: Standard Level
2: Expanded Level 
All the robot instructions are available in standard and expanded levels.
The two levels are distinguished by the number of additional information
items (tags) that can be used with robot instructions. At the expanded
level, the flowing functions are available.
• Local Variables and Array Variables
• Use of Variables for Tags (Example: MOVJ VJ=I000) 
The above functions are not available at the standard level, however,
which reduces the number of data required to register instructions,
thereby simplifying the operation.
8.3.0.14 S2C214: INSTRUCTION INPUT LEARNING FUNCTION

This parameter specifies whether to set a line of instructions that has been
input on the input buffer line when pressing the first soft key for each
instruction. If “PROVIDED” is selected, the instructions are set.
0 : Without learning function
1 : With learning function
8.3.0.15 S2C215: ADDRESS SETTING WHEN CONTROL POWER IS TURNED

ON
This parameter specifies the processing of the job name, step No., and
line No. that are set when the control power supply is turned ON.
0 : Reproduces the address when power supply is turned ON.
1 : Lead address (Line”0”) of the master job.
8.3.0.16 S2C216: JOB LIST DISPLAY METHOD AT JOB SELECTION

These parameters specify the displaying method on the JOB LIST window
at job selection.
0 : Order of Names
1 : Order of Date
8-16 447 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
DX100 8 Parameter
8.3.0.17 S2C217: INITIAL OPERATION OF MANIPULATOR

This parameter specifies the operation speed level of the first section
when starting. Specify the operation speed with the low-speed start
(S1CxG044). When starting at low-speed, the manipulator stops after
reaching the indicated step regardless of the cycle setting. Once the
manipulator is paused during the low-speed operation, it moves at
teaching speed when restarted.
0 : Specified on the SPECIAL PLAY window. Operates at low speed only
when low speed start is set. Operates at taught speed when not instructed.
1 : Starts at low speed after editing regardless of soft key instructions.
8.3.0.18 S2C218: PLAYBACK EXECUTION AT CYCLE MODE “1- STEP”
Parameter Setting
Operation Units
Value
MOVL Stops at every instruction
DOUT
0 TIMER
DOUT
MOVL
MOVL Stops at move instruction

DOUT
1 TIMER
DOUT
MOVL
When operating “FORWARD” by the programming pendant,

NOTE the units for execution are set in another parameter
(S2C198).
8.3.0.19 S2C219: EXTERNAL START

This parameter specifies whether a start instruction from external input is
accepted or not. The specification can be done on the OPERATING
CONDITION window.
0 : Permitted
1 : Prohibited
8.3.0.20 S2C220: PROGRAMMING PENDANT START

This parameter specifies whether a start instruction from the programming
pendant is accepted or not.
0 : Permitted
1 : Prohibited
8-17 448 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
DX100 8 Parameter
8.3.0.21 S2C221: SPEED DATA INPUT FORM

This parameter specifies the units for speed data input and display.
mm/s : in units of 0.1 mm/s
cm/min : in units of 1cm/min
inch/min : in units of 1 inch/min
mm/min : in units of 1 mm/min
The specification can be done on the OPERATING CONDITION window.
0 : mm/sec
1 : cm/min
2 : inch/min
3 : mm/min
8.3.0.22 S2C222: RESERVED START

This parameter specifies whether a reserved start instruction from the
programming pendant is accepted or not. The specification can be done
on the OPERATING CONDITION window.
0 : Permitted
1 : Prohibited
8.3.0.23 S2C224: JOB SELECTION AT REMOTE FUNCTION (PLAY MODE)

This parameter specifies whether a job selection in play mode at remote
function is prohibited or not.
0 : Permitted
1 : Prohibited
8.3.0.24 S2C225: EXTERNAL MODE SWITCH

This parameter specifies whether mode switching from the outside is
CONDITION window.
0 : Permitted
1 : Prohibited
8.3.0.25 S2C227: EXTERNAL CYCLE SWITCHING

This parameter specifies whether cycle switching from the outside is
CONDITION window.
0 : Permitted
1 : Prohibited
8-18 449 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
DX100 8 Parameter
8.3.0.26 S2C228: PROGRAMMING PENDANT CYCLE SWITCHING

This parameter specifies whether cycle switching from the programming
pendant is accepted or not. The specification can be done on the
OPERATING CONDITION window.
0 : Permitted
1 : Prohibited
8.3.0.27 S2C229: SERVO ON FROM EXTERNAL PP PROHIBITION

This parameter specifies whether a servo ON instruction is accepted or
not. More than one instruction can be specified. For example, to permit
the servo ON instruction from an external input only, set “2”. In this case,
servo ON instruction from the programming pendant is not accepted. The
specification can be done on the OPERATING CONDITION window.
d7 d0
External input prohibited : 1 (VALID)

Programming pendant : 2 (VALID)
DSW : 4 (VALID)
8.3.0.28 S2C230: PROGRAMMING PENDANT OPERATION WHEN “IO” IS

SELECTED FOR REMOTE MODE
This parameter specifies whether each operation of the following is valid
when “IO” is selected for remote function selection. IO and command are
available for remote function selection: “IO” is set prior to shipping.
“Command” is valid when transmission function (optional) is specified.
d7 d0
Programming pendant ([SERVO ON READY] key)

valid/invalid : 1 (VALID)
Programming pendant (Enable switch) : 2 (VALID)
Mode switching valid/invalid : 4 (VALID)
Master call valid/invalid : 8 (VALID)
Cycle switching valid/invalid : 16 (VALID)
Start valid/invalid : 32 (VALID)
8-19 450 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
DX100 8 Parameter
8.3.0.29 S2C234: STEP REGISTRATION AT TOOL NO. CHANGE

The registration of the step when the tool number is changed allows the
setting to be made as prohibited.
If this parameter is set to “1” (prohibited), the following operations are
prohibited.
0 : Permitted
1 : Prohibited
• Modification of a step 
When the tool number of the teaching step differs from the currently-
selected tool number, the step cannot be modified.
• Deletion of a step 
Even if the teaching step position coincides with the current position,
the step cannot be deleted when the tool number of the teaching
step differs from the currently-selected tool number.
• Addition of a step 
When the tool number of the teaching step indicated by the cursor
differs from the currently-selected tool number, the step cannot be
added.
8.3.0.30 S2C293: REMOTE FIRST CYCLE MODE

This parameter sets the cycle that changes from the local mode to the
remote mode.
The setting can be made on the OPERATING CONDITION window.
0 : Step
1 : 1 cycle
2 : Continuous
3 : Setting retained
8.3.0.31 S2C294: LOCAL FIRST CYCLE MODE

This parameter sets the cycle that changes from the remote mode to the
local mode.
0 : Step
1 : 1 cycle
2 : Continuous
8.3.0.32 S2C312: POWER ON FIRST CYCLE MODE

This parameter sets the first cycle mode for when the power is turned ON.
0 : Step
1 : 1 cycle
2 : Continuous
8-20 451 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
DX100 8 Parameter
8.3.0.33 S2C313: TEACH MODE FIRST CYCLE MODE

This parameter sets the cycle that changes from the play mode to the
teach mode.
0 : Step
1 : 1 cycle
2 : Continuous
8.3.0.34 S2C314: PLAY MODE FIRST CYCLE MODE

This parameter sets the cycle that changes from the teach mode to the
play mode.
0 : Step
1 : 1 cycle
2 : Continuous
8.3.0.35 S2C316: START CONDITION AFTER ALARM-4107 (“OUT OF RANGE

(ABSO DATA)”)
This parameter specifies the activating method after the alarm 4107
(“OUT OF RANGE (ABSO DATA)”) occurs.
0 : Position check operation required
1 : Low-speed start up
8-21 452 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
DX100 8 Parameter
8.3.0.36 S2C395: SIGNAL NAME ALIAS FUNCTION

On the JOB CONTENT window, the name registered to the user input/
output signal number can be displayed as alias instead of the signal
number itself.
Table 8-4: S2C395
Parameter Setting Value Valid/Invalid
0 Function invalid
1 Function valid
1. With this function valid, the confirmation dialog box “Register by name
(alias)?” is displayed when a signal (IN#(), OT#(), IG#(), OG#(),
IGH#(), OGH#()) is selected on the DETAIL EDIT window.
2. Select “YES” and the signal select window appears. Then select the
target signal of number and press [ENTER], and the registered name
is displayed instead of the signal number. However, if the signal
number’s name is not yet registered, it is displayed by number as
usual.
<Example> Registration of the name of user output OUT#0001 as

“OUTPUT 1”
In the case of DOUT instruction:
S2C395=0 : DOUT OT#(1) ON
S2C395=1 : DOUT OT#(OUTPUT 1) ON
Select {IN/OUT}  {UNIVERSAL INPUT/OUTPUT} to edit

signal names on the window. Up to 16 characters can be
entered as a signal name. However, when this function is
valid, if the content below is entered, the error message
shows and the name cannot be registered.
• The name already registered
• Letters beginning with a number
• Letters including the signs below: 
( , ) , [ , ] , = , < , > , space, comma
• Letters beginning with “alphabets representing variables” +
“number” 
SUPPLE- <Example> B0..., I0..., BP1..., LEX2... 
MENT
Alphabets representing variables: B, I, D, R,
S, P, BP, EX, PX, LB, LI LD, LR, LS, LP, LBP,
LEX, LPX
When the name begins with “ ‘ ”, it is regarded as a comment
and the same comment can be registered for two or more
signals. In this case, although this function is valid, the
number is displayed on the JOB CONTENT window instead
of the name.
<Example> Registration of the name of user output 
OUT#0002 as “ ‘OUTPUT 2” 
S2C395=0 : DOUT OT#(2) ON 
S2C395=1 : DOUT OT#(2) ON
8-22 453 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
DX100 8 Parameter
8.3.0.37 S2C396: VARIABLE NAME ALIAS FUNCTION

On the JOB CONTENT window, the name registered to the variable
(including local variables) can be displayed as alias instead of the variable
number.
Table 8-5: S2C396
0 Function invalid
1 Function valid
1. With this function valid, the confirmation dialog box “Register by name
(alias) ?” is displayed when you select the variable on the DETAIL
EDIT window.
2. Select “YES” and the variable select window appears. Then select the
target variable of number and press [ENTER], and the registered
name is displayed instead of the variable number. However, if the
variable number’s name is not yet registered, it is displayed by number
as usual.
<Example> Registration of the byte type variable B000 as “WORK KIND” 

In the case of SET instruction 
S2C396=0 : SET B000 128 
S2C396=1 : SET WORK KIND 128
Select {VARIABLE} from the menu to select each variable

and edit the variable name. Up to 16 characters can be
entered as a variable name. However, when this function is
valid, if the content below is entered, the error message
shows and the name cannot be registered.
• The name already registered
• Letters beginning with a number
• Letters including the signs below: 
( , ) , [ , ] , = , < , > , space, comma
• Letters beginning with “alphabets representing variables” +
“number” 
SUPPLE- <Example> B0..., I0..., BP1..., LEX2... 
MENT
Alphabets representing variables: B, I, D, R, 
S, P, BP, EX, PX, LB, LI LD, LR, LS, LP, LBP, 
LEX, LPX
When the name begins with “ ‘ ”, it is regarded as a comment
and the same comment can be registered for two or more
variables. In this case, although this function is valid, the
number is displayed on the JOB CONTENT window instead
of the name.
<Example> Registration of the byte type variable B001 as 
“WORKNUM” 
S2C396=0 : SET B001 10 
S2C396=1 : SET B001 10
8-23 454 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
DX100 8 Parameter
8.3.0.38 S2C397: I/O VARIABLE CUSTOMIZE FUNCTION

This function enables registration of any particular input/output signal/
variable. Reference and editing of signals/variables are possible on the
same window.
Table 8-6: S2C397
0 Function Invalid
1 Function Valid
With this function valid, the sub-menu {I/O-VARIABLE CUSTOMIZE}

opens under the main menu {ARC WELDING}, {SPOT WELDING},
{GENERAL}, {HANDLING} (differs by application). Select {I/O-VARIABLE
CUSTOMIZE}, and the I/O-VARIABLE CUSTOMIZE window appears as
follows.
Fig. 8-6: I/O VARIABLE CUSTOMIZE Window
On the I/O-VARIABLE CUSTOMIZE window, any of the input/output

signals/variables can be selected and registered (up to 32 items).
Registrable signals/variables are as follows:
Table 8-7: Registrable Items on the I/O-VARIABLE CUSTOMIZE Window
Input/Output USER INPUT SIGNAL
Signals USER OUTPUT SIGNAL
PSEUDO INPUT SIGNAL
Variables BYTE TYPE VARIABLE (B VARIABLE)
INTEGER TYPE VARIABLE (I VARIABLE)
DOUBLE-PRECISION INTEGER TYPE VARIABLE (D
VARIABLE)
The contents and names of the registered signals/variables can be

checked and edited on this window. 
In addition, the data list of registered signals/variables can be loaded,
saved, verified or deleted with an external memory unit. 
Only when this function is valid, “I/O-VARIABLE CUSTOMIZE (file name:
USRIOVAR.DAT)” is displayed and can be selected. To display the “I/O-
VARIABLE CUSTOMIZE (file name: USRIOVAR.DAT)”, select {FD/CF} 
{LOAD} {SAVE} {VERIFY} {DELETE}  {SYSTEM DATA}.
8-24 455 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
DX100 8 Parameter
8.3.0.39 S2C410: WORD REGISTRATION FUNCTION / WORD EDITING

FUNCTION SPECIFICATION
Specifies the valid or invalid to edit the words while inputting the
characters.
0 : Invalid
1 : Vaild
*It is able to edit the words when the security mode is the edit mode or the
management mode.
8.3.0.40 S2C413: JOB UNDELETE FUNCTION

This function doesn’t completely delete a job from its memory when
deleting the job, but saves the data so that the job can be restored as
needed.
This parameter can be set on {TEACHING CONDITION} window.
If a job is deleted while this function is valid, the job disappears from the
JOB LIST window. In this case, {TRASH JOB LIST} is newly displayed to
{JOB} on the main menu and the deleted job is listed on it.
NOTE The job will not be listed on the trash job list and will not be
restored if it is deleted when this function is invalid.
8-25 456 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
DX100 8 Parameter
On the trash job list, the deleted jobs are displayed.
On this window, the following operations are available with the same
operations as job list window.
• Batch selection / canceling selection of the jobs 
( {EDIT} {SELECT ALL} {CANCEL SELECT})
• Job search ({EDIT} {JOB SEARCH COND} )
• Rearrange of the jobs in the order of date / order of name
( {DISPLAY} {DATE} {NAME})
• Job detailed information display ( {DISPLAY} {DETAIL} )
 Restoring the Job

Choose a job to be restored and select {UNDELETE JOB} from {JOB} on
the pull down menu.
A dialog box to confirm restoring the selected job.
Select
[YES] to restore the job. The restored job is deleted from the trash job list
and newly listed to the job list.
[NO} to cancel restoring the job.
8-26 457 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
DX100 8 Parameter
 Deleting the Job Completely

Delete a job from the memory. The job will not be restored after this
operation. 
Choose a job to be completely deleted, then select {DELETE JOB} from
{JOB} on the pull down menu.
A dialog box to confirm deleting the selected job.
Select
[YES] to delete the job completely. The deleted job is deleted from the
trash job list.
[NO} to cancel deleting the job.
The job data remains until it is completely deleted and the

NOTE capacity of the memory becomes less as long as this
function is valid. Delete unnecessary data to keep enough
job capacity.
8.3.0.41 S2C415 to S2C419: TIME RESET

These parameters specify whether resetting operation of the specified
times is permitted or not.
S2C415 : CONTROL POWER ON TIME
S2C416 : SERVO POWER ON TIME
S2C417 : PLAYBACK TIME
S2C418 : WORK TIME
S2C419 : WEAVING TIME
0 : Prohibit Resetting
1 : Permit Resetting
“PERMIT” is set as the initial value for the work time and motion time.
8-27 458 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
DX100 8 Parameter
8.3.0.42 S2C431: TOOL NO. SWITCHING

This parameter specifies whether tool number switching is permitted or
not.
0 : Prohibited (Only number “0” can be used.)
1 : Permitted (64 type of tools from number “0” to “63” can be used.)
8.3.0.43 S2C433: POSITION TEACHING BUZZER

This parameter specifies whether the buzzer sound at position teaching is
used or not.
0 : With buzzer
1 : Without buzzer
8.3.0.44 S2C434: JOB LINKING DESIGNATION (When Twin Synchronous

Function Used)
This parameter specifies whether the manipulator at the synchronizing
side is to be linked when the manipulator and the station at the
synchronized side are performing FWD/BWD or test run, by using the twin
synchronous function.
0 : Not operating
1 : Linking
Fig. 8-7: 0 : Does not operate the synchronizing side while teaching the
synchronized side.
Synchronizing side
Fig. 8-8: 1 : Links the synchronizing side while teaching the synchronized
side.
Synchronizing side
8-28 459 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
DX100 8 Parameter
8.3.0.45 S2C437: PLAYBACK OPERATION CONTINUATION FUNCTION

This function is used to decide where to resume the playback on the start
operation after suspending the playback and moving the cursor or
selecting other jobs.
0: Starts operation where the cursor is located in the job displayed at 
the moment.
1: The playback continuation window appears. Select “YES” and the 
playback resumes where the cursor has been located when the 
playback suspended. If “NO” is selected, the playback resumes 
where the cursor is located in the job displayed at the moment.
Table 8-8: S2C437
Parameter Setting Where the Playback Resumes
Value
Resumes where the cursor is located in the job displayed
0
at the moment.
Resumes where the cursor has been located when the
playback suspended OR where the cursor is located in the
job displayed at the moment.
<Example>
Suspended at step 0003 during the playback of job A

Displays job B
1 
Starts operation

On the playback operation continuation window
• When “YES” selected, the playback resumes from
step 0003 of job A
• When “NO” selected, the playback resumes from the
current position in job B
* When this function is valid (S2C437=1), a light blue cursor is displayed

at the instruction section of step where the playback has been stopped.
When “YES” is selected, the playback resumes where this cursor is
located.
MOVJ VJ=0.78
If a job has been edited or FWD/BWD/TEST RUN

NOTE operation(s) have been executed, the playback cannot
resume where it has suspended. Also this function is
invalid if the reserved start function is set valid (S2C222=0).
8-29 460 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
DX100 8 Parameter
8.3.0.46 S2C544: I/O NAME DISPLAY FUNCTION FOR JOB

When a user input/output signal, whose name is already set, is used as a
job, this function displays the signal name in the form of a comment.
When the specification of the signal is group specification

NOTE (IG#, IGH#, OG#, OGH#), the name will not be displayed.
Also, the name will not be displayed when the job is saved
at external memory devices.
This parameter can be set on {FUNCTION ENABLE}.window.

0 : Invalid
1 : Valid
8.3.0.47 S2C684:ALL AXES ANGLE DISPLAY FUNCTION

This function enables to change the display of manipulator position from
pulse-formed to angle-formed on the specific window.
This function is valid in the following windows.
• Current value (however, it is invalid if the present displayed
coordinate systems are “base”, “robot” or “user”.)
• Command position
• Work home position
• Second work home position
d7 d0
Function Valid/Invalid :1:(Valid)

Cordinated sytem Pulse/Angle :2(Angle)
Data system when angle is specified :4(Ground)
Absolute/Ground
This function can be valid/invalid on {FUNCTION ENABLE} window.
Select {DISPLAY} on the pull down menu while this function is valid, then
{PUSLE}, {ABSOLUTE ANGLE} and {GROUND ANGLE} appear. Select
one so that the presently displayed data can be changed to the selected
data type.
8-30 461 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
DX100 8 Parameter
PULSE
Indicates the pulse data of each axis.
ABSOLUTE ANGLE
Indicates the independent angle at every axes on the basis that the
absolute value is 0[deg] when the pulse is 0.
GROUND ANGLE
Indicates the L- and U-axes angle according to the manipulator installation
direction. The value of unoperated axes may vary depending on the
manipulator’s posture.
NOTE As for the servo track, angle is not indicated but distance
(unit [mm]).
8.3.0.48 S2C713: CONTROL POINT OPERATION SETTING ON THE SERVO

TRACK
This parameter specifies a motion system by which the manipulator’s
control point is fixed while the servo track is in operation.
However, it is valid only when the selected control group is specified as a
servo track and the servo track is operated by jog keys in the cartesian
coordinates.
0 : Normal operation
1 : Control point operation setting on the servo track
8-31 462 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
DX100 8 Parameter
8.4 Parameters According to Interference Area

These parameters limit the P-point maximum envelope of the manipulator
or set the interference area for axis interference or cubic interference.
8.4.0.1 S1CxG400 to S1CxG415: PULSE SOFT LIMIT

Soft limit is set independently for each axis by pulse value setting. Set
current value (pulse value) of the axis at the soft limit set up position.
Operation area
Soft limit
Limit switch
Mechanical
operation limit
8.4.0.2 S2C001: CUBE SOFT LIMIT CHECK

This parameter specifies whether to check the cube soft limit. More than
one soft limit can be specified.
0 : No check
1 : With check
d7 d0
Cube 1 soft limit: Robot 1

If “WITH CHECK” is selected, set up the following parameters.

Units: m
8-32 463 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
DX100 8 Parameter
Cube Soft Limit (Base Coordinates of Robot TCP)

S3C000: Robot 1: + side: X
S3C001: Robot 1: + side: Y
S3C002: Robot 1: + side: Z
S3C003: Robot 1: - side: X
S3C004: Robot 1: - side: Y
S3C005: Robot 1: - side: Z
•
•
•
Soft Limit
Soft limit is a software-type function to limit the range of
movement of the manipulator.
If the TCP reaches the soft limit during operation, the
manipulator automatically stops and no longer moves in that
same direction. An alarm occurs if this soft limit is exceeded
during playback. This soft limit is classified into two types.
• Cube Soft Limit 
Soft limit is set with the absolute value on the base
coordinates.
SUPPLE-
MENT z
x
Y
• Pulse Soft Limit (Independent Axis Soft Limit) 
Refer to section 8.4.0.1 “S1CxG400 to S1CxG415: PULSE
SOFT LIMIT” on page 8-32.
8-33 464 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
DX100 8 Parameter
8.4.0.3 S2C002: S-AXIS INTERFERENCE CHECK

This parameter specifies whether to check for interference with each
manipulator. If “WITH CHECK” is selected, set up the following
parameters.
Units: Pulse
S3C048: S-axis Interference Area Robot 1 (+)
S3C049: S-axis Interference Area Robot 1 (-)
S3C050: S-axis Interference Area Robot 2 (+)
S3C051: S-axis Interference Area Robot 2 (-) 
·
·
·
S3C063: S-axis Interference Area Robot 8 (-)
8-34 465 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
DX100 8 Parameter
8.4.0.4 S2C003 to S2C066: CUBE/AXIS INTERFERENCE CHECK

1. Designation of checking 
These parameters specify the cube/axis interference to be used by bit.
0 : Cube Interference/Axis Interference Not
Used
1 : Robot 1
2 : Robot 2
......
8 : Robot 8
9 : Base Axis 1
10 : Base Axis 2
......
16 : Base Axis 8
17 : Station Axis 1
18 : Station Axis 2
......
40 : Station Axis 24
2. Checking method
Designates whether checking is performed by command or feedback.
Designation of checking (data setting)

0: Not used
1: Robot 1, , 40: Station axis 24
Checking method (bit setting)

0: Command, 1: Feedback
Checking method
The checking method differs according to ON/OFF status of
servo power supply.
Checking Method Designation Servo Power Supply ON Servo Power Supply OFF
SUPPLE- Command Command Feedback
MENT
Feedback Feedback Feedback
During the servo float function operation, checking is

performed by feedback regardless of the checking method
designation.
8-35 466 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
DX100 8 Parameter
Interference Area
It is possible to output whether the TCP during operation is
inside or outside as a status signal, and to set the area to
control the position by parameters S2C003 to S2C194.
When the manipulator attempts to enter this area, the
corresponding input signal (e.g. an “entrance prohibit
signal”) is detected. The manipulator stops immediately if
there is an input signal and goes into waiting status until this
signal is cleared. This signal is processed in the I/O section.
Three methods of interference area settings are prepared for
manipulators and stations. For a system with one
manipulator, use robot 1.
• S-axis Interference Area 
Position is controlled by the pulse value of the S-axis.
(+) side (-) side
In left area In right area
• Cubic Interference Area 

Up to 64 cubic areas can be set. The edges of the cubes
SUPPLE- are set parallel to the robot coordinates or the user
MENT coordinates.
Cube Setting Method
Z
Base coordinates S2C003-S2C066
(robot coordinates, Use cube No
user coordinates) intrf. check?
S2C067-S2C194 Yes
Decide the using
method
S3C064-S3C1087
Set the area
X Y
Up to 64 cubic areas can be set,
each cube is set parallel to Complete
the set coordinates.
• Axis Interference Area 

Up to 64 areas can be set. Each operation area maximum
and minimum value are set for the robot, base axis, and
station axis plus and minus side.
Max value 0 Min value
positive side (+) negative side (-)
ON
OF F
8-36 467 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
DX100 8 Parameter
8.4.0.5 S2C067 to S2C194: CUBE USING METHOD

These parameters specify the coordinates for defining the cube. If the
user coordinates are selected, also specify the user coordinate system
numbers. Set cubic area referring to the cubic interference areas shown
below.
Coordinate specification
0 : Pulse (axis interference)
1 : Base coordinates
2 : Robot coordinates
3 : User coordinates
Coordinate No.: Specify the user coordinate number when selecting “3:
User Coordinates”. 
Units: 1m
Precaution When Setting the Interference Area

It will be necessary to consider the following when setting
the cubic interference and S-axis interference areas. The
manipulator is processed to decelerate to stop from the point
where it enters in the area. Therefore, set the areas in
consideration of the amount of the manipulator movement in
the deceleration section shown in the figure below.
Interference area
Deceleration
SUPPLE- Stop
MENT
Speed
Movement
Speed reduction section
The move amount in the speed reduction section is

dependent on the moving speed of the manipulator at that
time:
V = 1500mm/s  approx. 300mm
(Max.) 
V = 1000mm/s  approx. 160mm 
V = 30mm/s  approx. 3 to 4 mm 
V = 20mm/s  approx. 2mm
8-37 468 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
DX100 8 Parameter
Interference Prevention in Interference Area

Processing to prevent interference is executed in the I/O
processing section. The relation between the DX100 I/O
signal and manipulator operation is shown below.
Start
Is the TCP within Yes

the cube?
No
Is the "CUBE Yes
ENTRANCE PROHIBIT"
signal ON?
No
Outputs "WAIT" signal.
"WAIT" reset
Manipulator stops.
"OPERATING IN CUBE"
signal output
Has it left the check

cube? No
Yes
In wait status with the entrance prohibit signal, the

manipulator just barely enters the area for speed reduction
processing and then stops.
Fig. 8-9: Connection Example Where Two Manipulators are
SUPPLE-
Operated in the Same Area
MENT
DX100
Operating inside
CUBE1
Output in cube during
Operating inside operation.
CUBE2
Output during waiting by
Interference waiting
entrance prohibit signal.
Inside CUBE1
entrance prohibit These signals are checked
when entering the cube.
Inside CUBE2
entrance prohibit
Manipulator A Manipulator B
Operating inside Inside CUBE1

CUBE1 entrance prohibit
Operating inside Inside CUBE2

CUBE2 entrance prohibit
Inside CUBE1 Operating inside

entrance prohibit CUBE1
Inside CUBE2 Operating inside

entrance prohibit CUBE2
Interference waiting Interference waiting
Alarm signal
8-38 469 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
DX100 8 Parameter
8.4.0.6 S3C000 to S3C047: CUBE SOFT LIMIT

These parameters specify auxiliary functions of S2C001 parameter. For
details, see section 8.4.0.2 “S2C001: CUBE SOFT LIMIT CHECK” on
page 8-32.
8.4.0.7 S3C048 to S3C063: S-AXIS INTERFERENCE AREA

These parameters specify auxiliary functions of S2C002 parameter. For
details, see section 8.4.0.3 “S2C002: S-AXIS INTERFERENCE CHECK”
on page 8-34.
8.4.0.8 S3C064 to S3C1087: CUBIC INTERFERENCE AREA

These parameters specify auxiliary functions of S2C003 to S2C066
parameters. For details, see section 8.4.0.4 “S2C003 to S2C066: CUBE/
AXIS INTERFERENCE CHECK” on page 8-35.
8.4.0.9 S3C1089 to S3C1096: ROBOT INTERFERENCE AREA

These parameters specify auxiliary functions of S2C236 to S2C263
parameters. For details, see section 8.4.0.6 “S3C000 to S3C047: CUBE
SOFT LIMIT” on page 8-39.
8.4.0.10 S3C1097: A SIDE LENGTH OF WORK-HOME-POSITION CUBE

Units: 1m
This parameter specifies a side length of the cube for the work home
position.
8-39 470 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
DX100 8 Parameter
8.5 Parameters according to Status I/O

These parameters set the parity check or I/O setting for user input/output
signals.
8.5.0.1 S2C235: USER OUTPUT RELAY WHEN CONTROL POWER IS ON

This parameter specifies the state of the user output relays when the
control power is turned ON. Since the power OFF state, including
peripheral devices, cannot be completely reproduced, take note when
restarting.
0 : Reset to the power OFF state
1 : Initialized (all user relays OFF)
8.5.0.2 S4C000 to S4C015: PARITY OF USER INPUT GROUPS

These parameters specify whether to execute priority checks with
parameters when instructions covering the input group (1G#) are
executed. The instructions covering the input groups are as shown below.
• IF Sentence (JUMP, CALL, RET, PAUSE)
• Pattern Jump, Pattern Job Call
• DIN
• WAIT
d15 d0 d15 d0
S4C000 S4C001
IG#01 IG#17
IG#02 IG#18
IG#03 IG#19
IG#04 IG#20
IG#05 IG#21
IG#06 IG#22
IG#07 IG#23
IG#08 IG#24
IG#09 IG#25
IG#10 IG#26
IG#11 IG#27
IG#12 IG#28
IG#13 IG#29
IG#14 IG#30
IG#15 IG#31
IG#16 IG#32
d15 d0
S4C002
IG#33
IG#34
IG#35
IG#36
IG#37
IG#38
IG#39
IG#40

IG#41
IG#42
IG#43
IG#44
IG#45
IG#46
IG#47
IG#48
Parity bits are set as the highest level bits of each input group and are
written in even parity. If an error is detected during parity check, an alarm
occurs and the manipulator stops. Remains unchanged if no parity check
is specified.
8-40 471 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
DX100 8 Parameter
8.5.0.3 S4C016 to S4C031: PARITY OF USER OUTPUT GROUPS

These parameters specify whether the output group instruction is
executed with parity check (even parity).
d15 d0 d15 d0
S4C016 S4C017
OG#01 OG#17
OG#02 OG#18
OG#03 OG#19
OG#04 OG#20
OG#05 OG#21
OG#06 OG#22
OG#07 OG#23
OG#08 OG#24
OG#09 OG#25
OG#10 OG#26
OG#11 OG#27
OG#12 OG#28
OG#13 OG#29
OG#14 OG#30
OG#15 OG#31
OG#16 OG#32
d15 d0
S4C018
OG#33
OG#34
OG#35
OG#36
OG#37
OG#38
OG#39
OG#40 
OG#41
OG#42
OG#43
OG#44
OG#45
OG#46
OG#47
OG#48
Parity bits are set as the highest level bits of each output group. For
example, if OG#01 is specified with parity and DOUT OG# (1) 2 is
executed, the result will be 00000010 if 2 is binary converted. Since there
will be only one bit (odd) ON at this time, the parity bit (highest level bit)
will be set to ON and 10000010 (130) will be output to OG# (1).
As in the case of a variable such as DOUT OG# (1) B003 parity bits are
added to the contents of the variable data. However, if the contents of the
variable exceed 127, as in the case of DOUT OG# (1) 128, an alarm will
occur. Remains unchanged if no parity check is specified.
8-41 472 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
DX100 8 Parameter
8.5.0.4 S4C032 to S4C047: DATA OF USER INPUT GROUPS

These parameters specify whether to handle the input group data as
binary data or as BCD data when an instruction for the input group (1G#)
is executed. The instructions covering the input groups are as shown
below.
• IF Sentence (JUMP, CALL, RET, PAUSE)
• Pattern Jump, Pattern Job Call
• DIN
• WAIT
d15 d0 d15 d0
S4C032 S4C033
IG#01 IG#17
IG#02 IG#18
IG#03 IG#19
IG#04 IG#20
IG#05 IG#21
IG#06 IG#22
IG#07 IG#23
IG#08 IG#24
IG#09 IG#25
IG#10 IG#26
IG#11 IG#27
IG#12 IG#28
IG#13 IG#29
IG#14 IG#30
IG#15 IG#31
IG#16 IG#32
d15 d0
S4C034
IG#33
IG#34
IG#35
IG#36
IG#37
IG#38
IG#39
IG#40

IG#41
IG#42
IG#43
IG#44
IG#45
IG#46
IG#47
IG#48
8-42 473 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
DX100 8 Parameter
8.5.0.5 S4C048 to S4C063: DATA OF USER OUTPUT GROUPS

These parameters specify whether the output group instruction is
executed with binary data or BCD data.
d15 d0 d15 d0
S4C048 S4C049
OG#01 OG#17
OG#02 OG#18
OG#03 OG#19
OG#04 OG#20
OG#05 OG#21
OG#06 OG#22
OG#07 OG#23
OG#08 OG#24
OG#09 OG#25
OG#10 OG#26
OG#11 OG#27
OG#12 OG#28
OG#13 OG#29
OG#14 OG#30
OG#15 OG#31
OG#16 OG#32
d15 d0
S4C050
OG#33
OG#34
OG#35
OG#36
OG#37
OG#38
OG#39 
OG#40
OG#41
OG#42
OG#43
OG#44
OG#45
OG#46
OG#47
OG#48
Differences Between Binary Data and BCD Data

For the input group and output group, the result will depend
on whether the binary or BCD formula is used.
<Example> When the input function is [01010101]
DATA EDIT DISPLAY
State Binary BCD
Case Case
USER INPUT
GROUP IG#01 0:10 00:161 20 = 1 1 20 = 1 1
IN#0001 #10010 0 21 = 2 0 21 = 2 Total 0
IN#0002 #10011 5
1 22 = 4 4 22 = 4 is in 4
IN#0003 #10012
SUPPLE- IN#0004 #10013 0 23 = 8 0 23 = 8 ones. 0
MENT IN#0005 #10014
1 24 = 16 16 20 = 1 1
IN#0006 #10015
IN#0007 #10016 0 25 = 32 0 21 = 2 Total 0
IN#0008 #10017 5
1 26 = 64 64 22 = 4 is in 4
tens.
0 27 = 128 0 23 = 8 0
85 55
Binary data value BCD data value
!
However, in the case of BCD data, because the upper bound

value is 99, it is not possible to use any value which exceeds
nine in the one or ten digit place.
8-43 474 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
DX100 8 Parameter
8.5.0.6 S4C064 to S4C079: USER OUTPUT GROUP TO BE INITIALIZED AT

SWITCHING MODE
Set the user output group with bit to be initialized at switching mode. Use
these parameters when using user output signals as work instructions for
peripheral devices.
d15 d0 d15 d0
S4C064 S4C066
OG#01 OG#17
OG#02 OG#18
OG#03 OG#19
OG#04 OG#20
OG#05 OG#21
OG#06 OG#22
OG#07 OG#23
OG#08 OG#24
OG#09 OG#25
OG#10 OG#26
OG#11 OG#27
OG#12 OG#28
OG#13 OG#29
OG#14 OG#30
OG#15 OG#31
OG#16 OG#32
d15 d0
S4C066
OG#33
OG#34
OG#35
OG#36
OG#37
OG#38
OG#39
OG#40
OG#41
OG#42

OG#43
OG#44
OG#45
OG#46
OG#47
OG#48
8.5.0.7 S4C240: USER OUTPUT NO. WHEN MANIPULATOR DROP

ALLOWABLE RANGE ERROR OCCURS
This parameter specifies the user output number to output the manipulator
drop allowable range error alarm occurrence externally.
When this function is not used, set “0”.
8-44 475 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
DX100 8 Parameter
8.6 Parameters according to Coordinated or Synchronized Operation
8.6 Parameters according to Coordinated or Synchronized

Operation
These parameters make the settings for coordinated or synchronized
operations between manipulators or between manipulators and stations.
8.6.0.1 S2C212: +MOV or +SMOV INSTRUCTION SPEED INPUT

This parameter specifies whether the speed inputting for move
instructions of the master robot in a coordinated job is permitted or not.
<Example> 0: Not Provided
SMOVL V=100
+MOVL  Master side
Speed specification not
provided
<Example> 1: Provided
SMOV L V=100
+MOV L V=100  Master side
Speed specification
provided
8.6.0.2 S2C213: +MOV INSTRUCTION INTERPOLATION INPUT

This parameter specifies which interpolation is permitted for move
instructions for the master robot in a coordinated job. More than one
instruction can be specified.
d7 d0
+ MOVJ : 1(VALID)
+ MOVL: 2(VALID)
+ MOVC : 4(VALID)
+ MOVS: 8(VALID)
8.6.0.3 S2C231: OPERATION METHOD AT FWD/BWD OPERATION OR TEST

RUN BY INDEPENDENT CONTROL
This parameter specifies the operation method at FWD/BWD operation or
test run by independent control.
0 : The job of the task that is currently displayed operates.
1 : Jobs of all the tasks operate.
8-45 476 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
DX100 8 Parameter
1 When master task is currently displayed:
Sub task 1 : Not operating

Master
task : Operating
Sub task 2
2 When sub task 1 is currently displayed:
Sub task 1
Master Sub task 1
task Master
Sub task 2 task
Sub task 2
3 When sub task 2 is currently displayed:
Sub task 1
Master
task
Sub task 2
0: One of the task jobs that are currently 1: All task jobs operate.
displayed operates.
8.6.0.4 S2C232: JOB AT CALLING MASTER OF SUBTASK BY INDEPENDENT

CONTROL
This parameter specifies the job which is called up when the master of the
subtask is called up by independent control.
0 : Master job
1 : Root job
Master Job: Job registered in the master control window

Root Job: Job activated by PSTART instruction
8.6.0.5 S2C264: STATION AXIS CURRENT VALUE DISPLAY FUNCTION

This parameter specifies whether the function to display the current value
of the station axis in the following units is valid/invalid.
0 : Invalid
1 : Valid
Rotary axis : Angle (deg) 

Servo track : Distance (mm)
Regarding whether to specify the rotary axis or the servo track, refer to
section 8.6.0.6 “S2C265 to S2C288: STATION AXIS DISPLAYED UNIT”.
8.6.0.6 S2C265 to S2C288: STATION AXIS DISPLAYED UNIT

This parameter specifies the station axis displayed unit (bit specification).
0 : Display angle (deg)
1 : Display in distance (mm)
8-46 477 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
DX100 8 Parameter
 Setting Method
Set a numerical value (decimal) where the bit of the axis to be displayed in
the units of distance becomes 1.
d7 d6 d5 d4 d3 d2 d1 d0
Decimal
(32) (16) (8) (4) (2) (1)
Station 1st axis
Station 2nd axis
Station 3rd axis

Station 4th axis
Station 5th axis
Station 6th axis
<Example> When 1st and 3rd axes of station 1 are displayed in the
units of distance:
d7 d6 d5 d4 d3 d2 d1 d0
0 0 0 1 0 1 Set 1 to axis displayed in
(4) (1) distance.
4 + 1 = 5
Therefore, set parameter S2C265 of station 1 to 5.
8.6.0.7 S2C420: POSTURE CONTROL OF SYNCHRONIZED MANIPULATOR

(When Twin Synchronous Function Used)
This parameter specifies the posture control method for synchronized
manipulator performing compensation during playback by using the twin
synchronous function.
0 : Change posture according to station movement
1 : Fixed in relation to the ground
0 : Change posture according to staion movement

8.6.0.8 S2C421: POSTURE CONTROL OF MANIPULATOR IN MULTI-JOB

(When Twin Synchronous Function Used)
This parameter specifies the posture control method for manipulator
executing compensation at the linking side when job linking is performed
during FWD/BWD operation by the twin synchronous function.
0 : Change posture according to station movement
8-47 478 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
DX100 8 Parameter
8.6.0.9 S2C687: OPERATION OF JOB WITHOUT CONTROL GROUP

SPECIFICATION
When the servo power supply is individually turned OFF where jobs in
multiple number of tasks are operated using the independent control
function, the job execution of the control group whose servo power supply
is turned OFF is interrupted. The jobs of other control groups continue
their execution.
For the jobs without control group specification such as master job, the
conditions for execution can be set by the parameter.
0 : Execution possible only when servo power supply to all the axes have
been turned ON.
1 : Execution possible when servo power supply to any axis is turned ON.
8.6.0.10 S2C688: EXECUTION OF “BWD” OPERATION

This parameter prohibits step-back operation of a job without a step.
d7 d0
"BWD" operation for a job without a group axis. 0: Enabled 1: Disabled

"BWD" operation for concurrent job. 0: Enabled 1: Disabled
8.6.0.11 S3C1101: MAXIMUM DEVIATION ANGLE OF CURRENT STATION

POSITION (When Twin Synchronous Function Used)
Used when the twin synchronous function is used. This parameter
specifies the maximum deviation between the teaching position and the
current station position.
0 : No deviation check
Other than 0 : Deviation angle (units : 0.1)
Manipulator at
synchronizing side Conpensation
Sub-task1 Sub-task2
R1 R2 Position set when
teaching synchronizing side
Deviation made
at playback
Station S1
Station
In the above figure on the left, the follower R2 executes the job of subtask
2 in synchronization with the motion of the station axis which is moved by
the R1 job. In this procedure, the job of subtask 2 controls only the R2
robot axis.
If the teaching position of the station in the subtask 2 differs from the
station current position (controlled by the subtask 1 job), the difference is
automatically offset so that R2 keeps the taught position in relation to the
station.
Difference between the taught and the station current positions is always
monitored. If the difference exceeds a set value of the parameter, the
message “PULSE LIMIT (TWIN COORDINATED)” appears.
8-48 479 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
DX100 8 Parameter
8.7 Parameters for Other Functions or Applications

These parameters make the settings for other functions or applications.
8.7.0.1 S1CxG049 to S1CxG051: SMALL CIRCLE CUTTING

These parameters prescribe cutting operation at small circle cutting.
S1CxG049  : Set the minimum diameter of a figure in the units of m
(Minimum diameter) that can be processed by small-circle cutting machine.
S1CxG050  : Set the maximum diameter of a figure in the units of m
(Maximum diameter) that can be processed by small-circle cutting machine.
S1CxG051  : Set the maximum cutting speed at operation by CUT
(Maximum speed) instruction in the units of 0.1mm/s.
8.7.0.2 S1CxG052 to S1CxG053: SMALL CIRCLE CUTTING DIRECTION LIMIT

VALUE
These parameters set the cutting direction limits at small circle cutting.
S1CxG052  : Set the limit value in the positive direction of cutting
(+ direction) angle DIR set by CUT instruction, in the units of 0.01.
S1CxG053  : Set the limit value in the negative direction of cutting
(- direction) angle DIR set by CUT instruction, in the units of 0.01.
8.7.0.3 S1CxG054 to S1CxG055: SMALL CIRCLE CUTTING OVERLAP VALUE

These parameters set the overlapped value at small circle cutting.
S1CxG054  : Set the operation radius at inner rotation in the units of 1
(Operation radius) m after overlapping by CUT instruction.
S1CxG055  : Set the rotation angle at inner rotation in the units of 0.1
(Rotation angle) after overlapping by CUT instruction.
8.7.0.4 S1CxG063, S1CxG064: PATTERN CUTTING DIMENSION

These parameters set the minimum diameter (S1CxG063) and the
maximum diameter (S1CxG064) for the pattern cutting in units of m.
8.7.0.5 S1CxG065: MIRROR SHIFT SIGN INVERSION

This parameter sets which axis to be shifted (mirror-shift: invert the sign).
1st axis (0: Not invert, 1: Invert)
7th axis
8.7.0.6 S2C430: RELATIVE JOB OPERATION METHOD

This parameter specifies how to operate a relative job. A method to
convert a relative job into a standard job (pulse), and a conversion method
to calculate the aimed position (pulse position) when a relative job is
operated can be specified.
0 : Previous step with priority (B-axis moving distance minimized.)
1 : Form with priority
2 Previous step with priority (R-axis moving distance minimized.)
8-49 480 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
DX100 8 Parameter
8.7.0.7 S3C1111 to S3C1190: ANALOG OUTPUT FILTER CONSTANT (When

analog output corresponding to speed function is used)
By setting a constant to filter, a filter processing can be performed for the
output analog signal.
8.7.0.8 S3C1191: CUT WIDTH CORRECTION VALUE (When form cutting

function is used)
This parameter specifies the path correction value for pattern cutting
operation. A value 1/2 of the cut width is set in units of m.
8-50 481 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
DX100 8 Parameter
8.8 Hardware Control Parameters

These parameters make the hardware settings for fan alarm or relay
operation, etc.
8.8.0.1 S2C646: ANTICIPATOR FUNCTION

This parameter specifies anticipation output.
0 : Invalid
1 : Valid
The anticipator function is a function to quicken or slow the ON/OFF timing

of four user output signals and two user output groups. Using this
function, signal output can be carried out before or after the step is
reached. As a result, timing deviation due to delayed motion of peripheral
devices and robot motion can be adjusted.
Setting the time to a negative value (-) advances the signal output.
This setting is effective when adjusting timing deviation due to delayed
motion of peripheral devices.
Setting the time to a positive value (+) delays the signal output.
This setting is effective when adjusting timing deviation due to delayed
robot motion.
<Advanced Signal Output>
Signal output is carried out before the step is reached.
n-1 n n+1
Step Instructions Step
: :
n-1 MOVL
n MOVL NWAIT
ANTOUT AT#(1) ON
n+1 MOVL ON
User output
OFF
Setting time for advanced output
<Delayed Signal Output>

Signal output is carried out after the step is reached.
n-1 n n+1
Step Instructions Step
: :
n-1 MOVL
n MOVL NWAIT
ANTOUT AT#(2) ON
n+1 MOVL ON
User output
OFF
Setting time for delayed output
8-51 482 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
DX100 8 Parameter
8.8.0.2 S4C327 to S4C390: SETTING OF OPERATING RELAY NO.

Up to 64 output signals can be turned ON/OFF with the programming
pendant. The object relay No. is set in these parameters. Although it is
possible to set optional values for output No. 1 to 1024 in the parameters,
the following must be taken into consideration.
• Avoid setting duplicate numbers.
• The signal turned ON or OFF with the programming pendant is
operated again or remains unchanged until the instruction is
executed.
8.8.0.3 S4C391 to S4C454: OPERATING METHOD OF RELAYS

These parameters specify the operating method of output signals by the
programming pendant. The operating method can be specified for each
output signal.
Parameter Setting
Operation of Output Signal
Value
+ON
ON
0
-OFF OFF
+ON ON/OFF with the key

ON while the key
1 is pressed ON
OFF if the key is
not pressed OFF
8.8.0.4 S2C786 to S2C788: COOLING FAN ALARM DETECTION

This parameter specifies a detection for cooling fan 1 to 3 with alarm
sensor, connected to power ON unit.
0 : No detection
1 : Detected with message display
2 : Detected with message and alarm display
8-52 483 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
DX100 8 Parameter
8.8.0.5 S2C789 to S2C792: COOLING FAN ALARM 1 OPERATION

These parameters specify the operation of cooling fan 1 to 3 with alarm
sensor, connected to power ON unit.
Each bit specifies the power ON unit to which the detecting sensor is
connected.
d7 d0
S2C789,S2C793,S2C797
SERVOPACK#1
SERVOPACK#2
d7 d0
S2C790,S2C794,S2C798
SERVOPACK#3
SERVOPACK#4
d7 d0
S2C791,S2C795,S2C799
SERVOPACK#5
SERVOPACK#6
d7 d0
S2C792,S2C796,S2C800
SERVOPACK#7
SERVOPACK#8
8.8.0.8 S2C801 to S2C804: FAN ALARM 1 POWER SOURCE STATUS
8-53 484 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
DX100 8 Parameter
d7 d0
S2C801,S2C805,S2C809
SERVOPACK#1
SERVOPACK#2
d7 d0
S2C802,S2C806,S2C810
SERVOPACK#3
SERVOPACK#4
d7 d0
S2C803,S2C807,S2C811
SERVOPACK#5
SERVOPACK#6
d7 d0
S2C804,S2C808,S2C812
SERVOPACK#7
SERVOPACK#8
8-54 485 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
DX100 8 Parameter
8.9 TRANSMISSION PARAMETERS
8.9 TRANSMISSION PARAMETERS

These parameters are used when the optional FC1, FC2, or data
transmission function is used.
For details, refer to the optional manual “DX100 DATA TRANSMISSION
FUNCTION”.
8.10 Application Parameters
8.10.1 Arc Welding
8.10.1.1 AxP000: APPLICATION

This parameter specifies the application. Set “0” for arc welding.
8.10.1.2 AxP003: WELDING ASSIGNMENT OF WELDING START CONDITION

FILE
This parameter specifies the beginning condition number in the welding
start condition file to be assigned to Power Source 2. Condition files of a
lower number are automatically assigned to Power Source 1. For a
system with one Power Source, set “49” (maximum value).
Condition file
Power
Source 1
Power
Source 2
8.10.1.3 AxP004: WELDING ASSIGNMENT OF WELDING END CONDITION

FILES
This parameter specifies the beginning condition number in the welding
END condition file to be assigned to Power Source 2. Condition files of a
lower number are automatically assigned to Power Source 1. For a
system with one Power Source, set “13” (maximum value).
Power
Source 1
Power
Source 2
8.10.1.4 AxP005: WELDING SPEED PRIORITY

This parameter specifies whether the welding speed is specified by the
“ARCON” instruction, by the welding start condition file, or by the
additional times of the “MOV” instruction.
8.10.1.5 AxP009: WORK CONTINUING

This parameter specifies whether to output an “ARCON” instruction to
restart after the manipulator stopped while the “ARCON” instruction is
being output.
8-55 486 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
DX100 8 Parameter
8.10.1.6 AxP010: WELDING INSTRUCTION OUTPUT

This parameter specifies the beginning number (0 to 12) of the analog
output channel to the Power Source. “0” indicates that no Power Source
exists.
8.10.1.7 AxP011, AxP012: MANUAL WIRE OPERATION SPEED

These parameters specify the manual wire operation speed as a
percentage of the maximum instruction value. Instruction polarity is
determined by the current instruction in the Power Source characteristic
file. The setting range is from 0 to 100.
8.10.1.8 AxP013, AxP014: WELDING CONTROL TIME

These parameters specify the welding control time in units of minutes.
The setting range is from 0 to 999.
8.10.1.9 AxP015 to AxP017: NUMBER OF WELDING CONTROL

These parameters specify the number of welding controls. The setting
range is from 0 to 99.
8.10.1.10 AxP026 to AxP029: TOOL ON/OFF USER OUTPUT NO. (Jigless

system)
These parameters specify the user output number for the tool open/close
operation by specific keys.
8.10.2 Handling Application
8.10.2.1 AxP002, AxP004: f1 KEY FUNCTION

These parameters set the output signal to assign for f1 key.
0: Not specified
1 to 4: Specific outputs for HAND-1 to HAND4-1
5: User output (No. is specified by AxP004).
8.10.2.2 AxP003, AxP005: f2 KEY FUNCTION

These parameters set the output signal to assign for f2 key.
0: Not specified
1 to 4: Specific outputs for HAND-2 to HAND4-2
5: User output (No. is specified by AxP005)
8.10.3 Spot Welding
8.10.3.1 AxP003: MAXIMUM NUMBER OF CONNECTED POWER SOURCES

This parameter specify the maximum number of power sources which are
to be used. The value is automatically set at start-up. No modification is
needed.
8-56 487 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
DX100 8 Parameter
8.10.3.2 AxP004: GUN FULL OPEN STROKE ON/OFF SIGNAL

This parameter specifies which stroke switching signal is output ON or
OFF to make the gun fully-opened for each gun.
Bit specification (1 for 01) for 8 guns. The initial setting is “0”.
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
| | | | | | | |
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 Gun number
8.10.3.3 AxP005: STROKE CHANGE ANSWER TIME LIMIT

When using the X2 gear mechanical stopper gun and switching gun
stroke, this parameter sets the time from the stroke-switching-sequence
start until the pressure instruction end.
The initial setting is “0”, with which the switching signal is output for the
“stopper-type stroke switching time” set in the file, and then the gun
pressure instruction is turned OFF.
8.10.3.4 AxP006: PARITY SPECIFICATION FOR WELDING CONDITIONS

When adding the parity signal to the welding condition signal with the
Power Source connected to each welding gun, this parameter specifies
odd or even parity.
Bit specification for 4 Power Sources. (0 : odd number, 1 : even number)
The initial setting is “0”.
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
| | | |
4 3 2 1 Power Source number
8.10.3.5 AxP007: ANTICIPATE TIME

When executing the GUNCL or SPOT instruction with NWAIT specified in
the previous move instruction but the time is not specified by ATT in the
GUNCL or SPOT instruction, this parameter specifies the anticipate
condition (time). The initial setting is “0”, with which the each instruction is
executed as soon as the taught position of the previous move instruction
is reached, as normal operation.
8.10.3.6 AxP015: WELDING ERROR RESET OUTPUT TIME

This parameter sets the output time of the welding error reset signal to the
Power Source when the alarm reset signal is input.
If the setting is "0", the welding error reset signal is not output to the Power
Source even if the alarm reset signal is input.
8.10.3.7 AxP016, AxP017: ELECTRODE WEAR AMOUNT ALARM VALUE

These parameters set the electrode wear amount alarm values (AxP016:
movable side, AxP017: fixed side) at the wear detection.
8-57 488 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
DX100 8 Parameter
8.10.4 General-purpose Application
8.10.4.1 AxP009: WORK CONTINUE PROHIBIT

This parameter specifies whether to output TOOLON instruction or not at
restarting when the work is stopped for some reasons during the output of
TOOLON instruction.
8-58 489 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
DX100 9 General Purpose Application
9.1 Simplified Teaching and Playback
9 General Purpose Application
9.1.1 Teaching
9.1.1.1 Preparation for Teaching

Perform the following tasks before starting to teach.
• Set the operation mode to teach mode.

• Enter the job name.
1. Confirm that the mode switch on the

programming pendant is set to “TEACH.” If not,
set the switch to “TEACH.”
REMOTE TEACH
PLAY
REMOTE TEACH
PLAY
REMOTE TEACH
PLAY
2. Press [SERVO ON READY].

The SERVO ON lamp will blink. If [SERVO ON SERVO
ON
READY] is not pressed, the servo power supply READY
cannot be turned ON using the Enable switch.
3. Select {JOB} under the main menu, and select

{CREATE NEW JOB} in the sub menu. MAIN
MENU
SELECT
SELECT
9-1 490 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
4. After the NEW JOB CREATE window appears,

press [SELECT].
SELECT
5. After the following window appears, input the

job name. The word “TEST” is used in this
example job name.
6. Move the active window to software keypad by

pressing the [AREA] key. Move the cursor to “T”
SELECT
and press [SELECT]. Enter “E,” “S,” and “T” in
the same manner. The characters can also be
entered by directly touching each character on
the screen.
9-2 491 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
7. Press [ENTER] to register.

ENTER
ENTER
8. Move the cursor to “EXECUTE” and press

[SELECT]. The job “TEST” is registered and the
SELECT
job is displayed. The NOP and END instructions
are automatically registered.
Characters which can be Used for Job Names
Job names can be created from numbers and the

SUPPLE-
MENT
alphabetical letters. The input display can be switched
between upper-case characters, lower-case characters, and
GO BACK
symbols by pressing the page key PAGE

during the operation
5. Up to 32 characters can be used.
9-3 492 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
9.1.1.2 Teaching Procedure

To playback the manipulator, the instruction to move the manipulator must
be written in a job. This instruction is called a move instruction. The
destination position, the interpolation method, the play speed, etc. are
registered in the move instruction.
Main move instructions begin with “MOV” in the INFORM III language
used by the DX100.
<Example>
MOVJ VJ=50.00
MOVL V=1122 PL=1
<Example>
Refer to the following JOB CONTENT window. When executing playback,
the manipulator moves to the position of Step 1 with the interpolation type
and play speed registered in Step 1’s move instruction. Then, the
manipulator moves between Steps 1 and 2 with the interpolation type and
play speed registered in Step 2’s move instruction. Then, the manipulator
moves between Steps 2 and 3 with the interpolation type and play speed
registered in Step 3’s move instruction. After the manipulator reaches the
position of Step 3, the manipulator then executes the TIMER instruction
followed by the DOUT instruction, and then continues on to Step 4.
JOB CONTENT
JOB-A STEP NO: 0003
CONTROL GROUP: R1 TOOL: 00
0000 NOP
0001 MOVJ VJ=50.00 Step 1
0003 MOVL V=1122 Step 3
0004 TIMER T=5.00
Line number
0005 DOUT OT#(1) ON
0006 MOVL V=1122 Step 4
0008 END
Step 3
Step 2 MOVL V=1122
MOVJ VJ=50.00
To Step 4
Step 1
MOVJ VJ=50.00
9-4 493 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
 Teaching a Job
A job is a work program that describes the tasks that the manipulator will
execute. Jobs are created using a robot programming language called
INFORM III.
The following example will instruct you how to teach the manipulator all of
the steps from Point A to Point B of the following workpiece. This job can
be completed in 6 steps.
Fig. 9-1: Teaching a Job
CAUTION
Ensure that the teaching operation is locked.
Ensure that there is a safe distance between you and the manipulator.
TEACHING
Register
each step.
Step 1
Step 6
Step 6
Step 5
Step 2
Step 3 A B Step 4
Overlap
the first step
Step 1
and last step.
New Step
Step 6
Step Confirmation
INTER + TEST BWD FWD
LOCK START
Actual work is not performed here.
9-5 494 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
 Step 1 -- Standby Position

Always be sure the manipulator is in a safe work area before operation.
Step 1
1. Grip the Enable switch and the servo power will

turn ON. The manipulator can then be operated.
2. Move the manipulator to the standby position X- X+ X- X+
using the axis operation keys. Be sure the

S- S+ R- R+
Y- Y+ Y- Y+
L- L+ B- B+
position is safe and that the work area is

Z- Z+ Z- Z+
U- U+ T- T+
7- 7+
appropriate for the job to be programmed.
3. Select joint interpolation by pressing [MOTION

TYPE]. Joint instruction “MOVJ...” will be MOTION
displayed in the input buffer line. TYPE
MOVJ VJ=0.78
4. Move the cursor to the line number 0000 and

press [SELECT].
SELECT
0000 NOP
0001 END
5. The input buffer line appears. Move the cursor

to the right to VJ=*.**, which shows the speed.
While pressing [SHIFT] simultaneously, move
the cursor up and down (to higher and
lower play speeds) until the desired speed is
specified.
SHIFT
Set the speed to 50%.
MOVJ VJ=50.00
6. Press [ENTER]. Step1 (Line 0001) is registered.

0000 NOP ENTER
ENTER
0001 MOVJ VJ=50.00

0002 END
9-6 495 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
 Step 2 -- Near the Work Start Position

Define the manipulator work pose.
Step 1
Step 2
1. Move the manipulator to the working position X- X+ X- X+
using the axis operation keys.

S- S+ R- R+
Y- Y+ Y- Y+
L- L+ B- B+
Z- Z+ Z- Z+
U- U+ T- T+
7- 7+
2. Press [ENTER]. Step 2 (Line 0002) is

registered.
ENTER
ENTER
0000 NOP
0001 MOVJ VJ=50.00
0002 MOVJ VJ=50.00
0003 END
9-7 496 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
 Step 3 -- Work Start Position

Move the manipulator to the work start position with the pose as shown in
Step 2.
Step 1
Step 2
Step 3
1. Change to medium speed by pressing [FAST] or

[SLOW] until is displayed in the status area. FAST
MANUAL SPEED
JOB EDIT DISPLAY UTILITY SLOW
2. Do not release the pose in Step 2. Press

[COORD] to select the cartesian coordinates.
X- X+
TOOL SEL S- S+
X-
R-
X+
R+
Y- Y+ Y- Y+
L- L+ B- B+
COORD
Move the manipulator to the welding start
Z- Z+ Z- Z+
U- U+ T- T+
7- 7+
position using the axis operation keys.
3. With the cursor located on the line number

0002, press [SELECT].
SELECT

to the right to VJ=*.**, which shows the speed.
specified.
SHIFT
Set the speed to 12.50%.
MOVJ VJ=12.50

registered.
ENTER
ENTER
0000 NOP
0001 MOVJ VJ=50.00
0002 MOVJ VJ=50.00
0003 MOVJ VJ=12.50
0004 END
9-8 497 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
 Step 4 -- Work End Position

Specify the work end position.
Step 1
Step 2
Step 3
Step 4
1. Move the manipulator to the work end position X- X+ X- X+
with the axis operation keys. While the

S- S+ R- R+
Y- Y+ Y- Y+
L- L+ B- B+
manipulator is moving, keep a wide enough

Z- Z+ Z- Z+
U- U+ T- T+
7- 7+
distance to ensure it will not strike the

workpiece. There is no need to follow the work
line too closely.
2. Press [MOTION TYPE] to select linear

interpolation (MOVL). MOTION
TYPE
MOVL V=66
3. With the cursor located on the line number

0003, press [SELECT].
SELECT
MOVL V=66

to the right to V=*.**, which shows the speed.
specified.
SHIFT
Set the speed to 138 cm/min.
MOVL V=138

registered.
ENTER
ENTER
0000 NOP
0001 MOVJ VJ=50.00
0002 MOVJ VJ=50.00
0003 MOVJ VJ=12.50
0004 MOVL V=138
0005 END
9-9 498 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
 Step 5 -- Clear Position

Move the manipulator to a position where it will not strike the workpiece or
fixture.
Step1
Step2
Step5
Step3
Step4
1. Change the speed to high speed by pressing

[FAST]. FAST
MANUAL SPEED
NOTE This button only affects teaching speed. When the job is
played, the job will execute at the speed defined in Step 4.
2. Move the manipulator with the axis operation X- X+ X- X+
keys to a position where it will not strike the

S- S+ R- R+
Y- Y+ Y- Y+
L- L+ B- B+
fixture.
Z- Z+ Z- Z+
U- U+ T- T+
7- 7+
3. Press [MOTION TYPE] to set to the joint

interpolation type (MOVJ). MOTION
MOVJ V=12.50 TYPE
4. With the cursor located on line number 0004,

press [SELECT].
SELECT
MOVJ VJ=12.50

to the right to VJ=12.50, which shows the
speed. While pressing [SHIFT] simultaneously,
move the cursor up and down (to higher
and lower play speeds) until the desired speed
is specified.
SHIFT
Set the speed to 50%.
MOVJ VJ=50.00

0000 NOP
ENTER
ENTER
0001 MOVJ VJ=50.00
0002 MOVJ VJ=50.00
0003 MOVJ VJ=12.50
0004 MOVL V=138
0005 MOVJ VJ=50.00
0006 END
9-10 499 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
 Step 6 -- Near the Standby Position

Move the manipulator near the standby position.
Step1
Step6
Step2
Step3 Step5
Step4
1. Move the manipulator near the standby position X- X+ X- X+
with the axis operation keys.

S- S+ R- R+
Y- Y+ Y- Y+
L- L+ B- B+
Z- Z+ Z- Z+
U- U+ T- T+
7- 7+

0000 NOP ENTER
ENTER
0001 MOVJ VJ=50.00

0002 MOVJ VJ=50.00
0003 MOVJ VJ=12.50
0004 MOVL V=138
0005 MOVJ VJ=50.00
0006 MOVJ VJ=50.00
0007 END
9-11 500 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
 Ensuring the First and Last Step are Identical

The manipulator has stopped at Step 6, which should be very close to
Step1.
It is possible to move directly from the job end position of Step 5 to Step1,
so the manipulator can begin the next job quickly and efficiently.
The following operation will make Step 6 (end position) and Step1
(standby position) identical.
Modified Step 6
Step 1 Corrent Step 6
Step 2 Step 5
Step 3 Step 4
1. Move the cursor to Step1 (Line 0001).

0000 NOP
0001 MOVJ VJ=50.00
0002 MOVJ VJ=50.00
0003 MOVJ VJ=12.50
0004 MOVL V=138
0005 MOVJ VJ=50.00
0006 MOVJ VJ=50.00
0007 END
2. Press [FWD]. The manipulator will move to

Step1.
FWD
3. Move the cursor to Step 6 (Line 0006).

0000 NOP
0001 MOVJ VJ=50.00
0002 MOVJ VJ=50.00
0003 MOVJ VJ=12.50
0004 MOVL V=138
0005 MOVJ VJ=50.00
0006 MOVJ VJ=50.00
0007 END
4. Press [MODIFY].
MODIFY
5. Press [ENTER]. This will change the position of

Step 6 to be the same as Step1.
ENTER
ENTER
9-12 501 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
9.1.1.3 Path Confirmation

The job is now complete. Try to check each step separately to ensure
there are no problems.
1. Move the cursor to Step 1 (Line 0001).
0000 NOP
0001 MOVJ VJ=50.00
0002 MOVJ VJ=50.00
0003 MOVJ VJ=12.50
0004 MOVL V=138
0005 MOVJ VJ=50.00
0006 MOVJ VJ=50.00
0007 END
2. Change to medium speed by pressing [FAST]

or [SLOW]. FAST
MANUAL SPEED
JOB EDIT DISPLAY UTILITY SLOW
3. Press [FWD] to confirm each step executed by

the manipulator. Each time [FWD] is pressed,
FWD
the manipulator moves one step.
4. When you finish step confirmation, move the

cursor to the beginning of the job.
5. Run all the steps continuously. Hold down

[INTERLOCK] and press [TEST START]. The INTER TEST
manipulator plays back all the steps LOCK START
continuously and stops when one cycle is
finished.
Proceed to the next section to change the position and speed of the job
steps.
9-13 502 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
9.1.1.4 Correcting a Job
CAUTION
• After the job is corrected, be sure to confirm the path.
 Before Correcting a Job

Confirm the manipulator’s motion in each step. If any position modification
or adding or deleting of steps is necessary, display the job content first
with the following procedure.
1. Select {JOB} under the main menu and {JOB}

under the sub menu to display the JOB MAIN
CONTENT window. MENU
SELECT
SELECT
9-14 503 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
9.1.1.5 Changing the Position Data

Change the position registered in Step 2.
Current Step 2
New Step 2
1. Move the manipulator to Step 2 (Line 0002) by

pressing [FWD].
FWD
2. Move the manipulator to the modified position X- X+ X- X+
with the axis operation keys.

S- S+ R- R+
Y- Y+ Y- Y+
L- L+ B- B+
Z- Z+ Z- Z+
U- U+ T- T+
7- 7+
3. Press [MODIFY].
MODIFY
4. Press [ENTER]. The step’s position data is

changed.
ENTER
ENTER
9-15 504 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
 Adding a Step
Add a new step between Step 5 and Step 6.
Step6 Step7
Add Step6
Step5 Step5

pressing [FWD].
FWD
0000 NOP
0001 MOVJ VJ=50.00
0002 MOVJ VJ=50.00
0003 MOVJ VJ=12.50
0004 MOVL V=138
0005 MOVJ VJ=50.00
0006 MOVJ VJ=50.00
0007 END
2. Move the manipulator to the position at which X- X+ X- X+
you wish to add a step using the axis operation

S- S+ R- R+
Y- Y+ Y- Y+
L- L+ B- B+
keys.
Z- Z+ Z- Z+
U- U+ T- T+
7- 7+
3. Press [INSERT].
INSERT
4. Press [ENTER]. The step is added. When a

step is added, the numbering is automatically
ENTER
ENTER
adjusted to count the new step.

0000 NOP
0001 MOVJ VJ=50.00
0002 MOVJ VJ=50.00
0003 MOVJ VJ=12.50
0004 MOVL V=138
0005 MOVJ VJ=50.00
0006 MOVJ VJ=50.00
0007 MOVJ VJ=50.00
0008 END
9-16 505 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
 Deleting a Step
Delete the step you just added.
Step 7 Step 6
Step 6 D el ete
Step 5 Step 5

pressing [FWD].
FWD
0000 NOP
0001 MOVJ VJ=50.00
0002 MOVJ VJ=50.00
0003 MOVJ VJ=12.50
0004 MOVL V=138
0005 MOVJ VJ=50.00
0006 MOVJ VJ=50.00
0007 MOVJ VJ=50.00
0008 END
2. Make sure the cursor is on the step you wish to

delete, and press [DELETE]. DELETE
3. Press [ENTER]. The step is deleted. When a

step is deleted, the numbering of step is
ENTER
ENTER
automatically adjusted corresponding to the

deletion.
0000 NOP
0001 MOVJ VJ=50.00
0002 MOVJ VJ=50.00
0003 MOVJ VJ=12.50
0004 MOVL V=138
0005 MOVJ VJ=50.00
0006 MOVJ VJ=50.00
0007 END
When “Error 2070: Set Robot Exactly to Taught Position”

Occurs
When the operator presses [ENTER] during the previous

operation, an error can occur in some cases. The error
occurs because the manipulator has not been moved
exactly to the taught position. Cancel the error with either of
SUPPLE- the following two procedures:
MENT
• Press [CANCEL] and press [FWD] to move the

manipulator to the position of the step.
• Press [MODIFY] and press [ENTER] to change the position
data of the step, then press [DELETE] and press [ENTER].
If the cursor in the window is blinking, the manipulator is not
in the taught position.
9-17 506 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
 Changing the Speed between Steps

Change the manipulator speed. Slow the speed between Step 3 and 
Step 4.
1. Move the cursor to Step 4.

0000 NOP
0001 MOVJ VJ=50.00
0002 MOVJ VJ=50.00
0003 MOVJ VJ=12.50
0004 MOVL V=138
0005 MOVJ VJ=50.00
0006 MOVJ VJ=50.00
0007 END
2. Move the cursor to the instruction and press

[SELECT].
SELECT
0000 NOP
0001 MOVJ VJ=50.00
0002 MOVJ VJ=50.00
0003 MOVJ VJ=12.50
0004 MOVL V=138
0005 MOVJ VJ=50.00
0006 MOVJ VJ=50.00
0007 END

to the right to “V=138,” which shows the speed.
specified.
SHIFT
Set the speed to 66cm/min.
0000 NOP
0001 MOVJ VJ=50.00
0002 MOVJ VJ=50.00
0003 MOVJ VJ=12.50
0004 MOVL V= 66
0005 MOVJ VJ=50.00
0006 MOVJ VJ=50.00
0007 END
4. Press [ENTER]. The speed is changed.

0000 NOP ENTER
ENTER
0001 MOVJ VJ=50.00

0002 MOVJ VJ=50.00
0003 MOVJ VJ=12.50
0004 MOVL V=66
0005 MOVJ VJ=50.00
0006 MOVJ VJ=50.00
0007 END
SUPPLE-
The unit for speed can be verified and modified by “SPEED
MENT DATA INPUT FORM” from {SETUP}  {OPERATE COND}.
9-18 507 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
9.1.2 Playback
9.1.2.1 Preparation Before Playback
To run the program from the beginning of the job, perform

the following operation.
• Move the cursor to the beginning of the job.
NOTE • Move the manipulator close to Step 1 with the axis
operation keys.
When playback is started, the manipulator begins to move
from the Step 1.
9.1.2.2 Playback Procedure

Begin operation only after ensuring there is no one in the working
envelope of the manipulator.
1. Switch the mode switch on the programming

pendant to “PLAY.”
REMOTE TEACH
PLAY
REMOTE TEACH
PLAY
REMOTE TEACH
PLAY
2. Press [SERVO ON READY] to turn ON the

servo power. SERVO
ON
READY
3. Press [START]. The manipulator will perform

one complete taught cycle and then stop.
START
9-19 508 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
9.1.3 Example for General Purpose Application
9.1.3.1 Example Job

The figure below shows an example of cutting. The job creation
procedure is then explained.
Solenoid valve
Three-phase power source
200VAC
Compliance (+10%
-15% )
Tool
Workpiece Manipulator Programming
pendant
Pneumatic source
Air line
Valve control
cable
Fixture
Manipulator cable
NX100
Line Instruction Explanation

0000 NOP
0001 MOVJ VJ=25.00 Moves manipulator to the standby position. (Step 1)
0002 MOVJ VJ=25.00 Moves manipulator near the cutting start position. (Step 2)
0003 MOVJ VJ=12.50 Moves manipulator to the cutting start position. (Step 3)
0004 TOOLON Starts cutting.
0005 MOVL V=50.0 Moves manipulator to the cutting end position. (Step 4)
0006 TOOLOF Ends cutting.
0007 MOVJ VJ=25.00 Moves manipulator to the position where the tools and (Step 5)
workpieces do not interfere.
0008 MOVJ VJ=25.00 Moves manipulator to the standby position. (Step 6)
0009 END
9-20 509 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
9.1.3.2 Teaching Procedure

The teaching procedure of Step 2 which specifies the cutting pose and
Step 3 and 4 (cutting section) are explained.
• Teach Step 1, which is the standby position, to a safe

position where the manipulator will not collide with the
NOTE workpiece and the tool.
• Confirm the cutting path with [FWD] and [BWD] after
teaching.
 Step 2 -- Near cutting position

Define the cutting pose.
1. Specify the correct posture with the axis X- X+ X- X+
operation keys for the manipulator to start

S- S+ R- R+
Y- Y+ Y- Y+
L- L+ B- B+
cutting.
Z- Z+ Z- Z+
U- U+ T- T+
7- 7+
2. Press [ENTER]. Step 2 is registered.
0000 NOP ENTER

ENTER
0001 MOVJ VJ=25.00

0002 MOVJ VJ=25.00
0003 END
9-21 510 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
 Step 3 -- Cutting Start Position

Move to the cutting start position with the pose as shown in Step 2, and
register the TOOLON instruction.
1. Change to medium speed by pressing [FAST] or

[SLOW]. Medium speed: is displayed in the FAST
status area. MANUAL SPEED
SLOW
2. Move the manipulator to the cutting start X- X+ X- X+
position with the axis operation keys. At this

S- S+ R- R+
Y- Y+ Y- Y+
L- L+ B- B+
time, do not release the pose input in Step 2.

Z- Z+ Z- Z+
U- U+ T- T+
7- 7+
3. With the cursor located on the line number,

press [SELECT].
SELECT
MOVJ VJ=25.00

to the right to “VJ=25.00,” which shows the
speed. While pressing [SHIFT] simultaneously,
move the cursor up and down (to higher
and lower play speeds) until the desired speed
is specified.
SHIFT
Set the speed to 12.50%.
MOVJ VJ=12.50

0000 NOP ENTER
ENTER
0001 MOVJ VJ=25.00

0002 MOVJ VJ=25.00
0003 MOVJ VJ=12.50
0004 END
6. Press [2/TOOL ON]. “TOOLON” is displayed in

the input buffer line. .
TOOL OF
TOOLON
7. Press [ENTER]. The TOOLON instruction is

registered.
ENTER
ENTER
9-22 511 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
 Step 4 -- Cutting End Position

Define the cutting end position.
1. Move the manipulator to the cutting end position X- X+ X- X+
with the axis operation keys. It is necessary to

S- S+ R- R+
Y- Y+ Y- Y+
L- L+ B- B+
choose a direction in which the treatment device

Z- Z+ Z- Z+
U- U+ T- T+
7- 7+
and the tools do not interfere when the

manipulator moves, and teach that position.
2. Set linear interpolation (MOVL) by pressing

[MOTION TYPE]. MOTION
TYPE
MOVL V=11.0
3. With the cursor located on the line number,

press [SELECT].
SELECT
MOVL V=11.0

to the right to “V=11.0,” which shows the speed.
SELECT
Press [SELECT] to enable the input of
numbers. Then, input the desired value of
50.0mm/s with the Numeric keys and press 7 8 9
[ENTER]. 4 5 6
ENTER
1 2 3
TOOL ON
TOOL ON JOB
0MANUAL . -
TOOL OF
OPEN TOOL OF JOB

0000 NOP ENTER
ENTER
0001 MOVJ VJ=25.00

0002 MOVJ VJ=25.00
0003 MOVJ VJ=12.50
0004 TOOLON
0005 MOVL V=50.0
0006 END
6. Press [./TOOL OF]. “TOOLOF” is displayed in

the input buffer line. .
TOOLOF
TOOL OF
7. Press [ENTER]. The TOOLOF instruction is

registered.
ENTER
ENTER
9-23 512 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
9.1.3.3 Confirmation of Cutting Operation (Speed Limitation Drive)

The speed limitation drive is executed to confirm the taught path. All
the operations operate below the limitation speed during teach
mode (250mm/s usually) in the speed limitation drive. If the taught
speed is below the limitation speed, the operation is executed at
the same speed as the teaching procedure.
1. Switch the mode switch on the programming

pendant to “PLAY.”
REMOTE TEACH
PLAY
REMOTE TEACH
PLAY
REMOTE TEACH
PLAY
2. Select {UTILITY} and {SETUP SPECIAL RUN}.

The SPECIAL PLAY window appears.
3. Move the cursor to the “SPEED LIMIT” setting

and press [SELECT]. The condition becomes
SELECT
“VALID” and the speed limit is turned ON.
 Cutting Execution
Once the path has been determined, cutting is finally executed at actual
speed. If the job is played back with the speed limitation drive disabled,
cutting is executed at taught speed.
9-24 513 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
9.2 Operation for Tool Control
9.2.1 Function Keys

The function keys for tool control are assigned to the Numeric keys as
described below.
7 8 9
4 5 6
1 2 3
TOOL ON
TOOL ON JOB
0MANUAL . -
TOOL OF
OPEN TOOL OF JOB
Registers the TOOLON instruction.

2 If [INTERLOCK] is pressed simultaneously, the TOOLON
TOOL ON operation is executed.
Registers the TOOLOF instruction.

. If [INTERLOCK] is pressed simultaneously, the
TOOL OF TOOLOFF operation is executed.
Registers the CALL instruction for the reserved job

3 TOOLONxx.
TOOL ON
JOB
Registers the CALL instruction for the reserved job

- TOOLOFxx.
TOOL OF
JOB
9-25 514 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
9.2.2 Tool Control Settings

The following setting can be performed on the GENERAL DIAGNOSIS
window.
1. Select {GENERAL} under the main menu.
2. Select {GENERAL DIAGNOSIS}.
– The GENERAL DIAGNOSIS window appears.
– Select "CONT" to continue the work operation when the manipulator

is restarted after it abort for any reason during the work operation.
Select "STOP" to abort the work operation if the manipulator stops.
When the manipulator is restarted, it moves without doing any work.
Use the work start command to restart the work instruction.
3. Select the setting data of "WORKING ABORT PROCESS."
– Each time [SELECT] is pressed, "CONT" and "STOP" is alternately
displayed. The displaying state is the current setting.
9-26 515 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
9.2.3 Work Instructions
9.2.3.1 TOOLON/TOOLOF Instructions

1. These instructions are to perform TOOLON/TOOLOFF. The function
keys are [TOOLON] and [TOOLOF].
TOOLON TOOLOF
2 .
TOOL ON TOOL OF

2. Select {JOB}.
3. Press [TOOLON] or [TOOLOF].
– The TOOLON or TOOLOF instruction is displayed in the input buffer
line. Or press [INFORM LIST] to display the instruction box and
select the TOOLON/TOOLOF instruction.
TOOLON
– TOOLON
Turns ON the work instruction.
Turns ON the work start command (system output relay #51530)
and waits for the work start response (system input relay #41130).
The next instruction is executed when the work response turns ON.
The work start response relay turns ON immediately after the work
start command is output.
– TOOLOF
Turns OFF the work instruction.
Turns ON the work end command (system output relay #51531) and
waits for the work end response (system input relay #41131).
The next instruction is executed when the work end response turns
ON.
The work end response relay turns ON immediately after the work
end command is output. The work instruction is programmed to hold
after the work start command turns ON and to turn OFF when the
work end command turns ON.
When the manipulator stops during the work operation, the work
instruction turns OFF.
When restarting, turn ON the work instruction when "WORKING
ABORT PROCESS" is set to "CONT." Do not turn OFF the work
instruction when "STOP" is set.
WORK START WORK END INHB WORK CONT #70040
WORK INST
HOLD
WORK START
WORK START
RESPONSE
WORK END
WORK END
RESPONSE
9-27 516 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
4. Press [INSERT].
5. Press [ENTER].
9.2.3.2 CALL Instruction

This instruction calls a reserved job TOOLONxx or TOOLOFxx. The
function keys for registration are [TOOLON JOB] and [TOOLOF
JOB].

2. Select {JOB}.
3. Press [TOOLON JOB] or [TOOLOF JOB].
– The CALL instruction is displayed in the input buffer line.
CALL JOB:TOOLON
4. Select the job name.

5. Press [SELECT].
– The window for character input appears. 
The job name can now be changed. Modify the job name and press
[ENTER].
6. Press [INSERT].
7. Press [ENTER].
9.2.3.3 WVON Instruction

This instruction starts the weaving motion. Specify conditions in the
weaving condition file when registering the WVON instruction.
2. Select {JOB}.
4. Select the WVON instruction.
– The WVON instruction is displayed in the input buffer line.
WVON WEV#(1)
– To register the instruction displayed in the input buffer line without

editing, press [INSERT] and then press [ENTER].
5. Select the file number and edit.
– The input line is displayed.
Weaving_file_no.=
WVON WEV#( ) ON
– Input weaving file number using the Numeric keys and press
[ENTER]. (In the following example, 2 is entered.)
WVON WEV#( 2 )
6. Press [INSERT].
7. Press [ENTER].
9-28 517 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
9.2.3.4 WVOF Instruction

This instruction ends the weaving motion.

2. Select {JOB}.
4. Select the WVOF instruction.
– The WVOF instruction is displayed in the input buffer line.
WVOF
5. Press [INSERT].
6. Press [ENTER].
9-29 518 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
9.3 Using Files
9.3 Using Files
9.3.1 Weaving Basic Coordinate System

Weaving is performed based on the following coordinate system. This
coordinate system is automatically generated according to the conditions
described in a weaving condition file.
Wall direction
Direction of travel
Horizontal direction
Weaving Basic Coordinate System
Wall Direction: Z-direction of the robot axis

Horizontal Direction: The direction of approach point from the wall
Direction of Travel: The direction in which the manipulator moves from the
weaving start point to the end point
SUPPLE-
The approach point is a point indicated by a step
MENT immediately before the step where weaving starts.
Z-axis
Wall direction
Approach point
Horizontal
direction
Depending on the mounting and shape of the workpiece, a

definition of the above coordinate system may not be
NOTE sufficient to generate a weaving pattern. In that case,
register the reference point REFP1 or REFP2. For details,
refer to section 9.3.3.3 “Cases that Require the Registration
of Reference Points” on page 9-34 “.
9-30 519 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
9.3 Using Files
9.3.2 WEAVING CONDITION Window
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
WEAVING CONDITION Window
(1) WEAVING COND NO. (1 to 255)

– Displays a weaving condition file number.
(2) MODE (Weave type)
– There are three weave type: single oscillation, triangle oscillation,
and L-type oscillation. Each type can be specified with or without
smoothing.
0: With smoothing
1: Without smoothing
0 : Single 1 : Triangle 2 : L-type
oscillation oscillation oscillation
Weave Type Smoothing
(3) SPEED
– Specifies how the oscillation speed is defined.
0: Defined by the frequency.
1: Defined by the weaving time for each weaving section.
9-31 520 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
9.3 Using Files
(4) FREQUENCY
– Specifies the weaving frequency if “SPEED (3)” is set to “0: FREQ.”
Note that the maximum frequency is determined by the amplitude as
illustrated in the graph below. Specify a frequency within the
allowable range. Note that the graph only indicates tentative values.
Amplitude 60
(mm)
50
40
30
20
10
0 12345
Frequency(Hz)
Maximum Frequencies for Different Amplitudes
(5) PATTERN
– If “MODE (2)” is set to “0: SINGL,” the angle must be specified.
Wall direction
Angle : 0.1 to 180.0°

Horizontal
Angle direction
"Mode " (Weave Type): Single oscillation
– If “MODE (2)” is set to “1: TRI” or “2: L”, the following information on
the triangle must be specified: vertical distance, horizontal distance,
and angle.
Wall direction
Angle
Vertical Angle: 0.1 to 180.0°
distance Vertical/horizontal distance:
1.0 to 25.0mm
Horizontal direction
Horizontal
distance "Mode " (Weave Type): Triangle or
L-type oscillation
9-32 521 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
9.3 Using Files
(6) ANGLE
– The oscillation angle as measured from the weld line.
– Range: from - 90(deg.) to + 90(deg)

Direction of travel
View A
Angle
+
0°
Angle
-
View A
(7) TIMER (Timer mode)

– As shown below, a single weaving period is divided into three or four
sections. A timer count can be specified for pauses at a point (node)
between sections. (The circled number indicates section number.)
Wall direction Wall direction Wall direction
 
  
  
  
Horizontal Horizontal Horizontal
direction direction direction
Single Triangle L-type
oscillation oscillation oscillation
Set one of the following timer modes:
0 : Weaving stops but manipulator moves.

1 : Manipulator pauses.
0: Weaving stops but manipulator moves. 1: Manipulator pauses.
(8) TIMER (Timer count)

– If “Speed (3) is set to “1: MOVING TIME,” a timer count specified
here determines the duration of a pause (weaving stop or
manipulator pause) at a mode between two sections of (8).
9-33 522 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
9.3 Using Files
9.3.3 Operation Method
9.3.3.1 Displaying a Weaving File

1. Select {ARC WELDING} under the main menu.
2. Select {WEAVING}.
3. Display the desired file number.
– The weaving condition file can be displayed using the page key
GO BACK
PAGE
.
GO BACK
Press the page key PAGE

to call the next file number.
Press [SHIFT]+ page key to call the previous file number.

GO BACK
PAGE

Press the page key to input the desired file number, then press enter
key.
9.3.3.2 Editing Condition Data

1. Select the item to be edited.
2. Input the value using the Numeric keys.
9.3.3.3 Cases that Require the Registration of Reference Points

The registration of the reference point REFP1 or REFP2 is not usually
required. They are required only with a special workpiece condition, etc.
The REFP1, which defines the wall direction, is a point on the wall surface
or its expansion plane. The REFP2, which defines the horizontal
direction, is a point at the right or left side of the wall.
REFP1 REFP2
On the wall surface or At the right or left side of the wall
its expansion plane
Wall
Wall
REFP2
REFP1
Wall direction Wall direction
REFP2
REFP1
Direction Direction
of travel of travel
Horizontal
direction
SUPPLE-
For information on registering REFP, refer to section 3.2.3.2
MENT “Registering Reference Point Instructions” on page 3-18.
9-34 523 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
9.3 Using Files
< Example 1 > REFP1 is registered because the wall direction is not
parallel to the Z-axis of the robot coordinate.
Z-axis
Example
Wall direction
003 MOVL V=120

004 WVON WEV#(1)
REFP1 005 REFP 1
006 MOVL V=50
007 WVOF
< Example 2 > REFP2 is registered because the approach point is at

another side of the wall.
Example
Wall
Approach point Approach point 009 MOVJ VJ=25.00
010 MOVL V=120.0
WVON WEV#(1)
REFP2
011 REFP 2
012 MOVL V=16.7
WVOF
9.3.3.4 Prohibiting Weaving

If the weaving instruction is registered during the check mode of the play
mode or “TEST RUN” or FWD operation in the teach mode, weaving is
executed as well as other move instructions. However, in some cases
when weaving is not wanted because of a workpiece collides, etc., follow
the procedure below to prohibit weaving.
9.3.3.5 Method to Prohibit Weaving in the Check Mode

1. Press [AREA].
3. Select {SPECIAL PLAY}.
4. Select prohibit weaving during the check mode.
– The SPECIAL PLAY window appears.
9-35 524 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
9.3 Using Files
9.3.3.6 Method to Prohibit Weaving During a “TEST RUN” or FWD Operation

1. Press [AREA].
3. Select {SPECIAL TEACH}.
4. Select prohibit weaving during the FWD/TEST RUN operation.
– The SPECIAL TEACH window appears.
9.3.3.7 Prohibiting Weaving By Means of a System Input Signal

The system input signal #40047 is used.
The system input signal can prohibit weaving at any time during a play
operation, regardless of whether or not it is in a check mode.
9-36 525 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
9.4 Table of Work Instructions

• < > indicates alpha-numerical data.
• If multiple items are shown in one additional item section, select
one.
Table 9-1: General-purpose Instructions
Function Turns ON work tools (work instructions).
Additional Displayed only when using

TOOLON TOOL1, TOOL2 multiple manipulators.
Item
Example TOOLON
Function Turns OFF work tools (work instructions).
Additional Displayed only when using

TOOLOF TOOL1, TOOL2 multiple manipulators.
Item
Example TOOLOF
Function Starts weaving.
Displayed only when using

RB1, RB2
Additional multiple manipulators.
WVON
Item
WEV#(<weaving condition file num-
1 to 255
ber>)
Example WVON WEV# (1)
Function Ends weaving.
Displayed only when using

RB1, RB2
Additional multiple manipulators.
WVOF
Item
None
Example WVOF
9-37 526 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
DX100 10 Handling Application
10.1 Outlines
10 Handling Application
10.1 Outlines
10.1.1 Function Keys
7 8 9
f 5 f 6
4 5 6
f 3 f 4
1 2 3
f 1 f 2
0 . -
TOOL1 TOOL2
REFP ON/OFF ON/OFF
Table 10-1: Key Function

Switches the signal output of [f•1] and [f•2] ON and OFF
when [INTERLOCK] is simultaneously pressed. "1" side
gripper valve signals (HAND 1-1 to HAND 4-1 ) can be
2 3 allocated to [f•1] and "2" side gripper valve signals
f 1 f 2 (HAND 1-2 to HAND 4-2) can be allocated to [f•2].
Alternatively, user signals can be allocated to the keys.
The key allocations can be changed from the HANDLING
window or by changing the AP parameters directly.
Switches gripper 1 (HAND 1-1/HAND 1-2) output or the
gripper 2 (HAND 2-1/HAND 2-2) output ON and OFF
when [INTERLOCK] is simultaneously pressed. The out-
. - put signal is a double-solenoid-type signal.
TOOL1 TOOL2
ON/OFF ON/OFF Also, press these keys during editing on the JOB 
CONTENT window in the teach mode to register the
HAND instructions.
Not used.
8 9
f 5 f 6
5 6
f 3 f 4
10-1 527 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
10.1 Outlines
10.1.2 HAND Instruction
10.1.2.1 Function
The following instructions open and close the grippers mounted on
the manipulator. They correspond to single-, double-, and triple-
position solenoids. Up to four grippers can be controlled for each
manipulator. The following sequences are available for solenoid
signal control, according to the valve selected.
 SP (single-solenoid)
The HAND instruction turns ON/OFF the gripper valve (x-1). The
inverse signal is output to the gripper valve (x-2). Connect the valve
to either one when used in a single-solenoid.
 2P (double-solenoid)
The HAND instruction turns ON/OFF the gripper valve (x-1). The
inverse signal is output to the gripper valve (x-2).
 3P (triple-position solenoid)
Adding ALL to the HAND instruction allows both gripper valve (x-1)
and gripper valve (x-2) to be turned ON/OFF simultaneously.
Functions as a double-solenoid if ALL is not added to the HAND
instruction.
Table 10-2: Valve ON/OFF Condition of Each Solenoid
Instruction SP 2P 3P
(x: Gripper No.) (Valve x-1/x-2) (Valve x-1/x-2) (Valve x-1/x-2)
HAND x ON ON/- (-/OFF) ON/OFF ON/OFF
HAND x OFF OFF/- (-/OFF) OFF/ON OFF/ON
HAND x ON
- - ON/ON
ALL
HAND x OFF
- - OFF/OFF
ALL
10.1.2.2 Instruction and Additional Items
HAND #1 1 OFF ALL
(1) (2) (3) (4)
(1) Device Number(#1 or #2)

Sets when two manipulators are used for handling.
(2) Gripper Number(1 to 4)

Required.
10-2 528 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
10.1 Outlines
(3) Gripper Output Status (ON/OFF)

Required.
Select ON or OFF.
(4) Valve Simultaneous Control (ALL)

Adds to turn valves 1 and 2 ON or OFF simultaneously.
10.1.3 HSEN (Gripper Sensor) Instruction
10.1.3.1 Function
Confirm that the gripper sensor is in the specified status. If the
gripper sensor is in the specified status, the result is $B014* and
the next instruction is executed. If a timer is specified, the
instruction waits for the specified time (including infinity) to be input.
10.1.3.2 Instruction and Additional Items
HSEN #1 1 OFF T=10.00
 (1) (2) (3) (4)
(1) Device Number(#1 or #2)

Set when two manipulators are used for handling.
(2) Sensor Number(1 to 8)

Required.
(3) Sensor Input Status (ON/OFF)

Required.
Select ON or OFF.
(4) Signal waiting time (T=0.01 to 655.35sec)

FOREVER: Unlimited time
If omitted, T=0.
$B014: Variable for execution result
Sets the execution result.
0: is set when the instruction is ended before the timer is over.
1: is set when the instruction is ended when the timer is over.
10-3 529 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
10.1 Outlines
10.1.3.3 Examples
HSEN 1 ON FOREVER
OFF FOREVER
Waits until sensor 1 turns ON (OFF). At completion, the result (1: gripper
sensor 1 is ON (OFF)) is set in $B014.
HSEN 1 ON
Checks whether sensor 1 is turned ON at completion of HSEN instruction.

The result (0: gripper sensor 1 is OFF, 1: gripper sensor 1 is ON) is set in
$B014.
HSEN 1 ON T=10.00
Waits 10 seconds for gripper sensor 1 to turn ON. Sets the result 1
(gripper sensor 1 is ON) in $B014 if the sensor input turns ON. Sets the
result 0 (gripper sensor 1 is OFF) if the sensor does not turn ON after 10
seconds.
To observe the $B014 contents with an IF statement, use the GETS
instruction to read the contents to a B variable.
10.1.4 Handling Window
1. Select {ROBOT} under the main menu.

2. Select {HANDLING DIAG}.
– The HANDLING window appears.
3. Select “F1 KEY ALLOCATION” or “F2 KEY ALLOCATION,” and then

edit.
– If a signal from {HAND1} to {HAND4} is selected, the key allocation

to the corresponding gripper valve signal can be modified. (In the
following example, {HAND3} is selected in the “F2 KEY
10-4 530 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
10.1 Outlines
ALLOCATION.”)
When HAND3 is set for the “F2 KEY ALLOCATION”
– When {USER OUT} is selected, the output number of user signal is
asked.
– Input desired number with Numeric keys and press [ENTER] to

change the allocation of user output signal.
An error message is displayed if the input number

SUPPLE-
MENT
lies outside the designated range. Press [CANCEL]
to cancel the modification of the key allocation.
If [f•1] or [f•2] and [INTERLOCK] are pressed simul-
taneously, the output of the designated signal is
switched ON and OFF.
The “-1” gripper valve signals can be allocated to

NOTE [f•1] and the “-2” gripper valve signals can be allo-
cated to [f•2].
4. Select “SHOCK SENSOR FUNC” or “SHOCK SENSOR INPUT,” and

then edit.
– If “SHOCK SENSOR FUNC” is selected, “USED” and “NOT USED”
are alternately displayed.
If “SHOCK SENSOR INPUT” is selected, “VALID” and “INVALID” are
alternately displayed.
The displayed state is the current setting.
SHOCK SENSOR FUNC : NOT USED
SHOCK SENSOR INPUT : VALID
10-5 531 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
10.1 Outlines
10.1.5 Shock Sensor Function

If “SHOCK SENSOR FUNC” is “USED” in the HANDLING window,
the shock sensor is enabled. When the shock sensor does not
exist, set “NOT USED.”
10.1.6 Shock Sensor Input Signal

• Function
When this signal turns OFF, “SHOCK SENSOR WORKING” is
displayed on the programming pendant and the system enters
HOLD status.
• Signal Condition
The signal is normally an ON (NC) signal.
• How to Use the Signal
Input the shock sensor output signal to #20026 (CN309-B2 of
YIU01).
10.1.7 Shock Sensor Input Reset

• Function
This function resets the HOLD status and enables the axis operation
and [FWD]/[BWD] operations in order to allow the manipulator to be
retracted after shock sensor operation.
Set the function on the HANDLING window. If “SHOCK SENSOR
FUNC” is “USED” and “SHOCK SENSOR INPUT” is “INVALID” in
the teach mode, “SHOCK SENSOR INP. RELEASING” is displayed
and the input is disabled. The input is enabled if “SHOCK SENSOR
INPUT” is “VALID.”
SUPPLE-
Refer to section 10.1.4 “Handling Window” on page 10-4 for
MENT details about using this function.
10.1.8 Low Air Pressure Input Signal

• Function
If the air pressure drops, this signal turns ON and triggers a user
alarm (system section) in the play mode. In the teach mode, the
message “AIR PRESSURE LOWERING” is displayed.
• Signal Condition
The signal is normally an OFF (NO) signal.
• How to Use the Signal
Input the low air pressure signal to #20027 (CN309-A2 of YIU01).
The alarm can be reset by turning OFF the signal and reset the
alarm
To perform axis operations while the air pressure is low, set to teach
mode and reset the alarm.The above message is displayed, but
manipulator operations are possible.
10-6 532 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
10.2 Registering Instructions
10.2.1 HAND Instruction

This instruction turns ON/OFF the gripper valve signal and controls the
tool.

2. Select {JOB}.
3. Press [TOOL 1 ON/OFF] or [TOOL 2 ON/OFF].
– “HAND 1 ON” is displayed if [TOOL 1 ON/OFF] is pressed; “HAND 2
ON” is displayed if [TOOL 2 ON/OFF] is pressed in the input buffer
line.
If “HAND” is selected after pressing [INFORM LIST], “HAND 1 ON”
is displayed.
HAND 1 ON
– To register the instruction shown in the input buffer line without

editing, press [INSERT] and then press [ENTER].
4. Select the gripper number and edit.
Tool_no=
HAND ON
– Input the gripper number with the Numeric keys, and press
[ENTER].
HAND 1 ON
5. Select the gripper output status and edit.

– If the UP or DOWN ARROW cursor is pressed together with
[SHIFT], “ON” and “OFF” are alternately displayed.
HAND 1 OFF
– If no settings are to be made for other additional items, press

[INSERT] and then press [ENTER]. The HAND instruction is
registered.
10-7 533 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
6. Edit the valve simultaneous control.

– If inserting a valve simultaneous control (to make the gripper valve 1
output same as the valve 2 output), select “HAND.”
HAND 1 OFF
– The DETAIL EDIT window appears. 

Select “VALVE SIM CTRL.”
– Select “ALL.”
The data of “VALVE SIM CTRL” items change to the “ALL” and the
“ALL” tag is added to the input buffer data.
– Press [ENTER] to display the JOB CONTENT window.

7. Press [INSERT].
8. Press [ENTER].
10-8 534 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
10.2.2 HSEN Instruction

This instruction monitors the various inputs used for handling and outputs
the monitor result as a variable.
2. Select {JOB}.
4. Select the HSEN instruction.
– The HSEN instruction is displayed in the input buffer line.
HSEN 8 ON
– To register the instruction shown in input buffer line without editing,

press [INSERT] and then press [ENTER].
5. Select the sensor number and edit.
Sensor_no.=
HSEN ON
– Input the sensor number with the Numeric keys, and press
[ENTER].
HSEN 1 ON
6. Select the sensor input status and edit.

– If the UP or DOWN ARROW cursor is pressed together with
[SHIFT], “ON” and “OFF” are alternately displayed.
HSEN 1 OFF
– If no settings are to be made for other additional items, press

[INSERT] and then press [ENTER]. The HSEN instruction is
registered.
7. Edit the signal waiting time.
– If inserting a signal waiting time, select “HSEN.”
HSEN 1 OFF

The DETAIL EDIT window appears.
10-9 535 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
– Select “UNUSED.”
The selection dialog box appears.
– Select “T=.”
To make the (controller/hand/robot) to wait indefi-

SUPPLE-
MENT
nitely, select “FOREVER.”
– The data of “WAIT TIME” item changes to the “T=” and the number
item is displayed to the right of that.
– Select the number item.
10-10 536 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD
– The input line appears. Type the number with the Numeric keys.
– Press [ENTER] to display the number value input into the input
buffer line.
– Press [ENTER] to display the JOB CONTENT window.

8. Press [INSERT].
9. Press [ENTER].
10-11 537 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
155507-1CD

• <> indicates alpha-numerical data.
• If multiple items are shown in one additional item section, select one.
Table 10-3: Handling Instructions
Turns ON/OFF signals to the gripper valves to open and close grip-
Function
pers.
# <Device number> #1 or #2
Set when two manipulators
are used for handling.
<Gripper Number> 1 to 4
Required.
Additional <Gripper Output Status> ON or OFF
HAND
Item Required.
ALL Valve simultaneous control

Used to turn gripper valves
1 and 2 ON or OFF simulta-
neously if a 3P solenoid is
used.
HAND 1 ON
Example
HAND #1 1 OFF ALL
Monitors the sensor inputs used for handling applications and out-
Function
puts the monitored results to variable $B014.
$B014 Result variable. Cannot be

displayed on screen.
# <Device number> #1 or #2
Set when two manipulators
are used for handling.
Additional <Gripper Sensor Number> 1 to 8

HSEN Item Required.
<Sensor Input Status> ON or OFF

Required.
T=<signal waiting time> or T:0.01 to 655.35 seconds

FOREVER FOREVER: Unlimited
time. If omitted, T=0.
HSEN 1 ON FOREVER
Example HSEN #2 1 OFF
HSEN 1 ON T=10.00
10-12 538 of 554
RE-CSO-A037
11 Table of Basic Instructions
DX100 11.1 Move Instructions

• <> indicates numerical or alphabetical data.
• If multiple items are shown in one section, select one of the items.
11.1 Move Instructions

MOVJ Function Moves to a taught point with joint interpolation type.
Additional Position data, These data do not
Item Base axis position data, appear on the
Station axis position data screen.
VJ=<play speed> VJ:
0.01 to 100.00%
PL=<position level> PL:0 to 8
NWAIT
UNTIL statement
ACC=(acceleration adjustment ratio) ACC: 20 to 100%
DEC=(deceleration adjustment ratio) DEC: 20 to 100%
Example MOVJ VJ=50.00 PL=2 NWAIT UNTIL IN#(16)=ON
MOVL Function Moves to a taught point with linear interpolation type.
V=<play speed>, V:0.1 to 1500.0
VR=<play speed of the posture>, mm/s
VE=<play speed of external axis> 1 to 9000.0
cm/min
VR:0.1 to 180.0
deg/s
VE:0.01 to
100.00%
CR=(corner radius) CR: 1.0 to
6553.5mm
NWAIT
UNTIL statement
Example MOVL V=138 PL=0 NWAIT UNTIL IN#(16)=ON
MOVC Function Moves to a taught point with circular interpolation type.
V=<play speed>, Same as MOVL.
VR=<play speed of the posture>,
VE=<play speed of external axis>
NWAIT
Example MOVC V=138 PL=0 NWAIT
11-1 539 of 554

MOVS Function Moves to a taught point with spline interpolation type.

NWAIT
Example MOVS V=120 PL=0
IMOV Function Moves the specified increment from the current position with linear
interpolation type.
Additional P<variable number>,
Item BP<variable number>,
EX<variable number>
NWAIT
BF,RF,TF,UF# (<user coordinate number>) BF:
base coordinates
RF:
robot coordinates
TF:
tool coordinates
UF:
user coordinates
UNTIL statement
Example IMOV P000 V=138 PL=1 RF
REFP Function Defines a reference point (e.g. wall point for weaving).
Additional <reference point number> wall point 1 for
Item weaving :1
wall point 2 for
weaving :2
Position data, These data do not
Base axis position data, appear on the
Example REFP 1
SPEED Function Sets play speed.
Additional VJ=<joint speed>, VJ:Same as
Item V=<TCP speed>, MOVJ.
VR=<play speed of the posture>, V,VR,VE:
VE=<play speed of external axis> Same as
MOVL.
Example SPEED VJ=50.00
11-2 540 of 554

CAUTION
When start IMOV instruction again after IMOV instruction was aborted
due to execute the following operations, the manipulator moves the
added values, which is set anew from the aborted position, in the linear
interpolation. The values become greater than the set added value.
Please do not execute the IMOV instruction when changing move
distance by the abort causes a problem.
• External servo OFF signal 2 (#40066)
• Turning OFF the servo power due to alarm occurring
• Enable signal
• Mode switch
• Enable switch
11-3 541 of 554

DX100 11.2 I/O Instructions
11.2 I/O Instructions

DOUT Function Turns the external output signals ON and OFF.
Additional OT# (<output number>),
Item OGH# (<output group number>),
OG# (<output group number>)
Number of addressed output signals:

OT#(xx)=1;OGH#(xx)=4(per group);
OG#(xx)=8(per group)
OGH#(xx) is not subject to parity check; only the binary

specification is allowed.
FINE With a high
degree of
accuracy
Example DOUT OT#(12) ON
PULSE Function Outputs a pulse signal as an external output signal.
Additional OT# (<output number>),
Item OGH# (<output group number>),
OG# (<output group number>)
T=<time (seconds)> 0.01 to
655.35 s
0.30 s unless
otherwise
specified
Example PULSE OT# (10) T=0.60
DIN Function Sets input signals in variables.
Additional B<variable number>
Item IN# (<input number>),
IGH# (<input group number>),
IG# (<input group number>),
OT# (<output number>),
OGH# (<output group number>),
OG# (<output group number>),
SIN# (<system input number>),
SOUT# (<system output number>)
Number of addressed input signals:

IN#(xx)=1;IGH#(xx)=4(per group);
IG#(xx)=8(per group)
Number of addressed output signals:

OT#(xx)=1;OGH#(xx)=4(per group);
OG#(xx)=8(per group)
IGH#(xx) and OGH#(xx) are not subject to parity

check; only the binary specification is allowed.
Example DIN B016 IN#(16)
DIN B002 IG#(2)
11-4 542 of 554

DX100 11.2 I/O Instructions
WAIT Function Waits until the external input signal status matches the specified status.
Additional IN# (<input number>),
Item IGH# (<input group number>),
OT# (<user output number>),
OGH# (<output group number>),
SIN# (<system input number>),
SOUT# (<system output number>)
<status>,B<variable number>
T=<time (seconds)> 0.01 to
655.35 s
Example WAIT IN# (12)=ON T=10.00
WAIT IN# (12)=B002
AOUT Function Outputs the specified voltage to the general-purpose analog output port.
Additional AO# (<output port number>) 1 to 40
Item <output voltage(V)> -14.0 to 14.0
Example AOUT AO# (2) 12.7
ARATION Function Starts the analog output corresponding to the speed.
Additional AO#(<output port number>) 1 to 40
Item BV = <basic voltage> -14.00 to 14.00
V = <basic speed> 0.1 to
150.0 mm/s
1 to 9000 cm/min
OFV = <offset voltage> -14.00 to 14.00
Example ARATION AO#(1) BV=10.00 V=200.0 OFV=2.00
ARATIOF Function Ends the analog output corresponding to the speed.
Additional AO#(<output port number>) 1 to 40
Item
Example ARATIOF AO#(1)
11-5 543 of 554

DX100 11.3 Control Instructions
11.3 Control Instructions

JUMP Function Jumps to the specified label or job.
Additional * <label character string>,
Item JOB:<job name>,
B<variable number>,
I<variable number>,
D<variable number>
UF# (user coordinates number)
IF statement
Example JUMP JOB:TEST1 IF IN#(14)=OFF
* Function Indicates a jump destination.
(label) Additional <jump destination> 8 characters or
Item less
Example *123
CALL Function Calls the specified job.
Additional JOB:<job name>,
Item IG# (<input group number>),
B<variable number>,
I<variable number>,
D<variable number>
UF# (user coordinates number)
IF statement
Example CALL JOB:TEST1 IF IN# (24)=ON
CALL IG#(2)
(The job is called by the patterns of input signal. In this example, Job 0
cannot be called.)
RET Function Returns to the call source job.
Additional IF statement
Item
Example RET IF IN#(12)=OFF
END Function Declares the end of a job.
Additional
Item
Example END
NOP Function No operation.
Additional
Item
Example NOP
TIMER Function Stops for the specified time.
Additional T=<time (seconds)> 0.01 to
Item 655.35 s
Example TIMER T=12.50
IF Function Evaluates the specified condition and makes a judgment accordingly.
Described after an instruction that specifies a certain action.
statement
Format:<Item1>=,<>,<=,>=,<,><Item2>
Additional <Item1>
Item <Item2>
Example JUMP *12 IF IN#(12)=OFF
11-6 544 of 554

DX100 11.3 Control Instructions
UNTIL Function Monitors the specified input signal during an action and stops the action
when the specified signal status is observed. Described after an instruction
statement
that specifies a certain action.
Additional IN# (<input number>)
Item <status>
Example MOVL V=300 UNTIL IN#(10)=ON
PAUSE Function Instructs a pause.
Additional IF statement
Item
Example PAUSE IF IN#(12)=OFF
’ Function Dispalys a comment.
(comment) Additional <comment> 32 characters or
Item less
Example ’Draws 100mm size square.
CWAIT Function Waits for execution of the instruction on the next line.
Used with the NWAIT tag which is an additional item of a move instruction.
Additional
Item
Example MOVL V=100 NWAIT
DOUT OT#(1) ON
CWAIT
DOUT OT#(1) OFF
MOVL V=100
ADVINIT Function Initializes the prereading instruction processing.
Used to adjust the access timing for variable data.
Additional
Item
Example ADVINIT
ADVSTOP Function Stops the prereading instruction processing.
Used to adjust the access timing for variable data.
Additional
Item
Example ADVINIT
11-7 545 of 554

DX100 11.4 Shift Instructions
11.4 Shift Instructions

SFTON Function Starts a shift operation.
Additional P<variable number>, BF:
Item BP<variable number>, base coordinates
EX<variable number>, RF:
BF,RF,TF, robot coordi-
UF#(<user coordinate number>)
nates
TF:
tool coordinates
UF:
user coordinates
Example SFTON P001 UF#(1)
SFTOF Function Stops a shift operation.
Additional
Item
Example SFTOF
MSHIFT Function Obtains the shift value in the specified coordinate system from Data 2 and
3, and stores the obtained element values in Data 1.
Format:MSHIFT <Data1><Coordinate><Data2><Data3>
Additional Data1 PX<variable number>
Item Coordinate BF,RF,TF, BF:
UF# (<user coordinate number>), base coordinates
MTF RF:
robot coordi-
nates
TF:
tool coordinates
UF:
user coordinates
MTF:
tool coordinates
for the master
Data2 PX<variable number>
Data3 PX<variable number>
Example MSHIFT PX000 RF PX001 PX002
11-8 546 of 554

DX100 11.5 Operating Instructions
11.5 Operating Instructions

ADD Function Adds Data1 and Data2, and stores the result in Data1.
Format:ADD<Data1><Data2>
Additional Data1 B<variable number>, Data1 must
Item I<variable number>, always be a
D<variable number>, variable.
R<variable number>,
P<variable number>,
BP<variable number>,
EX<variable number>
Data2 Constant,
B<variable number>,
I<variable number>,
D<variable number>,
R<variable number>,
P<variable number>,
EX<variable number>
Example ADD I012 I013
SUB Function Subtracts Data2 from Data1, and stores the result in Data1.
Format:SUB<Data1><Data2>
R<variable number>,
P<variable number>,
EX<variable number>
Data2 Constant,
B<variable number>,
I<variable number>,
D<variable number>,
R<variable number>,
P<variable number>,
EX<variable number>
Example SUB I012 I013
11-9 547 of 554

MUL Function Multiplies Data1 by Data2, and stores the result in Data1.
Format:MUL<Data1><Data2>
Data1 can be an element in a position variable.

Pxxx(0):all axis data, Pxxx(1):X-axis data,
Pxxx(2):Y-axis data, Pxxx(3):Z-axis data,
Pxxx(4):Tx-axis data, Pxxx(5):Ty-axis data,
Pxxx(6):Tz-axis data
R<variable number>,
P<variable number> (<element
number>),
BP<variable number> (<element
number>),
EX<variable number> (<element
number>)
Data2 Constant,
B<variable number>,
I<variable number>,
D<variable number>,
R<variable number>
Example MUL I012 I013
MUL P000 (3) 2 (Multiply the Z-axis data by 2.)
DIV Function Divides Data1 by Data2, and stores the result in Data1.
Format:DIV<Data1><Data2>
Data1 can be an element in a position variable.

Pxxx(0):all axis data, Pxxx(1):X-axis data,
Pxxx(2):Y-axis data, Pxxx(3):Z-axis data,
Pxxx(4):Tx-axis data, Pxxx(5):Ty-axis data,
Pxxx(6):Tz-axis data
R<variable number>,
P<variable number> (<element
number>),
number>),
number>)
Data2 Constant,
B<variable number>,
I<variable number>,
D<variable number>,
R<variable number>
Example DIV I012 I013
DIV P000 (3) 2 (Divide the Z-axis data by 2.)
INC Function Increments the value of the specified variable by 1.
Additional B<variable number>,I<variable number>,
Item D<variable number>
Example INC I043
DEC Function Decrements the value of the specified variable by 1.
Additional B<variable number>,I<variable number>,
Item D<variable number>
Example DEC I043
11-10 548 of 554

AND Function Obtains the AND of Data1 and Data2, and stores the result in Data1.
Format:AND<Data1><Data2>
Additional Data1 B<variable number>
Item Data2 B<variable number>, Constant
Example AND B012 B020
OR Function Obtains the OR of Data1 and Data2, and stores the result in Data1.
Format:OR<Data1><Data2>
Example OR B012 B020
NOT Function Obtains the NOT of Data2, and stores the result in Data1.
Format:NOT<Data1><Data2>
Example NOT B012 B020
XOR Function Obtains the exclusive OR of Data1 and Data2, and stores the result in
Data1.
Format:XOR<Data1><Data2>
Example XOR B012 B020
SET Function Sets Data2 to Data1.
Format:SET<Data1><Data2>
R<variable number>,
P<variable number>,
S<variable number>,
EX<variable number>
Data2 Constant,
B<variable number>,
I<variable number>,
D<variable number>,
R<variable number>,
S<variable number>,
EXPRESS
Example SET I012 I020
SETE Function Sets data to an element in a position variable.
Additional Data 1 P<variable number> (<element
Item number>),
number>),
number>)
Data 2 D<variable number>,
<double-precision integer type
constant>
Example SETE P012 (3) D005
11-11 549 of 554

GETE Function Extracts an element in a position variable.

Additional D<variable number>
Item P<variable number> (<element number>),
BP<variable number> (<element number>),
EX<variable number> (<element number>)
Example GETE D006 P012 (4)
GETS Function Sets a system variable to the specified variable.
Additional B<variable number>,
Item I<variable number>,
D<variable number>,
R<variable number>,
PX<variable number>
$B<variable number>, System variable
$I<variable number>,
$D<variable number>,
$R<variable number>,
$PX<variable number>, $ERRNO,
Constant, B<variable number>
Example GETS B000 $B000
GETS I001 $I[1]
GETS PX003 $PX001
CNVRT Function Converts the position variable (Data2) into a position variable of the
specified coordinate system, and stores the converted variable in Data1.
Format:CNVRT<Data1><Data2><coordinate>
Additional Data1 PX<variable number>
Item Data2 PX<variable number>
BF,RF,TF,UF# (<user coordinate number>),MTF BF:
base coordinates
RF:
robot coordinates
TF:
tool coordinates
UF:
user coordinates
MTF:tool
coordinates for the
master
Example CNVRT PX000 PX001 BF
11-12 550 of 554

CLEAR Function Starting with the variable number in Data1, clears (sets to zero) as many
variables as specified by a number in Data2.
Format:CLEAR<Data1><Data2>
Additional Data1 B<variable number>,
Item I<variable number>,
D<variable number>,
R<variable number>,
$B<variable number>,
$I<variable number>,
$D<variable number>,
$R<variable number>,
Data2 <number of variables>, ALL,STACK ALL:Clears
variables of the
variable number in
Data1 and of all
the variable
numbers that
follow.
STACK:Clears all
variables in the job
call stack.
Example CLEAR B000 ALL
CLEAR STACK
SIN Function Obtains the sine of Data2, and stores the result in Data1.
Format:SIN<Data1><Data2>
Additional Data1 R<variable number> Data1 must
Item always be a real
type variable.
Data2 <constant>,
R<variable number>
Example SIN R000 R001 (Sets the sine of R001 to R000.)
COS Function Obtains the cosine of Data2, and stores the result in Data1.
Format:COS<Data1><Data2>
type variable.
Data2 <constant>,
R<variable number>
Example COS R000 R001 (Sets the cosine of R001 to R000.)
ATAN Function Obtains the arc tangent of Data2, and stores the result in Data1.
Format:ATAN<Data1><Data2>
type variable.
Data2 <constant>,
R<variable number>
Example ATAN R000 R001 (Sets the arc tangent of R001 to R000.)
SQRT Function Obtains the square root of Data2, and stores the result in Data1.
Format:SQRT<Data1><Data2>
type variable.
Data2 <constant>,
R<variable number>
Example SQRT R000 R001 (Sets the square root of R001 to R000.)
11-13 551 of 554

MFRAME Function Creates a user coordinate using the position data for the given three points
as definition points. <Data1> indicates the definition point ORG position
data, <Data2> the definition point XX position data, and <Data3> the
definition point XY position data.
Format: MFRAME <user coordinate> <Data1> <Data2> <Data3>
Additional UF#(<user coordinate number>) 1 to 24
Item Data1 PX <variable number>
Data2 PX <variable number>
Data3 PX <variable number>
Example MFRAME UF#(1) PX000 PX001 PX002
MULMAT Function Obtains the matrix product of Data2 and Data3, and stores the result in
Data1.
Format: MULMAT <Data1> <Data2> <Data3>
Additional Data1 P <variable number>
Item Data2 P <variable number>
Data3 P <variable number>
Example MULMAT P000 P001 P002
INVMAT Function Obtains the inverse matrix of Data2, and stores the result in Data1.
Format: INVMAT <Data1> <Data2>
Additional Data1 P <variable number>
Item Data2 P <variable number>
Example INVMAT P000 P001
SETFILE Function Changes the contents data of a condition file into the numeric data of Data1.
The contents data of a condition file to be changed is specified by the
element number.
Additional Contents WEV#(<condition file
Item data of a number>)(<element number>)
condition file
Data1 Constant,
D<variable number>
Example SETFILE WEV#(1)(1) D000
GETFILE Function Stores the contents data of a condition file in Data1. The contents data of a
condition file to be obtained is specified by the element number.
Additional Data1 D <variable number>
Item Contents WEV#(<condition file
data of a number>)(<element number>)
condition file
Example GETFILE D000 WEV#(1)(1)
GETPOS Function Stores the position data of Data2 (step number) in Data1.
Additional Data1 PX <variable number>
Item Data2 STEP# (<step number>)
Example GETPOS PX000 STEP#(1)
VAL Function Converts the numeric value of the character string (ASCII) of Data2 into the
real number, and stores the result in Data1.
Format: VAL <Data1> <Data2>
Additional Data1 B <variable number>,
Item I <variable number>,
D <variable number>,
R <variable number>
Data2 Character string,
S <variable number>
Example VAL B000 “123”
11-14 552 of 554

ASC Function Obtains the character code of the first letter of the character string (ASCII) of
Data2, and stores the result in Data1.
Format:ASC<Data1><Data2>
D <variable number>
S <variable number>
Example ASC B000 “ABC”
CHR$ Function Obtains the character (ASCII) with the character code of Data2, and stores
the result in Data1.
Format:CHR$<Data1><Data2>
Additional Data1 S <variable number>
Item Data2 Constant,
B <variable number>
Example CHR$ S000 65
MID$ Function Obtains the character string (ASCII) of any length (Data 3, 4) from the
character string (ASCII) of Data2, and stores the result in Data1.
Format:MID$<Data1><Data2><Data3><Data4>
Item Data2 Character string,
S <variable number>
Data3 Constant,
B <variable number>,
I <variable number>,
D <variable number>
Data4 Constant,
B <variable number>,
I <variable number>,
D <variable number>
Example MID$ S000 “123ABC456” 4 3
LEN Function Obtains the total number of bytes of the character string (ASCII) of Data2,
and stores the result in Data1.
Format:LEN<Data1><Data2>
D <variable number>
S <variable number>
Example LEN B000 “ABCDEF”
CAT$ Function Combines the character string (ASCII) of Data2 and Data3, and stores the
result in Data1.
Format:CAT$<Data1><Data2><Data3>
Item Data2 Character string,
S <variable number>
S <variable number>
Example CAT$ S000 “ABC” “DEF”
11-15 553 of 554

DX100
OPERATOR’S MANUAL
FOR MATERIAL HANDLING, PRESS TENDING, CUTTING,
AND OTHER APPLICATIONS
HEAD OFFICE
2-1 Kurosakishiroishi, Yahatanishi-ku, Kitakyushu 806-0004, Japan
Phone +81-93-645-7703 Fax +81-93-645-7802
YASKAWA America Inc. (Motoman Robotics Division)

100 Automation Way, Miamisburg, OH 45342, U.S.A.
Phone +1-937-847-6200 Fax +1-937-847-6277
YASKAWA Europe GmbH Robotics Divsion )

Yaskawastrasse 1, 85391 Allershausen, Germany
Phone +49-8166-90-100 Fax +49-8166-90-103
YASKAWA Nordic AB
Verkstadsgatan 2, Box 504 ,SE-385 25 Torsas, Sweden
Phone +46-480-417-800 Fax +46-486-414-10
YASKAWA Electric (China) Co., Ltd.

22F, One Corporate Avenue, No.222, Hubin Road, Huangpu District, Shanghai 200021, China
Phone +86-21-5385-2200 Fax 㸩86-21-5385-3299
YASKAWA SHOUGANG ROBOT Co. Ltd.
No7 Yongchang North Road, Beijing E&T Development AreaChina 100176
Phone +86-10-6788-2858 Fax +86-10-6788-2878
YASKAWA India Private Ltd. (Robotics Division)

#426, Udyog Vihar, Phase- IV,Gurgaon, Haryana, India
Phone +91-124-475-8500 Fax +91-124-475-8542
YASKAWA Electric Korea Corporation

35F, Three IFC, 10 Gukjegeumyung-ro, Yeongdeungpo-gu, Seoul, Korea 07326
Phone +82-2-784-7844 Fax +82-2-784-8495
YASKAWA Electric Taiwan Corporation

12F, No.207, Sec. 3, Beishin Rd., Shindian District, New Taipei City 23143, Taiwan
Phone +886-2-8913-1333 Fax +886-2-8913-1513
YASKAWA Electric (Singapore) PTE Ltd.

151 Lorong Chuan, #04-02A, New Tech Park, Singapore 556741
Phone +65-6282-3003 Fax +65-6289-3003
YASKAWA Electric (Thailand) Co., Ltd.

59,1st-5th Floor, Flourish Building, Soi Ratchadapisek 18,Ratchadapisek Road,
Huaykwang, Bangkok 10310, THAILAND
Phone +66-2-017-0099 Fax +66-2-017-0199
PT. YASKAWA Electric Indonesia

Secure Building-Gedung B Lantai Dasar & Lantai 1 JI. Raya Protokol Halim Perdanakusuma,
Jakarta 13610, Indonesia
Phone +62-21-2982-6470 Fax +62-21-2982-6741
Specifications are subject to change without notice

for ongoing product modifications and improvements.
554 of 554
MANUAL NO.
RE-CSO-A037 7

Operator'S Manual: For Material Handling, Press Tending, Cutting, and Other Applications

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Operator'S Manual: For Material Handling, Press Tending, Cutting, and Other Applications

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Operator'S Manual: For Material Handling, Press Tending, Cutting, and Other Applications

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

DX100

Part Number: 155507-1CD

MANUAL NO. 1 of 554

Copyright © 2018, 2015, 2013, 2012 Yaskawa America, Inc.

Terms of Use and Copyright Notice

Printed in the United States of America

First Printing, 2012

Yaskawa America, Inc.

Notes for Safe Operation

Indicates an imminent hazardous

Indicates a potentially hazardous

Indicates a potentially hazardous

Always be sure to follow explicitly the

Must never be performed.

Even items described as “CAUTION” may result in a serious accident in

To ensure safe and efficient operation at all times, be sure

• Once the emergency stop button is released, clear the cell of

• Observe the following precautions when performing teaching

Definition of Terms Used In this Manual

Descriptions of the programming pendant keys, buttons, and displays are

ex. page key PAGE

The cursor key is an exception, and a picture

Description of the Operation Procedure

Mechanical Safety Devices

Programming, Operation, and Maintenance Safety

Summary of Warning Information

Customer Support Information

When using e-mail to contact YASKAWA Customer Support, please

Please use e-mail for routine inquiries only. If you have an

• Primary Application ___________________________

• Software Version Access this information on the

• Robot Serial Number Located on the robot data plate

• Robot Sales Order Number Located on the DX100 controller

1 Introduction ..................................................................................................................................... 1-1

1.1 DX100 Overview................................................................................................................ 1-1

1.2 Programming Pendant....................................................................................................... 1-2

1.2.1 Programming Pendant Overview.......................................................................... 1-2

1.2.2 Key Description .................................................................................................... 1-3

1.2.3 Programming Pendant Keys................................................................................. 1-4

1.2.4 Programming Pendant Display........................................................................... 1-11

1.2.5 Screen Descriptions ........................................................................................... 1-17

1.2.6 Character Input Operation .................................................................................. 1-18

1.3 Mode................................................................................................................................ 1-29

1.3.1 Teach Mode ....................................................................................................... 1-29

1.3.2 Play Mode .......................................................................................................... 1-29

1.3.3 Remote Mode ..................................................................................................... 1-29

1.3.4 Teach Mode Priority ........................................................................................... 1-29

1.4 Security Mode.................................................................................................................. 1-30

1.4.1 Types of Security Modes .................................................................................... 1-30

1.4.2 Changing Security Modes .................................................................................. 1-35

2 Manipulator Coordinate Systems and Operations .......................................................................... 2-1

2.1 Control Groups and Coordinate Systems .......................................................................... 2-1

2.1.1 Control Group ....................................................................................................... 2-1

2.1.2 Types of Coordinate Systems .............................................................................. 2-2

2.2 General Operations............................................................................................................ 2-3

2.3 Coordinate Systems and Axis Operation ........................................................................... 2-5

2.3.1 Joint Coordinates.................................................................................................. 2-5

2.3.2 Cartesian Coordinates .......................................................................................... 2-6

2.3.3 Cylindrical Coordinates......................................................................................... 2-7